23A-114 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms,vaults, storage rooms, kitchen,machine rooms,
outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. Refer to Section 07841 for additional
requirements.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.or
Architect-Engineer approved equal,4"minimum thickness by the required full length
and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings apply "Firecorde" seal compound as
manufactured by SUG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no void. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with safing
insulation with sealing compound.
END OF SECTION 16100
04018-.Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-30
F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height from the floor
and shall hang plumb.
G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment,they must
be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper
operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers,
lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances.
3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor or
above backsplash at counters and at 3'-6"in toilets. Switch outlets shall be 48"above finished
floor,unless otherwise noted. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check with the Architectural
and Structural Plans for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without
excessive bending of the conductors,which would damage the conductor insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of
finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used,shall be provided with covers.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the drawings or not,and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by this Subcontractor and
be included in his bid.
3.7 FIRE SAFING
A. Work included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to the following:
1. Fire Safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-29
E. Provide an insulated ground wire and an isolated grounding system to all equipment and
devices marked as isolated ground(I.G.). No other grounding connection shall be made to this
system. Final connection for the isolated grounding system shall be made at the building
grounding point.
3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than
the equivalent of three 90° bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the
Electrical Subcontractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably
protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction
boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 14/4" or
larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18"of flexible steel conduit to
eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable
jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling
mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
E. All empty conduits shall be left with a 14 gauge soft iron fish wire or equivalent.
3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting fixtures
shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until
paint is thoroughly dry.
B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and ductwork
is in place. Lighting fixtures layout shown on the drawings is typical layout, but may be
modified to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to final construction
conditions. Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed by
the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of all lighting fixture
locations. Provide support for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall
confer with Ceiling Contractor and HVAC Contractor to co-ordinate lighting system with
other trades.
D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the fixture
does not provide a_suitable cover.
E. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-plated brass screws and
gasketed.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-28
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause
no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. This Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of
same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those
shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, this Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere
with his, the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders,mains,and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The
exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to
work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation
shall conform to the latest issue of the National Electrical Code and local inspection
authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes,control, and apparatus,shall be made
accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise,all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of
electrical equipment,metallic raceway systems,grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways
and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be
made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment,power and lighting systems installed under
this Contract.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and
equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections.
Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where
required, conforming with the latest National Electrical Code and other applicable
specification standards.
D. A#12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible
metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment
components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at
each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of
positively secured ground clamp in each.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.27
17. Lighting Fixtures:
a. Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the Standard for Safety UL-57.
b. Provide a lateral bracing system.
C. Fixture supports will employ materials,which are suitable for the purpose.
d. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures shall be filled with
a restraining device to hold the stem in the support position during earthquake
motions.
e. Pendant supported fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided with a flexible hanger
device at the attachment to the fixture channel to preclude breaking of the support.
The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall not cause sharp bends in conductors
or damage to insulation.
f. Each recessed fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be
supported by a seismic resistant suspended ceiling support system, and shall be
fastened thereto at each corner of the fixture; or shall be provided with fixture
support wired attached to the building structural members using two wires for
individual fixtures and one wire per unit of continuous row fixtures.These support
wires (min.No. 12 ga wire)will be capable of supporting four times the support
load.
g. A supporting assembly,which is intended to be mounted on an outlet box,will be
designed to accommodate mounting features on four-inch boxes, three inch plaster
rings,and fixture studs.
h. Each surface mounted fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be
attached to a seismic resistant ceiling support system. Fixture support devices shall
be locking type scissor clamp, or a full loop band,which will securely attach to the
ceiling support.
i. Fixtures attached to the underside of a structural slab shall be properly anchored to
the slab at each corner of the fixture.
j. Each wall mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a manner to hold the
unit in place during a seismic disturbance.
k. Suspension systems for lighting fixtures that are free to swing a minimum of 45°
from the vertical in all directions are acceptable if a passing shaking table test
approved by the using agency is conducted and will withstand without failure a
force of not less than four times its own weight.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-26
by Mason Industries, Inc.
11. Hangers shall be as described in 10,but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated
deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed
elevation during installation.The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to
free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load.
Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing
of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic
loads with a minimum safety factor of two(2) and arranged to provide all-directional
restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation
angle and utilize two(2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must
not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage
Preapproval"R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum
certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis
bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads with a
minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid
brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and
utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall
have anchorage pre-approval"R"Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying
the maximum certified load ratings.Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
14. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from undersized
wire that is"rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety
shoulder,which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an
evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service,Inc.verifying its allowable
loads. Drill-in stud wedge anchors shall be type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries
or equal.
15. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can be slid
into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full
diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load.
Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation
Service, Inc.verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be type
SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries or equal.
16. Housekeeping pad anchors shall consist of a ductile iron casting that is tapered and
hexagonal,smaller at its base than at its top. The upper portion shall have holes for rebar
to pass through. The anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the
attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be attached to the structural slab
using a stud wedge anchor. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be type HPA and stud wedge
anchor shall be type SAS both as manufactured by Mason Industries or equal.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.25
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Specification 5,
within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when
weight is removed.The housing shall serve as blocking during erection.A steel spacer shall
be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal.A minimum
clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing
and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of
contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there
must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces.
Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval"R"Number from OSHPD in the state of
California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.Mountings
shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide
all directional seismic snubbing.The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a
maximum if 1/4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars.
Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval"R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.Mountings
shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by a
replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element.Air spring configuration shall be
multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz.Air Springs shall be
designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum
operating pressure.All air spring systems shall be connected to either the building control
air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3)-leveling valves to maintain
leveling within plus or minus 1/8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency,load and
damping tests performed by an independent lab or acoustician.Air Springs shall be Type
MT and leveling valves Type IV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in Specification 8,
within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when
weight is removed.The housing shall serve as blocking during erection.A steel spacer shall
be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal.A minimum
clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing
and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.
Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces.Mountings shall be SLR-MT as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 14/4 in. thick neoprene
elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification 5
seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom.The neoprene element and
the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box.To maintain
stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element
stacked on top of the spring.Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be
large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 308 arc from side to side before
contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring.Submittals shall include a
hanger Drawing showing the 308 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-24
J. Product Intent.
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the product of
a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications;
products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with
the Specifications and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and
certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any attachment
point between equipment or structure,vertical permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in.
and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in.
K. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
1. Two(2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle modules
separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used
as required. Pads shall be Type Super"W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 in. and
all directional seismic capability.The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting
containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements.The elements shall
prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during
normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-
bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval"R"Number from
OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical
load ratings.Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies
consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves.The outer sleeve
prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required.
Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally.A steel
disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a
stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation in three (3)
planes.Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel cross members where
applicable.All assemblies shall be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing.The bushing shall surround
the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact.Neoprene bushings
shall be Type HO as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete
with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 im neoprene acoustical friction pad between the
baseplate and the support.All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly
bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed
height of the spring at rated load.Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid
equal to 50%of the rated deflection.Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection,
compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.23
C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of uninsolated -0%41
equipment.
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure
proper installation and performance.
H. Related Work:
1. Housekeeping Pads:
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure
details and design shall be prepared by the restraint vendor if not already indicated
on the Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide
a minimum edge distance of ten(10)bolt diameters all around the outermost
anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in
anchors are to be used,the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the
ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment.
2. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for
all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or
specified.
3. Attachments: Contractor shall supply restraint attachments plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements
of the vibration vendor's calculations.
I. Seismic Force Levels:
1. The following force levels will be used on this project.
a. Minimum"G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in F.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct& for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility Mounted
Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
UBC
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2
SBCCI
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.22
4. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number,
size and locations for each piece of equipment.
E. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
1. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the
structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least
five (5)years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job location.
2. All restraining devices shall have a pre-approval number form California OSHPD or some
other recognized government agency showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-approvals
based on independent testing are preferred pre-approvals based on calculations. Where
pre-approved devices are not available,submittals based on independent testing are
preferred. Calculations (including the combing of tensile and shear loading)to support
seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least
five (5)years of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job location.
Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or
analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode.
3. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads,static seismic loads and capacity of materials
utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring
methods,bolt diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices
shall be designed to accept,without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through
the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level.
F. Code and Standards Requirement:
1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code:
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
C. NFPA 13, 14, 20, and 90A.
d. Massachusetts State Plumbing and Gas Code.
e. Massachusetts Electrical Code.
G. Manufacture's Responsibility:
1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following
responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.21
all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection
and/or emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air handlers,
conduit, duct,dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule.
2. Positive Attachment: A positive attachment is defined as a cast in-anchor, a drill-in wedge
anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded"C" type
beam clamps for support rods of electrical conduit,bus duct, or cable trays, or any other
equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points.
3. Transverse Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the
centerline of the pipe,duct or conduit.
4. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit moti0on parallel to the centerline of
the pipe.
D. Manufacture's Data:
1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide submittals for
products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data:
1._ Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing
compliance with the Specification.
2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration
isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions,
structural member sizes and support point locations.
2. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment
3. Where walls,floors, slabs, or supplementary steelwork are used for seismic
restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts,
conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the condition is
accepted for installation. Restraint manufacture's submittals must include
spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support
points. ...�,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-20
4. The Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration and
is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent,national, state or local construction
requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other
requirements).
5. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected by
the Contractor in an approved manner.
6. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in Section
L
B. The work in this Section includes,but is not limited to, the following:
1. Vibration isolation for equipment.
2. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
3. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment
4. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
5. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
6. All electrical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services
through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical
(Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification.)
a. Battery Packs
b. Generators
C. Bus Ducts
d. Light Fixtures
e. Cable Trays
f. Comp. Room Units
g. Switching Gear
h. Conduit
i. Transformers
j. Electrical Panels
k. Unit Substations
C. Definitions
1. Life Safety Systems:
a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire pumps,
jockey pumps, fire pump control panels,service water supply piping,water tanks,
fire dampers and smoke exhaust systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-19
The sizes of the different wires shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Color code shall be •*�+
used throughout. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from grounds
or crosses between the conductors. All junction boxes shall be painted red and shall have
nameplates identifying, "Fire Alarm".
N. Final connections between control equipment and wiring system shall be made under direct
supervision of a representative of the manufacturer.
O. The manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate the operation of the alarm system to the
Architect and Owner.
P. The Electrical Subcontractor shall coordinate the system installation with the Northampton
Fire Chief.
Q. In addition to Shop Drawing requirements listed under Section 1.07 of this Specification,the
fire alarm system submittals shall also include emergency battery calculations and wiring
diagram, including wire size,type, and quantities.
2.18 BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
A- The Contractor shall supply and install ceiling speakers with built-in volume controls.
Speakers shall be as manufactured by Atlas/Soundolier,Model SV 17 K and supplied with white
grilles, back boxes and support bars. Speakers in specified areas shall utilize wall mounted
volume controls. A ten-watt attenuator shall be installed on the wall of four(4)specified areas
as marked on the print. Speakers shall be powered by a 30-watt mixer/amplifier to be supplied
with two (2) input modules to accept input from a FM tuner and a combination CD/tape
player. The combo CD/tape player shall be a one-piece unit. The system shall be tested and
balanced to provide a uniform coverage of sound throughout the bank area. The system shall
be supplied with a one-year guarantee on parts and labor.
2.19 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
A. It is the intent of the seismic portion of this Specification to keep all electrical building system
components in place during a seismic event.
1. All electrical equipment and conduit, as noted on the equipment schedule or in the
Specification,shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent
the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure.
Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce
reasonably uniform deflections.
2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be certified
by the manufacturer.
3. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component
manufactures and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the
manufactures or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply. 10"11-
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.18
4. Battery charging unit shall be a variable rate type, having both a high and trickle
charge capability. A high charge LED shall be illuminated whenever the battery is
being charged at a high rate. Meters shall be included to display both system voltage
and current. Batteries shall be lead calcium type,sized to provide 60 hours of standby
under AC power loss and sufficient power to operate alarm signals for 10 minutes at
the end of 60 hours.
5. A drill switch shall be provided to test alarm signaling circuits without activating the
common alarm circuits.
6. The signal circuits shall operate supervised 24 volts DC polarized horns and lamps.
The circuits shall be supervised so as to report open or shorted lines by way of the
system trouble signal as well as illuminating its own amber LED. Provide sufficient
modules and circuits to power all equipment as shown.
E. Manual stations shall be Gamewell Model M46.28. Stations must be metal. Plastic stations
will not be acceptable.
F. Provide Gamewell Model R7 photoelectric detectors. The detector source shall be a pulsed
infrared LED for low power consumption under standby conditions at 24 VDC. Internal
detector circuits shall be shielded against electrical interference. It shall be resistant to
transients, "noise"and RF interference. The detector shall be capable of operating on a two-
wire loop initiating circuit.
G. Provide duct type smoke detectors Gamewell Model 70958 complete with auxiliary contacts,
sampling tubes,and remote indicator/test station. Install in discharge duct of each of the three
(3) air handling units.
H. Alarm horn and light shall be comprised of a flush modular 24 VDC vibrating horn and xenon
flasher, tamper resistant lamp assembly with red"FIRE"lettering and mounted together on a
molded red,Lexan frame. Unit shall be Gamewell Model MT 24-LSM VFR.
I. Strobe indicating device shall be comprised of a flush modular 24 VDC Xenon flasher,tamper
resistant lamp assembly with red"Fire"lettering mounted on a molded red,Lexan frame. Unit
shall be Gamewell Model 71544.
J. The remote annunciator shall be flush mounted. Zone designations shall be as required.
Annunciator shall be Gamewell Model M70062, 12 zone type.
K. Heat detectors shall be Gamewell Series 50410 low profile type units and shall be fixed
temperature or rate of rise as suitable.
L. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions all additional wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection of a
complete system as described herein.
M. All new wiring shall be in conduit and of the same approved type as used for electric light and
power wiring,and shall meet the requirements of all national,state and local electrical codes.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.17
b. Indicate the zone in alarm on the control panel annunciator by lighting the 1OWN
red LED zone alarm indicator.
C. Indicate the zone on all remote annunciators.
d. Flash the alarm lights and sound the alarm signals in the building.
2. Failure of normal power, low battery voltage, grounded, open, or shorted line
conditions on the horn and alarm light circuits, ground and open condition on the
alarm initiating circuits shall cause individual amber trouble LED's to illuminate on
the control panel as well as cause trouble signal to sound. The audible trouble signal
may be silenced with the trouble signal silencing switch,but amber trouble indicators
shall remain on until the trouble condition has been remedied. Restoration of the
circuits to normal shall automatically extinguish the trouble indicators without having
to operate additional controls.
3. In the event of a commercial power interruption, the system shall automatically
transfer to a lead calcium standby battery source of sufficient capacity to be in
accordance with NFPA 72B.
4. Panel shall provide common Form C alarm and trouble contacts, a green power on
LED,common alarm and trouble LED's,low battery,cable fault,bell loop,and earth
ground LED's. A lamp test switch shall be provided to test all LED's.
D. Control Panel
1. The control panel shall be a Gamewell Zans 400 control unit providing up to 12
zones. Fire alarm controls shall be housed together in a surface mount enclosure. All
switches,visual indicators, meters, and other controls shall be mounted on modular
pluggable inserts and be visible,but protected behind a tempered glass door panel so
that only authorized personnel shall have keyed access. Provide as many initiating and
signal circuits as required.
2. The alarm initiating circuits shall be Class"B"two wire. The alarm indicating circuits
shall be Class "B" two wire. The panel shall provide a minimum of 5 amperes for
signal circuit power. Each alarm initiating circuit shall have its own red alarm and
amber trouble LED. In addition,each alarm initiating switch shall have its own"test"
and"disconnect"switch.
The control shall have the ability to silence an alarm originating from one alarm
initiating zone, yet allow subsequent alarms to sound which originate from other
zones. Provide sufficient modules and circuits to power all equipment shown.
3. Whenever the acknowledge(signal silence)switch is operated,an amber LED will light
indicate the signals have been silenced. Automatic ground detection circuitry shall be
capable of sensing and reporting either positive or negative ground conditions. A
separate ground detection LED shall be provided on the control unit. """►
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-16
2.16 SECURITY AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS
A. Furnish and install complete system of conduits,plywood backboard,single gang boxes and all
other facilities for system as shown on Plans.
B. All cables will be furnished by Owners vendor, installed by Electrical Contractor,with final
connections by the vendor.
C. Each wall mounted outlet shown on the Plans shall consist of a single gang box with 3/4"
minimum size EMT run into ceiling space. Each floor mounted outlet shall consist of the
specified floor box with 3/4" minimum EMT run into ceiling space.
D. Ceiling mounted cameras and devices mounted in LAT ceiling shall not require a junction box
unless otherwise specified by the Owners vendor.
E Leave conduits fished and ready for use.
F. All work shall be performed and all materials used shall meet the requirements of the Owner's
vendor.
2.17 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install an automatic and manual closed circuit,local energy,supervised auxiliary
fire alarm system complete with battery backup. The system shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with the Plans and following Specifications.
B. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall meet with the
approval of the Northampton Fire Department. The complete installation shall be made in
accordance with:
1. Latest editions of Fire Protection Association Codes.
2. Massachusetts Electrical Code.
3. Latest edition of UL 864, including brownout protection.
All equipment shall be as manufactured by the Gamewell Corporation or equal by Notifier,
Fire Lite, or equal. Gamewell part numbers have been used to establish the desired type,
quality, and operating characteristics.
C. Operation
1. The actuation of any manual fire alarm station or the automatic actuation of any
thermal or smoke detector shall:
a. Notify the Northampton Fire Department through a digital communicator.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-15
2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA/CCTV SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install complete system of conduits, single gang boxes,and all other facilities for
data system as shown on Plans.
B. Each wall mounted outlet shown on the Plans shall consist of a single gang box with 3/4"
minimum size EMT run into ceiling space. Each floor mounted outlet shown on the Plans
shall consist of the specified floor box with 3/4" minimum EMT un into ceiling space,
terminating in a bushing within 2" of the wall line.
C. Leave conduits fished and ready for use.
D. All work shall be performed and all materials used shall meet requirements of Owner's data
system supplier/installer.
E. The Owner will furnish and install a tel/data equipment rack with equipment,tel/data ports,
and will install and terminate all tel/data cabling.
2.14 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Electric service shall be 400 amp, 120/208 volt,three phase,4 wire,60 Hz,underground from
Massachusetts Electric Co.lines.
B. Arrange for service from Massachusetts Electric Co.and pay all charges and fees in connection
therewith.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install a Massachusetts Electric Co. approved
400 amp, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase,4 wire meter socket for bank building and any additional
material and labor required for a complete installation which is not furnished by
Massachusetts Electric Co.Tenant build shall have typical EXMR333225CU and EZM-TBU
Tap Box.
D. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the National Electric Code. Ground
cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp;bond water pipe sections as
required by Section 250 M.E.C. Also install a concrete encased electrode as required by that
section.
2.15 TIME CLOCKS (TC) -
A. Time clocks shall be seven(7)day dial units with manual"ON-AUTO-OFF'bypass switch.
Switch shall be three-pole, single throw, 40A per pole capacity, 120V. Time clock shall be
Tork#TW300L.
B. All time clocks shall be set and adjusted for"ON"-"OFF" times as specified by the Architect.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-14
H. The manufacturer shall provide a five (5)year limited warranty from date of shipment against
failure when installed in compliance with applicable national local electrical codes and the
manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance instructions.
I. The unit shall incorporate an integral test point allowing easy off-line diagnostic testing verifying the
operational integrity of the unit's suppression filter system. Field testing shall permit proactive
testing to ensure performance and long term reliability. Testing shall include injection of an
impulse into the off-line suppression filter system to verify the suppression performance values
established at final factory testing and recorded on the Diagnostic Signature Card.
J. Provide audible alarm, disturbance counters, and form C dry contacts.
K. Provide each panel with a shunt trip main breaker and a remote mounted, key operated emergency
stop push button.
L. Each unit shall be factory tested at the applicable MCOV to assure proper field operation.
M. Each unit shall be thoroughly factory tested before shipment. Testing of each unit shall include,but
shall not be limited to UL manufacturing and production line tests, quality assurance checks,
MCOV and clamping voltage verification tests.
N. Upon completion of installation, a factory certified local service technician shall provide testing
services. The following tests shall be performed: (a)Voltage measurements from line-to-ground, line-
to-neutral, line-to-line, and neutral-to-ground at the time of the testing procedure; (b)Impulse
injection to verify the system suppression voltage tolerances for all suppression paths. Testing shall
be completed while the unit is off-line to isolate the unit from the distribution system. Test results
should be recorded and compared to factory benchmark test parameters supplied with each
individual unit. A copy of the startup test results and the factory benchmark testing results shall be
supplied to the Architect and the Owner for confirmation of proper suppression filter system
function. In addition, the integrity of the neutral-to-ground bond should be verified through testing
and visual inspection. A limited five(5)year warranty shall initiate after the Owner has accepted
the testing results and taken possession of the equipment.
O. Panelboards shall be of the same brand as the"Standard"panelboards,with surge suppression by
Current Technologies,Model EOP 00, or equal, and 200%neutral.
2.12 DOOR BELL SYSTEM
A. System shall consist of Edwards or equal, Cat. No. 730 bell/buzzer, Cat. No. 695-W
pushbuttons (mounted on single gang stainless steel plate with wall case), and Cat.No. 592
transformer.
B. Wire shall be 24 ga. copper bell wire, concealed in stud walls, exposed in ceiling space.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-13
door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3"long or equivalent for each ••�,
circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.
G. Panelboard trim shall be hinged.
H. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater
than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans.
I. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall
be Square D, , Type NEHB for 480/277 volts, Type NQOD for 208/120 volts, or equal by General
Electric,Westinghouse, or ITE/Siemens.
2.11 PANELBOARDS (COMPUTER)
A. An electronic grade panelboard (EGP)designed for non-linear loads incorporating transient voltage
surge suppression (TVSS) and high frequency electrical line noise filtering connected in parallel
with the facility's wiring system. The specified unit shall be suitable for non-linear loads and shall
provide effective high energy transient voltage suppression,surge current diversion, high frequency
electrical line noise attenuation, and line control in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 environments when
connected downstream from the facility's main over current device.
B. The units shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL 1449 and 1283.
C. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all suppression components utilized in the
unit shall not be less than 115%of the facility's nominal operating voltage for 120, 220, 240, 277,
347, 480, 575, and 600 volt nominal systems,per NEMA LS1-1992.
D. The unit shall provide protection in all modes. Wye configured systems shall provide line-to-
neutral, line-to-ground,line-to-line, and neutral-to-ground protection. Delta configured systems
shall provide line-to-line protection in ungrounded systems and line-to-line and line-to-ground
protection in grounded systems.
E. Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41- 1991 and in accordance with NEMA Publication No. LS-1 1992
and tests conducted using an ANSI/IEEE C62.41- 1991 category C3 surge,the tested single pulse
surge current capacity, in amps, for each mode of protection of the unit shall be no less than 80,000
amps.
F. The unit's published suppression voltage ratings shall be the UL 1449 listed suppression voltage
ratings tested and assigned by Underwriter's Laboratories utilizing the test procedure described in
Section 1.6.3 of this document titled UL 1449, Suppression Voltage Performance Testing. The UL
1449 suppression voltage rating for each mode of protection shall be 1,000 amps line-to-line, 500
amps line-to-neutral and line-to-ground, and 400 amps neutral-to-ground.
G. The unit shall include a high frequency extended range power filter and shall be UL 1283 listed as
an Electromagnetic interference Filter. The filter shall reduce fast rise time, high frequency, error
producing transients, and electrical line noise to harmless levels,thus eliminating disturbances,
which may lead to electronic system,upset.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.12
Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of
actual heat tests. Buses shall be copper.
C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated,braced and protected connectors.
The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual
circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be
clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between"ON" and"OFF". Provisions for
additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers.
D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 22,000 amps.
E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as
specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL
Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over
48"long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End
walls shall be removable. Trim shall be hinged.
F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs
shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed
part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered.
G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-
LINE, or equal by Westinghouse, General Electric, or Siemens-ITE.
2.10 PANELBOARDS (Standard)
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting panelboards as indicated on the panelboard schedule
and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case
circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule.
B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic,trip indicating, and have
common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker
handle taking position between"ON"and"OFF"when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the
bus shall be bolt-on.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase"or"phase
sequence"type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Main ratings shall be
as shown on the panelboard schedule. Buses shall be copper.
D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable
for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring,both breaker and neutral,
shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in
sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand
side.
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.11
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC, as shown. .•
5. Fuses shall be as indicated on the drawings.
6. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosures,or
equal.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single pole toggle switches as
specified, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA
Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose
enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy
contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing
starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction,replaceable from the front without removing
the starter from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit
module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The
starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. **
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have"Hand-Off-Auto"selector switch,
Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size
applicable,with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position HO-A
switch in cover of general purpose enclosure.
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor
without overload protection,with"Hand-Off-Auto"selector switch in cover of
general purpose enclosure,Square D, Class 8502.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter,fused,
with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt.
E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Westinghouse will be
considered.
2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall
be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as
required.
B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings shall be
established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not
to exceed 50oC above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-10
12. Floor outlets in offices shall be"Concealed 3-Service"type,with flush cover and carpet
flange(Hubbell Cat. No. 3SFBCBR),cast iron floor box(Hubbell Cat. No. 3SFBC),
and three service plates(Hubbell Cat. No. 3BSBDS,3SFBTP,and 3SFBRP),with the
specified duplex receptacle.
2. 7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to
have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all
required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware
to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any
chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced.
B. Electronic ballasts shall be furnished for all fixture/lamp combinations for which they are
available,and shall be selected from Massachusetts Electric Company's list of eligible ballasts.
All other fluorescent and HID ballasts shall be high power factor types.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. Fluorescent
lamps shall be 3,500'K-
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on
drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed at the end of the
specifications to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures
shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect.
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A, Furnish and install motor starting,protecting,and controlling devices for motors where shown
on the drawings.
B. Furnish and install fused safety switches as indicated on plans and specifications.
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the"OFF"position with
the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and
promote cool operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that,during normal operation of
the switch,the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the
operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The
handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box,not the cover,with positive
pad-locking provisions in the "OFF" position.
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA3R
(rainproof) is specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-
deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.9
2.5 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The
nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal,screw attached. Submit schedule of
nameplate lettering for approval.
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more
devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be
furnished with blank plates.
1. Duplex Receptacles-20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw,side and back wired. To
be Leviton Cat.No. 5352-1, or equal.
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton No. 6898-HGI, or equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable,vertical,UL Listed,with Lexan
base and lid,4 screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat.No. 20-3-5-0, or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground-20A, 125V,side and back wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 53624G, or equal.
5. Clock receptacle- 15 amp, 125 volt single grounding receptacle,recessed,aluminum ,
finish. To be Leviton Cat.No. 6581, or equal.
6. Light switches,Single Pole-20 amp, 120/277 volt,side wired,Leviton No. 12212,or
equal.
7. Light switches, 3 Way- 20 amp, 120/277 volt, side wired, Leviton No. 12232, or
equal.
8. Switch and pilot light-20 amp, 120 volt, side wired, red handle, Leviton No. 1221
PLR, or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown on plans,with
matching cord and cap, Leviton or equal, as follows:
Type "R!'-50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat.No. 279.
Type "D"-30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat.No. 278.
10. Wall plates shall be smooth Type 302 satin finish stainless steel with matching screws.
11. Floor outlets in Lobby shall consist of two gang cast iron box (Hubbell Cat. No.
B4233)with two brass covers, one duplex flap (Hubbell Cat. No. S3825) and one
duplex screw(Hubbell Cat. No. S3625),with the specified duplex receptacle.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-8
C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent
welded fittings, or Type EB where shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3"
and larger.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or other removable equipment
to facilitate removal and connections.
E. At Electrical Sub-contractor's option, conduit run under slab-on-grade floors may be schedule 40
PVC with solvent welded fittings. Use RGC or IMC for sweeps exiting the concrete slab. All such
construction shall be provided with a green insulated equipment grounding conductor, from box to
box, sized to the over current protection as required by the M.E.C.
F. Sleeves provided for future installation of data and television cables shall be EMT with bushed ends.
(Note: Fire safing specified in subsection 3.08.)
2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules
of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98%conductivity copper,with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types
indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used.
B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN, solid.
C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN, stranded.
D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger,Type THW,stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings and feeding light fixtures may be Type
MC cable;single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified.
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
G. Wire and Cable to be by General Electric, Carol,American,AFC, or equal.
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast
aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket
B. Other outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel as manufactured by
Raco, Steel City Electrical Co., General Electric Co., or approved equal.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.7
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by
the individual Subcontractor. Removal of said items shall be done at the end of each work day
to ensure debris free 'workmanlike conditions" at all times.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, ductwork, cable, and raceway (except surface metal raceway) shall be installed
concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment
rooms.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to final acceptance, each Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of complete
instructions for the repair, maintenance, and operation of all systems installed under his
Subcontract. These instructions shall be typed or printed,and each set bound separately with
durable covers.
B. Each Subcontractor shall instruct and fully demonstrate to such person or persons as the
Architect and/or Owner may designate, regarding the care and use of all systems and all
apparatus pertaining thereto.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. Each Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a ..
period of one(1)year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or
replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. Each Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work
and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or
repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in
concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits,exposed below 6'above floor, and for service
entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions,run exposed inside
the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical
metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be
of the set screw type.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.6
B. Each Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of electrical
power for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install temporary light and power as directed by
the General Contractor.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Each Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa,shall be considered as called
for or reasonably implied in both.
C. Each Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings,it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and
accessories that may be required. Each Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural
and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,furnishing
such fittings, offsets, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no
additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Each Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Subcontract shall be provided by the individual Subcontractor.
B. Each Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
cycle,single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light
his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets, etc.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-5
1. Each Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the
Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements.
B. Each Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the
General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. . With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise,all materials used shall be U.S.made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,listings,or labels
shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job,each Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect
eight(8)sets of catalogue cuts,manufacturers'data sheets,or Shop Drawings,giving all details,
dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. Each Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans
and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes which may be required.
C. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
Subcontractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Each Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be
required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper
carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the
rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-4
B. Each Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'instructions at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Each Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. Each Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall
be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Subcontractor himself
were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the
express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. Each Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building
premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors'work resulting from the execution of
his part of the work in any manner whatsoever;and in case of dispute arising as to the extent
or share of responsibility incurred by the Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and
the Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the
Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the
work in question.
D. Each Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials
as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information.
Each Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure
on the part of the Subcontractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to
bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping,ductwork,conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only,and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. Each
Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials
from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own
expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all
times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this
Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-3
SECTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract,including Invitation to Bid,Instructions to
Bidders, General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and other Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The principal items of electrical work include,but are not limited to the following:
1. New electric service.
2. Branch circuit wiring and conduit.
3. Panelboards.
4. Lighting fixtures and lamps.
5. Data system.
6. Telephone system.
7. Security and surveillance system.
8. Wiring devices and plates.
9. Fire Alarm System.
10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including
final connections to equipment.
11. Inspections.
12. Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code,Electrical Code,Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100-2
INDEX
SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3-INSTALLATION
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 GENERAL
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 FIRE SAFING
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
1.15 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
1.16 GUARANTEE
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
2.2 WIREWAYS
2.3 CONDUCTORS
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
2.5 NAMEPLATES
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARDS
2.10 PANEL BOARDS(STANDARD)
2.11 PANELBOARDS (COMPUTER)
2.12 DOOR BELL SYSTEM
2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA/CCTV SYSTEMS
2.14 ELECTRIC SERVICE
2.15 TIME CLOCKS(TC)
2.16 SECURITY AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS
2.17 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
2.18 BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
2.19 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Electrical 16100.1
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
END OF SECTION
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-37
3.8 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire HVAC system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be ,,.,k
established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all
units are HVAC satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise
and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly
cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in
equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be
replaced with new filters during final clean-up.
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the
adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.9 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms,vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms,
outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.
or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full
length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for ducts, pipes, and fire
dampers.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-36
Measured Amps x Nameplate HP
BHP°Nameplate Rated Amps
a. The Brake Horsepower Must Not Exceed the Nameplate Rating.
b. Preliminary Air Balance: With all main return air dampers in their
maximum open position and all exhaust air grille dampers wide open,
measure either air flow or pressure drop through each of the grilles on a
system. Adjust the main balancing dampers in each branch to equalize or
proportion the airflow through each branch. Record the airflow or
pressure drop through each grille after the air flow through each branch
has been proportioned. Now balance each grille to the average percent of
design flow. Those grilles with the lowest percent of design flow must
have their balancing dampers in their maximum open position.
4. Follow steps as outlined in Article 5, paragraph b through d for the supply air
systems.
G. Defective Work: If inspection or tests indicate defects, such defective work or material
shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to
piping shall be made with new material. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be
acceptable.
3.6 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor
regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator
covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the
floor. Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed
with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers,sleeves, and have an 18-gauge sheet
metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter
shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the
insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings,valves, etc.shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends
of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to
the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipefitting. The one piece PVC
fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering.
3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the drawings or not, and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC
Subcontractor and be included in his bid.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-35
and/or the exhaust fans are running higher than design.
3. In the event the building pressure is higher than design, make sure that all exhaust ....k
fans are running and recheck the suction pressure between the outside air and
return air dampers and the filters. This pressure must be negative to atmosphere
as outlined in Article 4. A higher than design building pressure indicates either
the minimum outside air quantities are high and/or the exhaust and return air
quantities are low.
4. Select the area with the lowest pressure as referenced to atmosphere and partially
close down the main return air dampers until the space attains a pressure slightly
higher than the average of all floors or areas. Proceed to the next lowest pressure
area, etc. Those areas with the highest pressure should have their main return air
dampers in their maximum open position.
5. Record all final high and low velocity readings with all supply, return, and exhaust
fans running and maintaining a constant positive building pressure.
6. Record all final fan speeds, amperes, and pressure drops, etc. for each fan and its
related equipment.
7. Install, calibrate, and lock all thermostats to maintain a 74° F. space temperature.
Thermostat calibration and sensitivity should cause heating elements to be in their
maximum position when space temperature is 3°F.below the stat setting and fully
closed a lh degree F. below the stat setting. Keep records of complaints and any
area not able to maintain temperature within plus or minus 1-degree F. of the stat
setting so that the following troubleshooting procedure may be applied.
a. Recheck the thermostat for calibration and setting.
b. Check the grille or diffuser inlet temperature.
C. Check the control operation for full flow and positive closure.
8. If a problem exists after all previous steps have been properly executed and
everything seems to agree with the design specifications, notify the Architect-
Engineer. Any deviations from the design specifications must be made with the
architect-Engineer's approval.
E. Air Balancing Procedure for Exhaust Fans:
1. General Instructions: All design air quantities in general are maximum air
volumes and should not be exceeded. Air measurements through exhaust air
grilles should not be made until all supply fans have been air and temperature
balanced. Air exhaust fan exhaust dampers must be mechanically operated from
the full closure to the full o pen position before starting the exhaust fan.
2. All main balancing dampers and exhaust air grille dampers must be in their
maximum open position before starting fan.
3. Balancing Procedures: Start exhaust fan. Check fan drive for rotation and
slippage. Measure actual amperes and calculate brake horsepower using the
following formula:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-34
d. Preliminary Balancing: With all supply and return air balancing dampers
in their maximum open position, take neck velocity, tip velocity, or any
other approved method of measuring air flow through all supply diffusers
and/or grilles on this fan system and zecord these air flows. Select the
diffusers and/or grilles with the lowest percent of design flow on each of
the main branch ducts and adjust the balancing dampers in each of the
branch ducts to attain the same percent of design flow through the lowest
percent diffusers. Now adjust all diffuser balancing dampers to attain the
average percent of design flow of all diffusers on this fan system. The
balancing dampers in the most critical or lowest percent of design flow
diffusers must be in their maximum open position.
e. If the average percent of design flow is less than design, speed up both
supply and return air fans and repeat step.
f. If the average percent of design flow is above fan design, slow down both
supply and return air fans and repeat step.
g. Start all exhaust fans and calculate brake horsepower for each
C. Function Checking of the Systems:
1. Any equipment, filter, etc. used for temporary heating must be delivered after use
in clean condition.
2. Allow all fan and exhaust systems to operate until they and their controls have
been thoroughly checked, tested, and where necessary, readjusted, calibrated, and
rebalanced.
3. Record the following readings on each supply and/or exhaust system.
a. Nameplate amperes.
b. Actual amperes.
C. Nameplate horsepower.
d. Calculate BHP as previously described.
e. Inlet static pressure as previously described.
f. Fan RPM
D. Building Pressurization:
1. With all systems operating on minimum outside air and with final adjustments
made on each system, close all outside doors and windows and measure and
record the building pressure as compared to atmosphere on each floor and/or air
in the building. On a calm day, the building pressure should average from 0.02
in. WO to 0.05 in. WO higher than atmosphere when all systems are on
minimum outside fair.
2 In the event the building pressure is lower than design, recheck the suction
pressure between the outside air and return air dampers and the filters. This
pressure must be negative to atmosphere as outlined in Article 4. Negative
building pressure indicates whether the minimum outside air quantities are low
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-33
lubrication of all parts and equipment, proper direction of rotating for equipment,
control all piping, and otherwise see that all systems are mechanically and
electrically complete.
3. Immediately following the completion of the adjusting and balancing of the
systems, final readings shall be taken and recorded of all electrical loads for motors
and heating equipment, final CFM's for all systems, fan speeds, fan system total
CFM's operating static pressures at various points in the system. After all data is
recorded, a final functional test of all systems will be performed to verify their
operation and demonstrate to the owner the performance and operating
procedures for the systems.
4. Motor sheaves required to be changed to attain design air flows will be furnished
and installed by this Contractor as required.
B. Air Balance Procedure:
1. General Instructions: The supply and return air fans should be air balanced with
allowances in the fan speeds for dirty filters, damper sequencing, and building
pressurization. The Temperature Control subcontractor and the Mechanical
subcontractor shall work together during the entire balancing procedure.
2. Balancing Procedures: Start supply and return air fans. Set system to minimum
outside air and if face and bypass dampers are installed, set to bypass condition.
Check fan drive for rotation and slippage. Measure actual amperes and calculate
brake horsepower using the following.formula.
Measured Amps x Nameplate H.P.
BHP-Nameplate Rated amps.
a. The Brake Horsepower Must not Exceed the Nameplate Rating.
b. Stabilizing the Supply and Return Air Fans: Measure the suction pressure
at a point between the outside air dampers in their minimum outside air
position and the exhaust dampers closed. All balancing dampers in the
supply and return air systems must be in their maximum open position.
This suction pressure should be approximately - .4 inches to .5 inches
WO. If it is much higher, look for leaks. Sequence the outside air, return
air, and exhaust air dampers from minimum to maximum outside air and
then back to minimum. This suction pressure must be negative to
atmosphere and remain fairly constant during this cycle. With at least 20
degrees F. temperature differential between outside and return air
temperatures, calculate the design mixed air temperature.
C. Take several readings of the mixed air temperature in several different
places in the fan discharge plenum. These readings must be taken
without preheat or pre-cooling. If the average mixed air temperature is
higher than design, slow down the return air fan to attain design
temperature. If the average mixed air temperature is lower than design,
check for excessive leakage through the maximum fresh air dampers, the ^40%11
face dampers, and the mixing plenum; then, speed up the return air fan.
(The brake horsepower must not exceed the nameplate.)
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-32
of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor.
3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly
supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or
expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and
burrs removed.
B. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts,
chases, or above hung ceilings.
C. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms,vertical pipe shafts,above hung
ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances
for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures,
other piping,ducts,and equipment of other trades.
D. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips, scale and flush and drain until all traces of
dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional
requirements.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically
tested as specified herein. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide all equipment required to
make the tests specified herein.
B. After system has been determined to be leak-free,the Architect shall be notified, and the test
shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence.
C. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed
during the tests to prevent shock damage.
D. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary
means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is
leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.5 AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. Introduction
1. The final adjustments and balancing of the air systems, and the temperature
control system shall be performed by an independent balancing contractor under
the supervision of the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall be NEBB and
TABB Certified. All labor and instruments necessary to complete this work shall
be provided by the balancing contractor. The temperature control manufacturer
shall provide labor and technical assistance as required by the balancing
contractor.
2. Prior to this final adjusting and balancing, the Subcontractor shall have
thoroughly checked and tested all parts of the system for complete and proper
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-31
S. Schedules:
Vibration Isolation and/or
Seismic Restraint
Equipment Schedule Specification Static
Deflection
Air Handling Unit 1,4, 19 Internal
Isolation
Unit Ventilators 4 & 18
Fan Coil Units 10, 12, 19 .75 in.
VAV Boxes 10, 12, 19 .75 in.
In-Line Fans 10, 12, 19 1 in.
Unit Heaters 10, 12, 19 .75 in.
Cabinet Heaters 4& 18
Pumps - Base Mounted 1, 4, 18, 23
Pumps - In-Line 23
Boiler 4& 19
PART 3-INSTALLATION
3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise
without filters in place.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units
and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the
units are turned on,and clean filters shall be installed.
3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 4" diameter and smaller required for the installation of HVAC piping
and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Subcontractor. Cutting and patching shall
be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All
work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and
patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC
Subcontractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the
responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor, who shall make the corrections as his own
expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves
and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Subcontractor shall
do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-30
6. Walls, including gypsum board non-bearing partitions, which have ducts running
through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing
around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame.
P. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the
schedules in paragraph S of this Specification.
Q. Seismic Restraint Exclusions:
1. Piping:
a. All piping less than 24/2 in. in diameter except those listed below.
b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D.
C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 in.
I.D.
d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where
the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure
to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze.
e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter and
smaller.
2. Ductwork:
a. Rectangular, square or oval ducts less than 6-sq. ft. in cross sectional area.
b. Round duct less than 28 in.in diameter.
C. Duct supported by hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than
12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the
ductwork.
R. Suspended Equipment:
1. VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and rigidly
connected to the supply side of the duct system and supported with a minimum if
4 hanger rods.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-29
installed within allowable limits at longer distances.
7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before
applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports.
8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines.
9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band
shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections
3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced
spacings of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3.
N. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork:
1. All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected equipment shall be
isolated from the building structure by means of Specification 10 hangers or
Specification 5 floor isolators. Spring deflection shall be a minimum 0.75 in.
2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be isolated from the
building structure by Specification 11 hangers or 5 floor supports. Spring
deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75 in.
O. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork:
1. Seismically restrain all ductwork with Specification 12 or 13 restraints as listed
below:
a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq. ft. or larger.
b. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 in. or larger.
C. Restrain flat oval ducts the same way as rectangular ducts of the same
nominal size.
2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if
less than the specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each duct
turn and at each end of a duct run.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per
duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section connected perpendicular to it
if the restraints are installed within 4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the
restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA
duct construction standards.
4. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement shall
consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the
support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper angle and lower
trapeze.
5. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights
and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and
dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-28
Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in
Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the
piping run. The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the
same static deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected
equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs
from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in.
deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1-1/2 in. deflection for pipe
sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2-1/2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall
be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects
to mechanical equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or
Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service.
2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or
supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors,
and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum
of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is
required to limit load changes to 6 25% of the initial load. Submittals must
include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and
contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads.
Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has been examined
for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design.
M. Seismic Restraint of Piping:
1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables
if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping.
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping
that is 1 in. I.D.or larger.
b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and
refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1-1/4 in. I.D. and larger.
C. All other piping 2-1/2 in. diameter and larger.
2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes,
except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except
where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as
transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or
greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or
contraction.
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20-ft. maximum and
longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum spacing.
6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint
for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-27
9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead
support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of
record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from:
a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction.
C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors.
10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short
circuiting the isolated suspended equipment,piping or conduit.
11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non-isolated systems.
Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly
attached systems only.
12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods
must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14
braces.
13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support
rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with
Specification 14 braces.
14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification
type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted
equipment.
15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as
required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project.
16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in.
or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities.
17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation
manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals.
18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive
displacement, which results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment
weight. Horizontal thrust restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection
guide).
19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.
L. Vibration Isolation of Piping:
1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near
the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11. Specification
11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace
hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other
locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-26
Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or
ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction
of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of
the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be
used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a
neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as
specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it
can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a
maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished
with one (1)rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the
duct work or the equipment and structure.
Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical
on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
K. Execution-General:
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturers written instruction and all certified submittal
data.
2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change
of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or
misalignment.
3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be
made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified.
4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which
makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified.
"Building" includes,but is not limited to, slabs,beams, columns,studs and walls.
5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building.
6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment
or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be
brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work
necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's
expense.
7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the
Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific
equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by
discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in
workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-25
pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for
equal ended expansion joints.
Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the
expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored
piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the
pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in
seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene
washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on
the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the
shut off valves.
Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing
minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound
pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by
the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment
side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ,
SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings.
Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples.
Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated:
Flanged Male Nipples
3 x 14 10 x 26 1/2x9 14/2 x 13
4x15 12x283/4x10 2x14
5x19 14x30 lx 11 2-1/2x 18
6x20 16x321/4x12
Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally
and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing
separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint
shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either
direction.Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and
the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All-directional
anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing
separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height
if the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe
expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow
for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of 6 1-5/8 in. motion, or
to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick
neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around
the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-24
can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be
manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully
support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an
evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its
allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured
by Mason Industries, Inc.
20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring
forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large
enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum
of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The base
depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base
manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete
reinforcing consisting of 1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running
both ways in a layer 1-1/2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with
steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being
poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to
maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a
concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
21. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs.
The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable
and removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper
frame must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so
as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber
bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable
and rest on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and
the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall
consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower
curbs waterproofing and joined at the comers by EPDM bellows. All spring
locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs
shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to
seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top
floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall
have anchorage preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting
to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type
RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the
covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used
within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is
not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring
between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel
flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single
sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one
sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi
up to 1908 F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 2508 F. 16
in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 1908 F and 135 psi at 2508 F. Safety
factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must
have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-23
Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval "R" Number from
OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings.
Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods
utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when
required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall
have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be
special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts
passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage
Preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross
brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene.
Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall
not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the
snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and
resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of
internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits
exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Preapproval
"R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum
certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing
Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4
in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be
manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than
1/8 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set
clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal
or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the
snubber multiplied by the applicable "0" force. Submittals shall include the load
deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage preapproval
"R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum
certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-1011 as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from
undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also
have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud
anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation
Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be Type
SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600.22
and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or
minus 1/8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests
performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT
and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in
Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent
air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking
during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained
around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed
to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4 in. thick
neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in
Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom.
The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting
through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as
clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring
diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the
hanger rod to swing through a 308 arc from side to side before contacting the rod
bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing
showing the 308 capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
11. Hangers shall be as described in 10,but they shall be precompressed and locked at
the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or
equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed
with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and
the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by
means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30
degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to
resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to
provide all-directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies
that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide
proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges.
Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Preapproval"R"Number from OSHPD
in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable
assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between
the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads
with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint.
Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final
installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-21
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by
assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves.
The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge
panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the
back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the
inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does
not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be
applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall
be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall
surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact.
Neoprene bushings shall be Type HO as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and
complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad
between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts
that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less
than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height
and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in
Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent
spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking
during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal.A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained
around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to
interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal
operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an
internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces.
Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings.Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to
provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically
and allow a maximum if 1/4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the
resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified
horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured
by Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected
by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring
configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency
of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of
three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems
shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-20
Minimum"G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility Mounted
Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
UBC
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2
SBCCI
I. Product Intent:
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.Mason Industry's products are the basis of these
Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their
systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the
specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with
Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any
attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent
deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation
greater than 1/4 in.
J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle
modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution
plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super"W" as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2
in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron
casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The
elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from
contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene
materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing Specifications. Mountings shall
have an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.
Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-19
1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the
following responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified.
C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated
equipment.
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to
insure proper installation and performance.
G. Related Work:
1. Housekeeping Pads:
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the
structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not
already indicated on the Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized
to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10)bolt diameters all around
the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge
anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads
shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage
and embedment.
2. Supplementary Support Steel:
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment,
piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or
specified.
3. Attachments:
a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with
the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations.
H. Seismic Force Levels
1. The following force levels will be used on this project.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-18
equipment.
Pwk (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used
for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment
methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and
approved before the condition is accepted for installation.
Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static
loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points.
(4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include
number, size and locations for each piece of equipment.
C. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
(1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all
connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be
stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five
years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job
location.
(2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval number from
California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency
showing maximum restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on
independent testing are preferred to preapprovals based on
calculations. Where preapproved devices are not available,
submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear
loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by
a registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic
design experience and licensed in the state of the job location.
Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile
loads as well as one test or analysis at 458 to the weakest mode.
(3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads
and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment
and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt
diameter, embedment and/or welded length.All seismic restraint
devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces
detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of
gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level.
E. Code and Standards Requirements:
1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards-most recent or enforced code:
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
C. NFPA 90A.
F. Manufacturer's Responsibility:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-17
pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply
piping,water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply
including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths
to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air
handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule.
2. Positive Attachment:
a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge
anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a
welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam
clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other
equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points.
3. Transverse Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the
pipe, duct or conduit.
4. Longitudinal Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe,
duct or conduit.
D. Manufacturer's Data:
1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide
submittals for products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data:
(1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific
restraints detailing compliance with the Specification.
(2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment,
showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing
numbered descriptive Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings:
(1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including
dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations.
(2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-16
conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most
stringent shall apply.
5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic
consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent,
national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24,
California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements).
6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements shall be
corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner.
7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as
detailed in Section H.
B. The work in this Section includes,but is not limited to, the following:
1. Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment.
2. Equipment isolation bases.
3. Flexible piping connections.
4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of
services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is
typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification).
AC Units Cooling Towers
Air Distrib. Boxes Ductwork
Air Handling Units Electrical Panels
Air Separators Fans (all types)
Boilers Heat Exchangers
Bus Ducts Motor Control Ctrs.
Cabinet Heaters Piping
Chillers Pumps(all types)
Compressors Rooftop Units
Comp.Room Units Tanks (all types)
Condensers Unit Heaters
Condensing Units Var. Frequency Drives
C. Definitions:
1. Life Safety Systems
a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600- 15
thermostat), the GF shall run continuously with fresh air damper closed,
and heating until room temperature is at occupied setting (warm-up cycle).
After warm-up cycle is complete, the fresh air damper shall open to its ,
minimum setting, and heating/cooling shall be accomplished according to
the following schedule:
1) On a request for heating the gas burner shall energize.
2) When temperature is satisfied or reaches setpoint (Htg. - Stage 1),
the burner shall be de-energized.
3) As room temperature increases above setpoint (Clg. - Stage 1), the
DX cooling system shall be energized.
b. Exhaust - Provide the necessary control interlocks to EF-1 from each
programmable thermostat to energize the fan during the occupied system
operation.
2.12 COMBUSTION AIR AND VENT PIPE
A. All material must be gas and liquid tight single wall schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings
installed as per the condensing furnace manufacturers recommendations. Material must be
resistive to corrosive flue condensate and properly supported.
B. Pipe and fittings are to comply with ASTM D1785, D2466, D2661, D2665. PVC primer
and solvent cement is to comply with ASTM D2564.
C. Pipe runs are to be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers vertical and
horizontal vent length tables and charts.
D. Connect pipe to "concentriz vent kit" provided by the furnace manufacturer in compliance with
direct,vent condensing furnaces.
2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Intent:
1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment
schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with
flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically
transmitted sound to the building structure.Vibration isolators shall be selected in
accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform
deflections.
2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be
certified by the manufacturer.
3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical
building system components in place during a seismic event.
4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes,
component manufacturer's and building construction standards. Whenever a
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-14
5. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
6. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA
5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal
materials.
2.11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish all labor, materials,equipment, and services required
to provide a complete temperature control system as specified.
B. Installation Instructions
1. Prior to the installation of any work, this Subcontractor shall prepare submittals
which shall be approved by the Architect. These submittals shall include a complete
control diagram and sequence of operation of the entire system, prepared by the
equipment manufacturer,plus engineering data on all devices used.
2. Wiring in connection with the automatic temperature control system shall be
furnished and installed by the HVAC Subcontractor as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
3. Upon completion of the work, this Subcontractor shall instruct operating personnel
in the operation of the control system. A control diagram and sequence of
operation shall be framed and mounted under glass where directed.
4. Provide the services of a factory trained technician to set-up and check out the
control system with computerized instruments.
C. All equipment, unless specified to the contrary, shall be fully proportioning. The control
system shall consist of all room thermostats, dampers, damper operators, relays, wiring and
other accessory equipment to fill the intent of the Specification.
D. The air handling systems shall be controlled by electronic programmable thermostats.
1. Air handling units will be furnished with controls as specified. Furnish wiring
system as recommended by the unit manufacturer.
2. Room Control-provide electronic control systems as required. Each unit to include
one microcomputer based electronic thermostat and motorized damper assemblies
as indicated on the drawings.
a. OF 1.4 Provide cooling control and heating control to perform the
following sequence: Gas furnaces (GF) shall run continuously during the
occupied cycle. During occupied mode, the minimum fresh air damper
setting shall be'open". During unoccupied mode,the fresh air damper shall
be closed, and the OF shall cycle only on a call for heating. Cooling will be
locked out during the unoccupied cycle.
On an initial switch over to occupied from unoccupied (via programmable
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-13
applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be rigid performed glass fiber insulation as manufactured by .W*,
Baldwin-Hill-Bhret, Gustin-Bacon, Manville, PPG, Owens-Corning, or other
approved equal.
7. All refrigerant and condensate piping shall be insulated with Armaflex or
approved equal or Manville FLAMESAFE fiberglass pipe insulation,
Owens-Corning fiberglass 25. The insulation shall have an average thermal
conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean
temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled
below. Jacket shall be FLAMESAFE AP. The insulation shall be applied over
clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt
strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All
refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and
secured with stainless steel bands.
D. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
1. Refrigerant and condensate piping:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 3/4 in.
110 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every
length of pipe.
2. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to
ANSI B2.1-1968.
B. Application
1. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class Bagl silver
solder.
2. Condensate Piping: Type L copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS Class 1 Bagl
silver solder.
C. Materials
1. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
2. Wrought-Copper Solder Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
3. Cast-Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.23.
4. Wrought Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600- 12
C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at 6 intervals for tubing 1-1/4"or less, 10'
intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or
plastic coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within P of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe
not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on
the connecting horizontal run.
F. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT 121C plastic coated riser clamp; to
be installed immediately below a coupling.
2.9 INSULATION
A. All air supply and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. All return ducts in the attic shall be
insulted. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1 pound, density glass
fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal
to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap
jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete
vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18-in. o.c. with 18,
gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width.
B. Acoustical Insulation: All return ducts shall be lined. Duct lining acoustical insulation
shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Subcontractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-
pound density; non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on
airside. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork
shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted.
C. Pipe Insulation
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall
have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not
exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for
applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and
smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe
and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation
shall be concealed by neatly folding_ in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve
bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on
adjoining insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Architect.
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain
the integrity of the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all refrigerant, and condensate drain
piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600- 11
with spun aluminum housing for roof mounting, and shall be completely weatherized.
Capacity shall be AMCA certified. Direct drive ventilators shall be furnished with
manufacturer's standard solid state speed controller. •*+
B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and
dynamically balanced at the factory.
C. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed weatherproof housing outside of the air
stream. Furnish with single or 3 pole disconnect switch mounted in motor compartment,with
factory wiring from disconnect to motor. Provide wiring raceway from motor compartment to
curb cap.
D. The fan shall be installed on an insulated aluminum roof curb as indicated on the Drawings.
Motor operated low leakage backdraft dampers (120 volt) with edge and end seals shall be
installed in the curb of the unit. Curb to be sloped to match the roof pitch. Furnish wiring
pigtail on damper motor. Curbs shall be constructed to keep fans level to less than 1/16" per
foot.
E. The entire air outlet of the fan shall be protected by 1/2" x 1/2" aluminum mesh securely
installed in place.
F. Fan and curb shall be Greenheck Model G and GB with Type GPF curb or equal by Loren,
Cook, or Jenn.
2.6 LOUVERS
A- Furnish and install stationary extruded aluminum wall louvers with drainable blades, as
manufactured by Greenheck Model ESD403 or equal by Airolite Co.or Ruskin
B. Louvers shall be installed straight and plumb and caulked (or sealed) around perimeter to
assure adequate sealing to adjacent surfaces.
C. Louvers shall be AMCA certified, 4" deep. Heavy gauge extended aluminum drainable
blades positioned at 37°and 45°angles 4" on center. The louvers shall be provided with a 1"
flange and expanded aluminum bird screen internally mounted.
D. Louvers shall be factory painted to a color selected by Architect.
2.7 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or schedule 40 PVC sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass
through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size.
Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without
gouging.
2.8 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee &
Mason, or equal.
B. For all pipe 2.1/2" and larger,Grinnell Figure No. 60,at 10'intervals.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-10
F. Furnace shall be Trane Model TUX or as manufactured by Carrier or York
G. Cooling coil shall be cased horizontal flow direct expansion cooling coil, Trane Model TXC,
or as manufactured by Carrier or York
H. Provide side mount filter rack on up-flow units, and vertical concentric kits for all units.
2.4 CONDENSING UNITS
A. The air cooled condensing units shall have all operating components assembled on one
common base. These shall include: compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan and motor,
charging valves, moisture indicating sight glass, back seating refrigerant valves, hot gas
muffler, all controls, and a holding charge of R-22. The units shall be designed for outdoor
installation.
B. Casing shall be of 14-gauge zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces painted with enamel for
weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for elimination of rain. Provide
removable panels for access to components.
C. Condenser Fan(s) shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, direct drive and driven by
permanently lubricated ball bearing heavy-duty motors with built-in thermal overload
protection. Condenser motors shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced
propeller fans with aluminum blades and electro-coated steel hubs used in a draw-through
vertical discharge position.
D. Condenser Coil shall have copper tubing internally finned or smooth bore 3/8" bonded to
configured aluminum plate fin. The coil shall be factory tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A
factory or field installed sub-cooling circuit shall be provided to sub-cool refrigerant a
minimum of 20°F below saturation temperatures.
E. Condensing unit shall have a single refrigeration circuit. Each refrigeration circuit has an
integral sub cooling circuit. A refrigeration filter drier shall be provided as standard.
Crankcase heater, temperature, and current-sensitive motor overloads shall be included for
maximum protection. Shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to minimize
vibration transmission and noise. External high and low pressure cutout devices shall be
provided. Evaporator defrost control provided in indoor blower coil shall prevent
compressor slugging by temporarily interrupting compressor operation when low evaporator
coil temperatures are encountered.
F. Controls shall be factory wired and mounted in a control panel in exterior of the casing.
Control panel shall be wired complete with magnetic contactor for both compressor and
condenser fan. Provide low ambient temperature kit to allow operation down to 0°F, time
delay relay, anti-short cycle timer.
G. Condensing units shall be Trane,York, or Carrier,with capacities as scheduled on the plans.
H Furnish and install a refrigerant piping system sized as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.5 ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Roof ventilators shall be of the belt or direct drive centrifugal type, as shown on the Drawings,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600.9
1. Duct lining shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Subcontractor. Material shall
be 1" nominal thickness, 3 pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with UL
approved neoprene coating on air side.
2. Insulation shall be applied with 100%adhesive coverage, plus stick clips on all sides
of duct, 24" on center in direction of air flow, 12" to 18" on center at right angles to
air flow. Coat leading edge of each insulation section with adhesive.
3. Lining shall be Certainteed No. 300"Ultralite", or equal.
2.2 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A. Registers and diffusers shall be Titus, or equal by Barber-Colman or Tuttle and Bailey, equal
to those specified in the following paragraphs. Volume dampers shall be allen key operated.
Wall mounted registers shall have sponge rubber gasket at perimeter of frame. Finish shall
be off-white unless otherwise noted.
B. Exhaust Register(CER)-Titus Model 355-FL 350 deflected blade register, off white finish,
AG-15 damper.
C. Return Register (CRR) - Titus Model 350 RL/AG-15 steel 350 deflection blades, with
opposed blade damper.
D. Ceiling Supply Diffuser (CD) - Titus Model TDCA, off-white finish, louver face type with
adjustable discharge,throw patterns as indicted on the drawings.
E. Slot diffuser (SD) - Titus Model MPI-37 extruded aluminum linear diffuser with insulated
plenum. Slots shall be 1/2", Border Type 2A. Diffusers shall have adjusting pattern vanes
and be 4'length.
F. Bottom return register (BRR) - Titus Model 33 RFL 30° deflecting register with opposed
blade damper.
2.3 HORIZONTAL GAS FURNACE/DX COOLING
A. Furnish and install horizontal and vertical natural gas fired direct vent condensing gas
furnaces employing a hot surface ignition system, multi-speed direct drive blower and
aluminized steel heat exchanger,secondary stainless steel heat exchanger to reclaim heat from
flue gases.
B. The furnace shall be certified by the American Gas Association.
C. The heavy gauge steel cabinet construction shall be provided with baked-on enamel finish.
The heat exchanger section of the cabinet is to be lined with fail-faced fiberglass insulation.
D. The integrated system controls have solid-state devices, which continuously monitor flame
presence. Dual solenoid combination gas valves and regulators are to be provided. The
burner shall be multi-port in-shot type.
E. The furnace shall be convertible, 115/1/60 power supply, blower door safety switch, front
service access, slide out blower assembly, direct drive 4-speed motor, cleanable high velocity
filters, 20 year non-prorated heat exchanger warranty,and one year parts and labor warranty.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600,8
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL WORK
A- All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork Above
hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades
to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. Any offsets or fittings
required to conceal duct runs and for coordination with other trades shall be provided as
required by this contractor.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or
SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints,reinforcing and supports. All exposed duct
work shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance.
Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be
free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off.
D. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper,at
each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to
Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space
limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door,two rotary type latches shall be used.
Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop
for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated duct work All doors shall be gasketed.
Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger
where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices.
E. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based
on maintaining airtight ducts at 3" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum of 5%
leakage of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in duct work
shall be sealed with U.L.classified United Duct Sealer.
F. Duct system shall have sufficient volume dampers to control and adjust the total volume of
each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. Provide any additional
balancing dampers by the Air Balancer.
G. Provide where required fire dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire
protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service.
H. Final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible duct work, UL listed,
Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return,M-KA for supply, or equal. All joints
shall be sealed with Class C sealant equal to Hardcast and Thermaflex duct straps.
Connection from flex duct to rigid shall be made with bellmouth fitting, Buckley Type BM,
or equal. Maximum length of flexible duct shall be six(6)feet.
I. Install duct type smoke detectors furnished by Electrical Subcontractor, one to be installed in
the supply duct of each air-handling unit.
J. Apply duct liner thermal-acoustic insulation in low velocity duct systems as shown on the
drawings.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-7
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure
above grade. .0"k,
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A- After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel
to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is
properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual",the name and location of the equipment or the building,the name of
the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents
with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,
with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an
approved equivalent
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation,and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts
for a period of one (1)year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-6
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install temporary light and power as specified
in Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa,shall be considered as called
for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The HVAC Subcontractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories that may be required. The HVAC Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets,valves, and accessories as may be required
to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools, machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Subcontractor.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines
and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by
the HVAC Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except
storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically
noted otherwise on the Drawings.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-5
ordering any materials and the installation of work Any discrepancies shall be called to the
attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work-
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal"appear in product
specification, and,as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance
with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be U.S. made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,and with the same brand of
manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Subcontractor shall submit to the
Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished on the project.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any
and all changes,which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC
Subcontractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-4
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care
and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Subcontractor himself were present The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed
or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as
to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Subcontractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the HVAC Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on
both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The HVAC Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The HVAC Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc.,hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in
place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Subcontractor to give proper information
as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all equipment, piping, duct work, conduit,wire and cable indicated on
the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The HVAC Subcontractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, duct, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the HVAC Subcontractor.
G. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at
his own expense. All pipes left open.during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
H. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The HVAC Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-3
SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING,AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1, as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under
this Section whether or not,such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated
on the Drawings, including,but not limited to, the following:
1. Gas Furnaces, condensing units.
2. Refrigerant and condensate piping and systems including all valves, fittings,
equipment,etc.
3. Duct systems for supply, return, and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers,
diffusers, and louvers.
4. Electric heaters.
5. Exhaust fans.
6. Insulation for piping and duct work.
7. Automatic temperature control system.
8. Combustion air and flue pipe and fittings.
9. Record drawings, Instructions, and Guarantee.
10. Air balancing,testing,adjustments, and startup.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Plumbing Code and local laws, rules,
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents
conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract
requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions
shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-2
INDEX
SECTION 15600-HVAC
PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3 -INSTALLATION
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 INSULATION
1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.8 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOKUPS 3.9 FIRE SAFING
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS
1.16 GUARANTEE
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
PART 2 -MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL WORK
2.2 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
2.3 HORIZONTAL GAS FURNACE/DX
COOLING
2.4 CONDENSING UNITS
2.5 ROOF VENTILATORS
2.6 LOUVERS
2.7 PIPE SLEEVES
2.8 HANGERS
2.9 INSULATION
2.10 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
2.12 COMBUSTION AIR AND VENT PIPE
2.13 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
HVAC 15600-1
I. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.or
Architect-Engineer approved equal,4"minimum thickness by the required full length
and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for ducts,pipes,and fire dampers.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
END OF SECTION 15400
-"'A
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400,20
3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Backflow preventers shall be installed as per regulation 310 CMR 22.22,with pressure gauges
on inlet and outlet of backflow preventer. Furnish Watts TK9 Model A test kit and one(1)
repair kit for each type of device. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall act as the Owner's Agent
in seeking approval from the Department of Environmental Protection. The Plumbing
Subcontractor shall submit all Plans,Specifications and permits required for approval and pay
all fees. Approvals shall be secured prior to purchase and installation.
B. On coldwater feed for future lawn irrigation: Watts Model No. 800M4QT-11/a" with lever
handles and self-contained bronze ball valve shut-offs.
3.12 STERILIZATION
A. Each unit of domestic water service line and distribution system shall be sterilized with chlorine
before acceptance of domestic operation. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to
provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. The chlorinating material shall be
introduced to the water lines and distributing systems in a manner approved by the D.E.P.,If
possible to do so,the lines shall be thoroughly flushed before introduction of the chlorinating
material. After a contact period of not less than eight(8) hours, the system shall be flushed
with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 parts per million.
All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the
contact period.
3.13 ISOLATION VALVES
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install isolation valves on the entire domestic
water distribution system, on mains,branches, and at each fixture.
3.14 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors,shafts,walls,stairway walls,mechanical
rooms, electrical rooms,vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
04018,Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400. 19
3.5 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that
business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry
proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed.
3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing
through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe,or Schedule 40 PVC
pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe and insulation passing through
same. Center pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where uninsulated pipes pass through walls.
3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil,waste,vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing
Subcontractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to
backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Subcontractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing
Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code.
3.8 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly
clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster,stickers, rust stains,and
any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures,leaving every part in perfect condition and ready
for use.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the drawings or not,and
all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing
Subcontractor and be included in his bid.
3.10 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for access to valves,shock arrestors,etc.,Panels shall be installed by the
General Contractor.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400- 18
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch in mains.
C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings,or enter non,
accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of
concealed piping.
e. Spaced intermittently at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run,
except reduce spacing to 20' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
C. Provide manufacturer's standard brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering,with piping
system abbreviation in approximately 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers
approximately 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and
control devices.
1. Provide 1-1/2"round by 19 gage tags with lettering as selected by Architect.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid
brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and
manufactured specifically for that purpose.
3. Submit valve schedule for piping system,typewritten and reproduced on 81/2"x 11"
bond paper. Tabulate valve number,piping system,system abbreviation(as shown on
tag),location of valve(room or space),and variations for identification(if any). Mark
valves which are intended for emergency,shut-off and similar special uses,by special
"flags",in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies,furnish extra copies for
Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
4. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or
extruded aluminum,with SSB-grade-sheet glass.
5. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in Machine Rooms where indicated or,if
not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes 4"diameter and smaller required for the installation of plumbing shall be
performed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a
manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
B. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-17
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees -*VWNA,
will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads
conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28,with graphite or inert filler and
oil,with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the
male threads.
3.2 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Subcontractor and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken
structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of
the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from
top,bottom or side of main,using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or
installation conditions. Supply pipes,valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2"between finished covering on the
different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and
contraction of pipe.
3.3 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide mechanical identification materials of one of *'
the following:
Allen Systems,Inc.
Brady(W. H.) Co.;Sigmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
Emed Co., Inc.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers,
complying with ANSI Al3.1.
1. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360°
around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes
piping system in each instance,as selected by Architect in cases of variance with name
as shown or specified.
3. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-16
finish for each heater.
2.14 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Make final hot water,cold water,waste,compressed air,and gas connections to all equipment.
Install solenoid gas valve on gas line feeding cooking equipment where noted.
2.15 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal.
B. Atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated,when supply is not under constant pressure.
2.16 GAS SERVICE
A. Apply for,pay all fees and charges in connection with, and co-ordinate the installation of the
new gas service.
B. All labor and materials required for a complete installation which are not furnished by the
utility company shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor at no extra cost to the
Owner.
C. The natural gas service will be furnished by Bay State Gas Company. All charges for the service
line and meter shall be paid for by the Owner.
PART 3-INSTALLATION
3.1 SOIL,WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall have a minimum
grade of 1/4"per foot for piping 3"and less and 1/8"per foot for piping larger than
3". All openings of the system shall be protected by a 2" (min.)water seal and vent
piping installed to allow a maximum internal pressure fluctuation of+/- 1" of water
column.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with
reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45°
wyes,long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8,or 1/16 bends,or by a combination of
those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be
used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet
side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted.
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-15
Model No. Z-541, or equal,with trap primer.
2.10 TRAP PRIMER
A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers on all floor drains. Primer shall
include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker,and copper
duplex manifold distribution reservoir as indicated on the drawing. Valve shall
conform with A.S.S.E.Standard 1018.
B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products,Inc., or equal.
2.11 SHOCK ABSORBERS
A. Shock absorbers shall be installed on each branch feeding fixtures with flush valves
and at top of risers shall be Precision Plumbing Products Model PPP,line size, or
equal,by Zurn,Josam, Smith, or Wade.
2.12 ACCESS PANELS
• A. Furnish access panels for all locations where cleanouts,valves, or other items
requiring operation or maintenance are located in finish walls. Access panels will
be installed by other trades.
B. Access panels shall be Boico Style C, or equal, size 8"x 8" or larger.
2.13 WATER HEATER
A. WH-1:Bank
Water heater shall be electric tank type,Model DSE,20, as manufactured by A. O. Smith or
equal by P.V.I.,Rheem,or Ace. Water heater shall be of glass-lined design,20 gallon tank and
include 9 KW electric heating element and safety relief valve, extruded anode rod rigidly
supported for cathodic protection. Heater shall be equipped with 3/4" NPT water inlet and
outlet openings. Heater shall have a minimum working pressure of 160 psi and include a high
temperature limit control and dual thermostat for accurate temperature control. Unit shall be
wired for 208 volts,three phase, 25.0 amp, 60 Hertz.
B. WH-2:Tenant Space(2 required)
Water heater shall be electric tank type,Model DSE-10, as manufactured by A.O. Smith or
equal by P.V.I.,Rheem,or Ace. Water heater shall be of glass-lined design and include 6 KW
electric heating element and safety relief valve, extruded anode rod rigidly supported for
cathodic protection. Heater shall be equipped with 3/4"NPT water inlet and outlet openings.
Heater shall have a minimum working pressure of 160 psi and include a high temperature limit
control and dual thermostat for accurate temperature control. Unit shall be wired for 208
volts, three phase, 60 Hertz, 16.7 amp.
C. Furnish and install P&T relief valve,vacuum breaker and outer jacket with baked enamel
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-14
No. LRAD2219-55, 5 1/z" deep bowl, or equal with back punch drain.
2. Faucet-Two handle kitchen deck faucet,solid brass fabricated body,8"centers,91/z"
long swing spout,with anti-siphon spray attachment,Delta Model No.2476-LHP with
handle option H24 and A22PB accent handle.
3. Stainless steel cup strainer, 14/2"tailpiece and P-trap with cleanout nipple. Chrome
plated supplies with wheel handle stops and chrome plated escutcheon plates, and
insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav Guard" molded vinyl
insulation.
F. Electric Water Cooler (P-4)
1. Water Cooler shall deliver 7.6 GPH of 50°F water at 90°F ambient and 80°F inlet
water, shall have stainless steel basin with integral drain strainer, shall have push
bar water controls,cooler shall comply with ADA regulations. The manufacturer
shall certify the unit to meet the requirements of ANSI/NSF 61, Section 9 and the
Safe Drinking Act. Cooler shall be Halsey Taylor Voyager Barrier Free Cooler
Model No. HTV&Q,with Easy-Flex bubbler. This Contractor shall furnish and
install a water filter unit to serve this fixture. Filter to be Aqua-Pure "Gold"Model
AP-500. Saddle valves will not be allowed.
2. Drain and Trap: Halsey Taylor perforated drain, tailpiece and trap assembly.
G. Wall Hydrant(R5)Freeze proof, Cold Water
1. Woodford Model B67 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti-siphon
vacuum breaker,3/a"hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to control both flow
and drain functions,loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant, and rough brass
finish.
H. Mop Receptor(P-6)
1. Basin-Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24"x 24"x 10"high mop basin.
2. Faucet-T&S Brass Model No. B-0665-BSTR, 8" centers,with vacuum breaker
spout, pail hook,rough chrome plated,built-in stops, heavy duty assembly with
bottom brace.
3. Trim-Fiat No. 87A drain,No. 889CC mop hanger,No. 832AA hose and bracket,
and No. 1453-BB strainer.
I. Floor Drain(R7)Mechanical Room
1. Heavy duty cast iron deep sump body with seepage pan,combination membrane
flashing clamp, suspended sediment bucket and heavy-duty cast iron gate, Zurn
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-13
2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. General Requirements: References made herein are to establish type and quality of materials.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures shall be chrome plated and connected to the
rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated on nickel plated
brass with polished, bright surfaces. Vitreous china and acid-resisting enameled cast iron
fixtures shall be American Standard, Kohler, or Eljer; toilet seats to be Church or Olsonite;
stainless steel sinks shall be Just or Elkay.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper
installation of all fixtures requiring supports. They shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building
progresses. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper
support of all plumbing fixtures.
C. Water Closet(P-1), Handicapped
1. Closet-American Standard"Cadet"No.2998.012,vitreous china floor mounted, 1.6
gpf., elongated bowl, tank type toilet with close couple tank.
2. Seat-Olsonite#95-SS white solid plastic,extra heavy,open front seat,less cover,with
self-sustaining hinge.
3. Mounting-Standard roughing floor flange with bees'wax seal.
D. Lavatory(P-2), Handicapped
1. Basin-American Standard Murro Universal Design Model No.0954.000, vitreous
china,wall hung lavatory, mounting height shall be mounted with rim at 34" above
finished floor.
2. Supply Fitting-5-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet,4"center,self-closing with
temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops,time limit stop with flow, blade
handle, and grid strainer,Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers.
3. Fittings - Provide chrome plated "P" trap with cleanout, with loose key stops, and
insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl
insulation.
E. Single Bowl Sink(P-3)
1. Sink - 22" x 19 1/z" self-rimming single bowl 18 ga. stainless steel with sound
deadening undercoat; punched for four(4) holes on ledge, Elkay Lustertone Model
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-12
Ornamental Iron, or equal.
2.6 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with heavy density fiberglass pipe insulation with self-sealing
lap, 1" thick for hot water up to 1 %2" and 1 1/z" thick insulation on piping 2"and larger, 1/2))
thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type,Certainteed"500°Snap-On"or
equal by Knauf,Manville, or Ones-Corning.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with PVC jackets applied over fiberglass blanket with joints taped.
Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor
barrier. Jackets shall be Certainteed"Snap-On" or equal.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
D. Install an 18" length of rigid (load bearing) insulation at each hanger; insulation shall run
continuous through the hanger. To be calcium silicate, or equal.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories and sinks shall be insulated with
Truebro"Handi Lav-Guard"insulation system,Model 102, or equal.
2.7 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Taylor
30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F
subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response,but in no
case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each
thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of
matching length,and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers
shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal
operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water: 30°F- 180°F.
2. Coldwater: 0°F- 100°F.
C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater.
2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 44/2"dial,double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be
in the center of the scale. To be U. S. Gage Co., or approved equal.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-11
I. Support pipes sufficiently clear of all part of structure to allow for full thickness of insulation. +,
J. Hangers to be adequate size to include insulation. Furnish and install galvanized steel
insulation protection shields outside of insulation on pipe sizes 2" and larger to prevent
crushing or indenting of insulation of hangers.
2.4 TRAPS
A. Traps at fixtures shall be as listed in the Fixture Schedule. Exposed traps shall be chrome
plated.
B. Traps and running traps shall be extra heavy cast iron where buried in floors or serving floor
drains. Where traps are not connected directly under the drain they serve in the floor, they
shall be fitted with top cleanouts and extensions to the floor with access covers and plates.
C. Furnish and install traps as required for all items of equipment furnished under other Sections
of these Specifications, and/or by the Owner.
2.5 CLEANOUTS AND ACCESS PANELS
A. Floor cleanout shall be Zurn 1400 Series Leveltrol Supreme cleanouts and Type ZN 14001 in
terrazzo floors,Type ZN-1400-X in tiled floors,Type ZN-1400-CM in carpeted floors,and Type
ZN-1400-2 in all other locations. Cleanouts shall be set flush and level with top of finished
floor surface except in carpeted areas where they shall be flush with concrete. "^
B. Wall cleanouts shall be brass,recessed head plugs with Zurn ZN 1440.1 access frame and cover.
C. Access covers shall be flush with finished floors and walls. Where floor cleanouts occur above
finish floors above grade,they shall be provided with flange,clamping collar and 24"x 24", 16
oz. copper flashing. Copper flashing shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing
Subcontractor.
D. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves,balancing fittings, cleanouts, shock
absorbers,and trap primers in masonry walls,plastered walls,plastered or gypsum wallboard
ceilings. Access panels shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor and installed by
tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plaster shall be Karp Type DSC214 PL
(12"x 12" min.); in walls shall be Karp Type DSC214M"Universal" (12"x 12"). For drywall
ceilings shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches,Type KSTDW/CAD(12"x 12"min.).
E. Floor Cleanout-A(F.D.A.) shall be Zurn Model ZN-1400 with NEO-LOC gasket, all brass
C.O. plug, nickel bronze scoriated round cover.
F. Cleanouts shall be Zurn Industries,Inc.,Wade Division,Josam Mfg.Co.,Jay R.Smith Co.,or
equal.
O. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400, 10
Provide necessary ball type gas shut-offvalves or square head cocks.on piping 2"and smaller and
drips as required. Piping 2"and larger shall have plug valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be
Schedule 40,all welded with flanged plug valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working
pressure.
1. All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the National
Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure, conforming to the
requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder shall be employed on the
work who has not been fully qualified under the above specified procedure and so
certified as a member of the local chapter of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau
or similar locally recognized testing authority.
2. Gas piping to gas-fired heating equipment shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing
Subcontractor. Gas train vents from heating equipment shall be the responsibility of the
HVAC Subcontractor.
3. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall apply for the new gas entrance and the Owner shall
pay for all fees and charges required for the new gas entrance to the building. On site
service piping and meter shall be by the Bay State Gas Company.
2.3 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter&Paterson, or Fee &
Mason.
B. For cast iron and galvanized steel piping Grinnell Company's Figure No. 260, one to each
length of cast iron pipe, at 12 ft. intervals for threaded piping; for copper tubing Grinnell
Co.'s figure CT-65 at 8 ft. intervals for tubing up to 2"; 10 ft. intervals for tubing 2-1/2" and
above.
C. For hot and cold water piping Grinnell Company's figure No.CT99 heavily copper plated at 6
ft. intervals for copper tubing 1 N" or less, 10 ft. intervals for piping 1 1/z" and larger.
Provision shall be made to allow for expansion and contraction of all piping.
D. Gas piping shall be supported by steel clevis hangers, one to each 8' -0" of pipe.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1 ft.of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe
not over 5 ft. in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12"from the elbow on
the connecting horizontal run.
F. All vertical piping shall be supported at each story height,with a support at the base of vertical
cast iron pipe.
G. Perforated strap iron hanger or Milford type copper plated steel hangers are not acceptable.
H. Where piping is supported from ceiling beams,support parallel pipes from different beams.
A
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-9
Vent flashing at the roof shall be by the Roofing Subcontractor.
C. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type"L"seamless drawn
tubing assembled with sweat fittings. All solder used shall be lead free, cadmium free,
"Silverbrite 100" or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A5.8 publication. All
exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated.All below slab trap primer
feed piping shall be Type "K" rolled with silver solder joints.
2.2 VALVES
A. Valves shall be manufactured by Fairbanks,Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,Hammond,Crane,Powell,
or Stockham. (Federal Specifications:WW V-54c, Class A,Type 1).
1. Gate: 125 lb.WSP, all bronze, non rising stem, screwed bonnet, one piece wedge,
designed to permit repacking under pressure,Lunkenheimer Cat.No.2133,or equal.
2. Check: 125 lb. WSP, all bronze horizontal swing type, screwed caps, bronze disc
designed to permit regrinding of seat without removal of body, Lunkenheimer Cat.
No. 2145, or equal.
B. In lieu of gate valves on water lines, the Plumbing Subcontractor has the option of installing
"Apollo" or equal brass or bronze solder end ball valves, with teflon seats and full line size
ports,unless specifically noted otherwise.
1. On water lines inside building;ball valves 3"and smaller shall be as manufactured by
Conbraco Industries, Inc.'s "Apollo", Series 95-200 stop and drain, with 1-1/4"
extended stems for piping 1/2" to 1" size; Series 74100/200 with 1-1/4" extended
stems for piping 1-1/4" to 3" size. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball,
reinforced Teflon seats and seals,bronze body,400 psi WOG,positive 100%shutoff.
2. Drain valves at all low points shall be "Apollo" 78100 or 78200 Series, 1/2" or 3/4"
solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain.
3. Ball valves shall be of one manufacturer, Conbraco Industries, Inc., "Apollo,"Watts
Regulator,NibcoScott, or approved equal.
C. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings. Valves
up to 3" shall be Class 125, solder ends, bronze body, swing type disc, Stockham
Figure B309.
2. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham,Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,or equal.
D. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings, installed in
strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code, (248 CMR 5.00). All piping 2"and
below shall be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings;2-1/2"and above shall be welded.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-8
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.15 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one(1)year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be detective during this
period.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by
defects in his work and for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment
caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A- All soil,waste and vent lines in accessible areas 2"and larger shall be cast iron"nohub,"ASA
group 022 pipe and fittings joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by"MG"coupling or
"C1ampA11"; on pipe sizes 3"and larger use four(4)band clamps,two(2)band clamps will only
be allowed on 2 pipe. All buried soil,waste and vent, lines shall be service weight cast iron
pipe with all fittings carefully fitted and caulked together with oakum and lead,sealed gas and
water tight. Minimum size of piping below ground shall be 2". Where it is impractical to
install cast iron pipe, as in tight partition work or where the sizes of lines are smaller than 2",
Type"L"copper tubing shall be used conforming to ASTM Specification with sweat type fitting
using lead free solder and non-corrosive flux,"Non-Korrode",or approved equal conforming to
ASTM Specification B 32 alloy 50A. In lieu of oakum and lead joints,"push-on type"resilient
gasket fittings may be used on buried pipe only.
B. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper, or DWV, except minimum size below
ground shall be 2".Minimum vent terminal through roof shall be 4"except otherwise noted.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-7
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to
the building site when required,so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
work and that of other trades.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Subcontract shall be provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle,single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines
and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing,etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed by
the Plumbing Subcontractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, ductwork, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except
mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,except that horizontal runs at the ceiling in rooms
that have exposed structure may be exposed.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure
above grade, except where installed on the room side of continuous wall insulation.
1.14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to
operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is
properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual",the name and location of the equipment or the building,the name of
the Subcontractor,and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with
tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with
large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an
approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-6
and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Subcontractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the Plumbing
Subcontractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop
drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Plumbing Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and
substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the
proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOKUPS
A. The General Contractor shall provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,plans,
elevations,and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa,shall be considered as called
for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and
accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings,traps,offsets,valves,and accessories as maybe required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-5
where found. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at
his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All fixtures and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
1. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the
attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with
the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise,all materials used shall be U.S.made,
new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function
properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,listings,or labels
shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job,the Plumbing Subcontractor shall submit to the
Architect six(6) clean and legible sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or shop
drawings,giving all specific details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400,4
10. Guarantee and instructions.
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES,AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials, and the installation thereof, shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Massachusetts Fuel Gas and Plumbing
Code and local laws,rules,regulations,and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the
Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care
and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing
Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall notbe removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors'work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever;and in case of dispute arising as to
the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Subcontractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the Plumbing Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both
parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports,inserts,etc.,hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in
place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Subcontractor to give proper information
as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping,ductwork,conduit,wire and cable indicated on the drawings is
diagrammatic only,and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the
building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends, offsets, etc. Existing systems
and piping are shown in their approximate locations,but shall be worked on or connected to
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-3
SECTION 15400-PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions,applicable parts of Division
1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting,or affected by the work of this Section.
Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably
incidental to,the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated
on the drawings, including,but not limited to, the following:
1. All sanitary, drain,waste and vent systems inside the building and connection to site
sanitary sewer 10' - 0' outside of the foundation wall, or as specifically called out on
the drawings.
2. All hot and cold water distribution systems and water heaters. Furnish piping,fittings,
insulation,supports,valves,and pumps,as well as electric water heaters. Extend new
water line to 10'-0" outside of the foundation wall.
3. All natural gas piping per Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code,including connections to all
gas fired heating equipment
4. Plumbing fixtures, trim and supports.
5. Provide and install water meters and pressure reducing valves at domestic water service
entrance.
6 Connections to fixtures and equipment furnished and installed by others requiring
water, gas,drains,and waste.
7. Provide backwater preventers(point-of-use types)where shown on drawings,specified,
or required.
8. Furnish access panels.
9. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400-2
INDEX
SECTION 15400-PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 3 -INSTALLATION
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 SOIL,WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 CONNECTIONS
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 INSULATION
1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.8 INSPECTION AND TESTS
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOKUPS 3.9 CLEANING UP
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 ACCESS PANELS
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS
1.13 WORK CONCEALED 3.13 STERILIZATION
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 3.14 ISOLATION VALVES
MANUALS 3.15 FIRE SAFING
1.15 GUARANTEE
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
2.2 VALVES
2.3 HANGERS .
2.4 TRAPS
2.5 CLEANOUTS AND ACCESS PANELS
2.6 INSULATION
2.7 THERMOMETERS
2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES
2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURES
2.10 TRAP PRIMER
2.11 SHOCK ABSORBERS
2.12 ACCESS PANELS
2.13 WATER HEATER
2.14 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
2.15 VACUUM BREAKERS
2.16 GAS SERVICES
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
Plumbing 15400.1
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULE,TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES.
A. For each public use toilet room, provide the following. Bobrick catalog numbers are indicated:
1. Toilet Tissue holder: B-273
2. Framed Mirror: B-165 1830
3. Grab Bars: B490
4. Robe Hook: B-671
5. Paper Towel Dispenser:&359
6. Soap Dispenser: B-132
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
B. American Specialties, Inc.
C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
D. Bradley Corporation.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers'written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10801
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2
SECTION 10801-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning,
and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801- I
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (low sheen in toilet rooms, eggshell
elsewhere).
END OF SECTION 09912
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-9
painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are -101kh,
incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning,repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. *"
a. Prime Coat(or touch up for pre-primed surfaces): Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex(satin).
B. Wood Substrates for Clear Finish: (Cherry wood paneling and flush birch veneer doors).
1. For unfinished birch doors: Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.4E.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain(semitransparent).
b. Three Finish Coats: Interior, oil-modified, clear urethane(satin).
2. For pre-primed and pre-finished cherry woodwork: Touch up only using same finish
specified in Division 6 for woodwork.
C. Wood Substrates, opaque Finish:
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 64A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex(satin).
D. Gypsum Board Substrates: °'""°
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-8
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
C. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
h. Color code piping and other elements where so specified in Division 15 Sections.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
C. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-
* paint materials from Project site,pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected
materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
=RIOR PAINTING 09912.7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification,performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
F. Wood Substrates, opaque finish:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides,and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
G. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-6
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI#39.
2.6 LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex(Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Interior Latex(Eggshell): MPI#52 (Gloss Level 3).
C. Interior Latex(Satin): MPI#43 (Gloss Level 4).
D. Interior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#54(Gloss Level 5).
E. High-Performance Architectural Latex(Eggshell): MPI#139 (Gloss Level 3).
F. High-Performance Architectural Latex(Satin): MPI#140(Gloss Level 4).
G. High-Performance Architectural Latex(Semigloss): MPI#141 (Gloss Level 5).
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as
follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-5
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:.
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
C. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl)phthalate.
h. Di-n butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
1. Dimethyl phthalate.
M. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
P. Isophorone.
q. Lead. ,
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalene.
W. Toluene (methylbenzene).
X. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
Y. Vinyl chloride.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI#50.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-4
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F
(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material
and color applied.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore&Co.
2. California Paints.
3. ChemRex.
4. Duron, Inc.
5. Envirocoat Technologies Inc.
6. ICI Paints.
7. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
8. Pratt&Lambert
9. Sherwin-Williams Company(The).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-3
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in"MPI Approved Products
List.
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have
been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F(7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F(10 and 35 deg C).
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-2
SECTION 09912-INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
2. Steel.
3. Wood.
4. Gypsum board.
B. Work includes coating of all normally field-painted items throughout the project interiors except
where specifically indicated otherwise, whether or not such items are specifically listed in this
Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming and pre-finishing standing & running trim,
wainscoting and carpentry.
3. Division 8 Sections for pre-finishing and factory priming windows and doors with primers
specified in this Section.
4. Division 9 Section"Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm)square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912. 1
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 63A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior 100%acrylic latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior 100%acrylic latex(semigloss).
C. Fiber Cement Siding and Panels and Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Touch up with pre-primed fiber cement surfaces with primer
recommended by fiber cement manufacturer. For gypsum board, Exterior latex
matching topcoat
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior 100%acrylic latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior 100%acrylic latex(semigloss).
END OF SECTION 09911
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911.7
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product
requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected
materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously
painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning,repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel(semigloss).
B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911.6
E ` B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Fiber Cement Substrates: Restore damage to pre-primed surfaces and prime cut surfaces.
F. Primed Steel Substrates: Repair and restore prime coat as required. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
G. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. Treat knots with knot sealer.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
H. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is
dry and sanded smooth.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911-5
2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex(Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
2.7 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS
A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel(Semigloss): MPI#94 (Gloss Level 5).
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as
follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent. *
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM
A. Fiber cement siding and trim will be delivered with the manufacturer's shop primer.
B. Restore and repair prime coating and choose and apply finish coats in conformance with the
manufacturer's published painting requirements.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. .,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911-4
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore &Co.
2. California Paints.
3. Duron, Inc.
4. Envirocoat Technologies Inc.
5. ICI Paints.
6. Pratt&Lambert
7. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
8. Sherwin Williams Company(The).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI#3.
B. Bonding Primer(Water Based): MPI#17.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
system indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79.
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A- Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI#5.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911-3
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .0m+*,
A. MPI Standards:
I. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in"MPI Approved Products
List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F(7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F(10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material
and color applied.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911.2
SECTION 09911 -EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Exterior gypsum board.
3. Fiber Cement Siding and Trim
B. Work includes coating of all normally field-painted items throughout the project exterior except
where specifically indicated otherwise, whether or not such items are specifically listed in this
Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming and shop finishing carpentry.
3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming and pre-finishing doors and frames with primers
specified in this Section.
4. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on interior substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911- 1
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers'written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and
corners.
C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.
D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps,no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage.
E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and [3 inches
(75 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at
corner. No horizontal seams are permitted.
F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles,wrinkles,blisters, and other defects.
G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without
any overlay or spacing between strips.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and
similar items.
END OF SECTION 09720
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WALL COVERINGS 09720-4
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering
and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer, and with a
VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 9
Section 'Painting and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended
substrate.
C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil,grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings,cracks, and defects.
1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry
units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity.
3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer.
4. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with
fine sandpaper.
E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and
similar items.
F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not
less than 24 hours before installation.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WALL COVERINGS 09720.3
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for installation.
1. Provide a mockup for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with
requirements in ASTM F 1141.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc (160 lint) is
provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Wall-Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
installed.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT:
A. Vinyl wall covering to be selected by Architect, subject to allowances above.
2.2 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WALL COVERINGS 09720.2
SECTION 09720-WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section'Painting" for primers, coatings, and paint..
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Carry an allowance of$1.00 per square foot, for delivered material only.
B. For bidding purposes, budget for sufficient material, purchased at the above prices, to
accommodate waste.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern
placement, seams and termination points.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch-(1000-mm-) long section of wall covering from lot
to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern required.
1. Show complete pattern repeat.
2. Mark top and face of material.
E. Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WALL COVERINGS 09720. 1
E. Maintain reference markers,holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned
Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16,"Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09680 "
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CARPET 09680-6
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet[cushion]
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm)wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8
mm),unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet[cushion] manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the
following:
1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation.", OR
2. Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Attached-
Cushion Installations."
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
1. Level adjoining border edges.
C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CARPET 09680-5
PART 2-PRODUCTS ldw%�,
2.1 PRODUCTS:
A. Level-loop, cut; cut-and-loop or multilevel-loop pile carpet to be selected by Architect, subject to
allowances above.
B. Heavy duty Berber-type walk-off matt in entry vestibule.
2.2 INSTALLATION
A. Direct Glue
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is
recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.
1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when tested according to ASTM D 5116:
a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.
b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x h.
C. 2-Ethyl-l-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer
for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent
pile loss at seams.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential
defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CARPET 09680-4
00k B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive,and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure
of substrate,vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs,loss of tuft bind strength, and delamination.
3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq.yd. (8.3 sq. m).
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CARPET 09680.3
B. Shop Drawings (seaming diagram): Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
3. Seam locations, types, and methods.
4. Type of subfloor.
5. Type of installation.
6. Pattern type,repeat size,location, direction, and starting point.
7. Pile direction.
8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
10. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch-(300-mm-)square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch(150-mm)Sample.
4. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern
alignment.
D. Product Schedule: For carpet Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
G. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A_ Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CARPET 09680.2
SECTION 09680,CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Carpet.
2. Carpet allowance
3. Walk-off Matt
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile" for resilient wall base and accessories installed
with carpet.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Carry an allowance of$25 per square yard, for delivered material only, for all carpet in the Lobby.
B. Carry an allowance of$15 per square yard,for delivered material only,for all other carpet.
C. Carry an allowance of$50 per square yard, for delivered material only, for walk-off matt in entry
vestibule
D. For bidding purposes, budget for sufficient material, purchased at the above prices, to
accommodate waste.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of
substrate:
1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
2. Walk-off Matt
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CARPET 09680. 1
3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 11"k
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil,visible adhesive,
and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood
panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects
over panels without moving panels.
END OF SECTION 09651
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651.6
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces,door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining
marking device.
F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks,voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of
adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends
occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to
produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651.5
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds,sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to
be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles
at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that
equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-4
D. Inside Comers: Job formed.
E. Surface: Smooth.
2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Joiner for tile and carpet. Available Manufacturers:
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products
2. Johnsonite
3. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.
4. Roppe Corporation
5. Stoler Industries
B. Material: Rubber.
C. Profile and Dimensions: 4" width, heights as required to reconcile difference in floor elevations
between porcelain tile and carpet
D. Color: To be selected by Architect from full available production range.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
C. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651.3
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. 100"01.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one unopened box of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile
installed.
2. Resilient Wall Base: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet. (3 linear m) for every or fraction
thereof, of each type, color,pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Product: Armstrong Standard Excelon Imperial Texture, 12"x 12"x 1/8", or approved equal by
any of the following manufacturers. Color: To be selected by Architect from full available
production range. _
1. Amtico International Inc.;.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;.
3. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO;.
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Product: Johnsonite Vinyl Cove Base, 4" x 1/8", Color: To be selected by Architect from full
available production range,or or approved equal by any of the following manufacturers
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;.
2. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO;.
3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products;.
4. Marley Flexco(USA), Inc.;.
5. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.;.
6. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.;.
7. Pirelli Rubber Flooring;.
8. Roppe Corporation;.
9. Stoler Industries;.
10. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division;.
B. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
C. Outside Corners: Job formed.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651.2
SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT).
2. Resilient wall base and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F(10 deg C)or more than 90 deg F(32 deg Q. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-1
7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners
and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise
fit.
1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal
in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel
surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
3. Install hold-down clips, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction and to resist
wind uplift in vicinity of entryways. Space as recommended by panel manufacturer's
written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-5
2.4 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Products: By manufacturer of suspension system, compatible with suspension system.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel
ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this
and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum
of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws,
or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate
or otherwise fail due to age,corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. When framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install
carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm)from ends of each member.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-4
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Product: "Cirrus", No. 589, 24" x 24" x 3/a", with Beveled Tegular Edge, by Armstrong World
Industries, Inc.
B. Color: White
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 64l/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M,Type 304, nonmagnetic.
3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No.N04400.
4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
[0.106-inch-(2.69-mm-)] [0.135-inch-(3.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension>diameter wire.
E. Hold-Down Clips: Where necessary to resist wind uplift at entrances, provide manufacturer's
standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches(610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
1. Product: 9/16" system,Armstrong Suprafine ML,or approved equal by Chicago Metallic.
B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hotdip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with
prefinished 9/16-inch-(15-mm-)wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
AW 2. Cap Finish: Painted white.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511.3
E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: .
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will
be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 5 percent
of quantity installed.
3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511.2
SECTION 095 11-ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other,based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices
whose installation is specified in other Sections.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch° 1 foot(1:48).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511. 1
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection,remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09310
l
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310-7
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform �+►
joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation
standards.
1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
a. Exterior tile floors.
b. Tile floors in wet areas.
C. Tile swimming pool decks.
d. Tile floors in laundries.
e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by-2 00 mm)or larger.
f. Tile floors composed of rib backed tiles.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Porcelain Tile: 3/8 inch(9.5 mm).
C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet,wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are
safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal
surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water
before and after cleaning.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310-6
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness
tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
2. Remove protrusions,bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show
same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile"that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation method F113-2K..
C. Extend the work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates,collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay the in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310-5
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications,
half-hard brass exposed-edge material.
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless,containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of 120 to 140 deg F(49 to 60 deg Q per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color
or appearance of grout.
2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers'written instructions.
B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A- Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil,waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310.4
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
A. Porcelain Tile: Selce, by American Olean, or approved equal. Any of the manufacturer's
production colors at Architect's option.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards
referenced in"Setting and Grouting Materials"Article.
B. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
C. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type,protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of
petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Minerals&Chemicals, Inc.
2. Boiardi Products Corporation.
3. Bonsal,W.R., Comparxy.
4. Bostik.
5. CCure.
6. Custom Building Products.
7. DAP, Inc.
8. Jamo Inc.
9. LATICRETE International Inc.
10. MAPEI Corporation.
11. Southern Grouts&Mortars, Inc.
12. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
13. TEC Specialty Products Inc.
B. Latex Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.4, consisting of the following:
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry,redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to
which only water must be added at Project site.
2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-
latex additive.
C. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6, color as indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310.3
E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. .
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and-grouting product[and special�purpose tile].
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
B. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Metal edge strips.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color,pattern, and size indicated. ,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310-2
owk
SECTION 093 10-CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A, This Section includes the following:
1. Porcelain Tile
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
► 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Metal edge strips in 6-inch(150-mm)lengths.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CERAMIC TILE 09310. 1
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures,powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
C. Installation of air-duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of ceiling support framing.
END OF SECTION 09260
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 13
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A- General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840,
for locations indicated:
1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and
acoustical assemblies.
2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges. System used for unfinished walls and ceilings in the Tenant Building.
3. Level 3: Not used.
4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners,and trim flanges: System for general use where exposed to view in areas not
visible from the Lobby.
5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface: System for use in the Lobby and Tellers areas.
E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for
use as exposed ceiling board.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will
conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been
corrected.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,
will be ready for above-ceiling observation. '
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 12
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit
profile formed by coffers,joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4-
to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant.
K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2 1inch-(6.4-to 1(.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges
with U bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
L. Walls and partitions designated for acoustical treatment: Seal construction at perimeters,behind
control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of
acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for
locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings and staggering receptacles and
switch boxes so that such elements on opposite sides of a wall or partition never share the same
stud cavity.
M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced.gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturers written recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c.for vertical applications.
3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to
supports,with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or
structural penetrations.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260.11
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to IA
jamb studs.
1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud,with a minimum I/' inch(13-mm)
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.
3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
H. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section
"Building Insulation."
3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA 216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists
and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide
control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
J•
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 10
F. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
G. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated,but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) O.C.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm)o.c.
H. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board
assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket
isolation strip between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1/8 inch(3 mm)from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings,
except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over
frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to
provide support for gypsum board.
1. Cut studs 1/2 inch(13 mm)short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2. For partitions with acoustic treatment that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and
decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces, install framing around structural and
other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum
board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid
structure.
a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:
1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches(406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can
be attached to open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first.
F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-9
1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install
slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally
support assembly.
a. Use deep-leg deflection track where such isolation is necessary.
D. Incorporate control and expansion joints in gypsum board finishes in conformance with
ASTM C 840 recommendations. Place such joints in locations consistent with lines of building
spaces, acceptable to the Architect. In walls, locate control joints at doorways, aligned vertically
above one jamb of the doorway. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel
framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and
in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for
panel attachment are level to within [1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m)] <Insert tolerance>
measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
C. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D. For exterior soffits, install cross bracing and framing to resist wind uplift.
E. Screw furring to wood framing.
Aftk
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260.8
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033
to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
F. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies
to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or
similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's
written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum
Construction Handbook."
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-7
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type,sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping
compounds.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable
topping compounds.
2. Glass Mat,Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A- Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corp.;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corp.;BA 98.
C. Tremco, Inc.;Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260.6
ek 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 'Dens-Glass Gold"by G-
P Gypsum Corp.
b. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm
2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Comerbead: Use at outside corners,unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
C. Expansion(Control)Joint: Use [where indicated] <Insert requirements>.
d. Curved-Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Comerbead: Use at outside corners.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
C. Expansion(Control)Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable
strip covering slot opening..
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: l0-by 10 glass mesh.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges,and damaged surface areas, use
setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-5
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch(0.7 mm). AOW►,,
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) and 6 inches(152.4 mm), as indicated.
C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum
board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System(SFT).
b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track.
D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch(0.79 min).
2. Depth: 7/8 inch(22.2 mm).
E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Regular Type:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than
regular-type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8".
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: Ceiling surfaces.
2.5 EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Either:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 93l/C 931M, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
a. Core: 5/8 inch(15.9 mm)., or
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260.4
C. Hangers: As follows:
1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 64l/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-
mm) diameter.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-)wide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 040
(Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
1. Depth: 71/2 inches (63.5 mm).
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40
(Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. Any of the following as appropriate for application:
1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-
inch-(12.7-mm-)wide flange,3/4 inch(19.1 mm) deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)<Insert thickness>.
b. Depth: 2.1/2 inches (63.5 mm).
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch(22.2 mm)deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/24nch(12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped,with face attached to single flange by a
slotted leg(web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs.
F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide [one ofl the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System.
C. USG Interiors,Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.
2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: As follows:
1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40(Z120),hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-3
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Ao"►,
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Clark Steel Framing Systems.
b. Consolidated Systems,Inc.
C. Dale Industries, Inc.-Dale/Incor.
d. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
f. National Gypsum Company.
g. Scafco Corporation.
h. Unimast, Inc.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum Corp.
C. National Gypsum Company.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-(1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260.2
SECTION 09260-GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Non-load-bearing steel framing.
3. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood framing, furring and blocking.
2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in
gypsum board assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board
assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample .in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 1
OW B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into
contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction,but not less than once a month;for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.7 SCHEDULE
A. Glass in aluminum entrances in exterior walls: `Passive Solar Low-E Insulating-Glass Units'
B. Glass in aluminum entrances in interior walls (interior vestibule doors): Clear Insulating-Glass
Units
C. Glass in interior wood stile and rail doors: Class I (clear)float glass,Kind FT(fully tempered).
END OF SECTION 08800
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800.9
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by *o"%,
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that,when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with
or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 SEALANT GLAZING(WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into
glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of
sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent
labels, and clean surfaces.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800.8
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as
required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for, adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as
follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements
in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw,bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on
opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800-7
2.3 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project,with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
2.4 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS
A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6.0 mm.
2. Interspace Content: Argon.
3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass.
a. Kind FT(fully tempered).
4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass.
a. Kind FT(fully tempered).
B. Passive Solar Low-E Insulating-Glass Units
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite- 25 and 6.0 mm.
2. Interspace Content: Argon.
3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass.
a. Kind FT(fully tempered).
4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass.
a. Kind FT(fully tempered).
5. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets
at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ++,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800.6
40' PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class,
kind, and condition indicated.
1. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered)float glass.
B. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and
with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2"Insulating-Glass Units"Article.
1. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered)glass throughout.
2. Sealing System: Dual seal, with any of the following primary and secondary sealant
combinations:
a. Polyisobutylene and polysulfide.
b. Polyisobutylene and silicone.
C. Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl.
d. Polyisobutylene and polyurethane.
3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
2.2 GLAZING MATERIALS
A General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
obtain fire-resistance rating.
O
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800-5
H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed
Insulating Glass Units."
I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting
agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A_ Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost,condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F(4.4 deg Q.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to
Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site,
within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800-4
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations
with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this
Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single
manufacturer for each glass type: insulating glass.
C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-
control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator
program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from
a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.
D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a
single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals' Article
from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
F. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports
in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period.
1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
G. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently
marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another
certification agency or acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2
articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side,
provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq.
m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with
Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are
required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800-3
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites
in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses
and in strengths (annealed or heat treated)required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads:As defined in Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4
edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch(25 mm),whichever is less.
1) For insulating glass.
C. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Interior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing
a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that
manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.
D. Qualification Data: For installers.
E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer
indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for
compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
F. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products:
1. Insulating glass.
2. Glazing sealants.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800-2
SECTION 08800-GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Glazed storefront entrances.
2. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as
defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
peeling, cracking,and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturers written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes
exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
GLAZING 08800- 1
move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the
door.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately [three] [six] <Insert number> months after date of
Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and
readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure
function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 1
Section"Demonstration and Training."
3.8 TYPICAL DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. Exterior Aluminum Doors: See Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and
Storefronts": All hardware except cylinders by that Section.
B. Typical Interior Doors: Lockset, hinges, closer, floor stop.
C. Doors to toilet rooms, offices, conference rooms: Above plus gasketing and automatic recessed
door bottom.
END OF SECTION 08712
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712. 12
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware
for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
low
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in
each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including
whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely
from an open position of 30 degrees.
2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock
bolt.
3. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep
"" period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712.11
Board, and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans owftk
with Disabilities Act(ADA),Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)."
1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch(13 mm) high.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3,EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections
before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI Al 15 Series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15--W Series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated [on Drawings] [as follows]
unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712- 10
C. DORMA Architectural Hardware;Member of The DORMA Group North America.
d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.8 CLOSERS
A. Modem-Type-with-Cover Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep
and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main arm; enclosed in cover
indicated; complying with the following:
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS, GENERAL
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do
not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not
appropriate,provide overhead holders.
B. [Available]Manufacturers:
1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.
2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
3. DORMA Architectural Hardware;Member of The DORMA Group North America.
4. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
5. Glynn Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
6. Hager Companies.
7. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
8. Rixson Specialty Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
9. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
10. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
11. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
2.10 DOOR GASKETING, GENERAL
A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. Listed under Category J in BHMA's"Certified Product Directory."
2.11 THRESHOLDS,GENERAL
A. Standard: BHMA.A156.21. Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with 521 CMR Regulations of the Massachusetts Architectural Access
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712-9
d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
C. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
f. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMAA156.5, Grade [1] [21; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish;
containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders,key-gathering
envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of [150] <Insert number>
percent of the number of locks.
1. Multiple-Drawer Cabinet: Cabinet with drawers equipped with key-holding panels and key
envelope storage, and progressive-type ball-bearing suspension slides. Include single
cylinder lock to lock all drawers.
2. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding
panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.
3. Portable Cabinet Tray for mounting in file cabinet, equipped with key-holding panels,
envelopes, and cross-index system.
2.7 CLOSERS, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are
indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with 521 CMR, Regulations of the
Massachusetts Architectural Access Board the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)."
1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to
door.
b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf(22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
C. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not
require more than 30 lbf(133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf(67 N) to open
door to minimum required width.
C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer
device with fire alarm system.
D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located
on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. '
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712-8
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: Listed under Category A in BHMA's"Certified Product Directory."
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
2. Bommer Industries, Inc.
3. Hager Companies.
4. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
5. PBB, Inc.
6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
D. Antifriction-Bearing, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMAA156.1, heavy weight; Grade 1, with 4
ball bearings;button tips;nonrising removable pins; and base metal as follows:
1. Base Metal: Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze.
2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply
with 521 CMR, Regulations of the Massachusetts Architectural Access Board and the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA),Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities(ADAAG)."
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf(22 N).
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not
require more than 15 lbf(67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
1. Bored Locks: BHMAA156.2.
B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1;Series 4000.
1. Available Manufacturers:
40*1 a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. Best Access Systems; Div.of The Stanley Works.
C. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712-7
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified in Part 2.
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 HINGES, GENERAL
A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches(1524 mm).
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches(1549 to 2286 mm).
3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches(23 11 to 3048 mm).
B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into
wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following:
1. Entrance Doors: Heavyweight hinges.
2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.
3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads.
2. Interior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads.
E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin,prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors.
2. Corners: Square.
F. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and
wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712.6
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
B. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to
provide for proper operation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:
a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as
those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and
door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets"Article.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation,and interface with other building control systems indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712.5
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as
an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services
for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project.
1. Electrified Door Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A qualified Architectural Hardware
Consultant who is experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door
hardware installations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that
are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are
acceptable.
D. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Contractor,
and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware
Consultant and Owner's representative. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final
keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and
plans for future expansion.
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.
4. Address for delivery of keys.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,
and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or
package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712-4
took 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware
item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
6) Explanation of abbreviations,symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7) Mounting locations for door hardware.
8) Door and frame sizes and materials.
9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions
that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to
enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to
enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.
10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and
frame.
d. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of
mow► other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other
information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.
e. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential
Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project
construction schedule. Submit the final door hardware sets after Samples, Product
Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and
similar information has been completed and accepted.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying
diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware, and providing a
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor,Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units
in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712.3
1.4 SUBMITTALS AINON
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of door
hardware indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) plate Samples of each
type of finish required, except primed finish.
D. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.
Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before,
or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets.
1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged
through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of
operation,be incorporated into the Work,within limitations of keying requirements.
E. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer.
1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors
complies with listed fire door assemblies.
F. Qualification Data: For Architectural Hardware Consultant.
O. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks and closers.
H. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include
final hardware and[keying]schedule.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
J. Other Action Submittals: .
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence
and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and
date each page.
b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as
in the Contract Documents.
C. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door
and frame.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712-2
SECTION 08712-DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Other doors to the extent indicated.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part
of hollow-metal frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door
hardware,except cylinders.
1.3 DOOR HARDWARE ALLOWANCE
A- Door Hardware Selection: Carry allowance of $700 per leaf for new door hardware. Such
allowance shall include submittals, keying, consultation with Owner on operation and delivery to
project site.
B. Allowance Bidding: After Architect selects door hardware and issues the door hardware sets,
request bids for products and materials.
C. Allowance Award: Architect will select bid from bids furnished by Contractor. Award purchase
order to bidder selected.
D. Allowance Adjustment: A Change Order will be issued to adjust difference between door
hardware allowance and selected bid from door hardware Installer.
E. Installation: General types and approximate quantities of door hardware are indicated in the list
of door hardware sets to provide a basis for the cost of installation and other Work that is part of
the Contract Sum but not included in door hardware allowance.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
DOOR HARDWARE(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)08712. 1
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,
accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements
specified in"Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact
points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware
and moving parts. Ensure top double-hung sash stays fully in upward position so that all windows
may be locked with one hand. ,.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and
masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other
contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings
and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and
clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
END OF SECTION 08550
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WOOD WINDOWS 08550-4
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. General Standards: Pella Architect Clad Series, or approved equal, with the following options
and features unless otherwise noted:
1. 5/8" clear insulating Low-E glass, with tempered glass at exterior light throughout, and
with tempered glass at both lights where required by Massachusetts State Building Code.
2. Integral clad muntin bars.
3. Full insect screens for all operating windows.
4. Cladding color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full production range.
5. Interior finish: unfinished,for field painting under Division 9 Section"Painting".
6. Provided with manufacturer's Aluminum Wood Subsill.
7. Provided with manufacturer's Standard Frame Expander System.
8. Jamb extensions not required.
9. Hardware color: To be selected by Architect from full production range.
B. Double Hung Windows:
1. Pella Architect Series Clad Double Hung Windows
2. Fixed transom units included where indicated.
C. Awning Windows
1. Pella Architect Series Clad Awning Windows
D. Custom Circle-Head Window
1. Pella Circlehead Windows: Custom fabricated to profile indicated on the Drawings.
Fixed.
2. No Subsill or Frame Expander required.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions;
levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in
components; and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction
debris.
2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at
joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3
inches(76 mm) of opening.
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WOOD WINDOWS 08550-3
D. Samples for Verification: Sample awning and double-hung window. Sample when approved may
be incorporated into the work. For Circle-head window provide 24" long samples of head and sill
profile.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without
field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Failures include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. Failure to meet performance requirements.
2. Structural failures including excessive deflection.
3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation.
4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
6. Insulting glass failure.
B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty Period for Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
-lowN.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WOOD WINDOWS 08550-2
SECTION 08550-WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A- Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following aluminum-clad wood-framed window product types:
1. Double-hung windows.
2. Fixed windows.
3. Decorative non-operative fixed windows.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Work by Owner: Banking and teller equipment, supplied by Owner: Drive-up transaction
window. See Instructions to Bidders.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions
for each type of wood window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
Work,operational clearances, and the following:
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Thermal-break details.
7. Glazing details.
8. Window cleaning provisions.
9. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation and used to determine the following:
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated.
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WOOD WINDOWS 08550. 1
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware
manufacturers'written instructions.
1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer
sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from
the latch measured to the leading door edge.
3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Exterior Doors: Lockset, hinges,closer, threshold, door bottom,weatherstripping, push/pull
Interior Doors: Hinges, Closer,push/pull.
END OF SECTION 08411
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411- 13
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades,without warp
or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing."
1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes,but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and
according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof
joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure.
2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware
manufacturers'written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation.
J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3
mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line,limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch(1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1132 inch (0.8
111111).
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch (3
111111).
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411- 12
C. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fuuoropolymer): AAC12C40R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating:
manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive
primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: Custom color not required. Intent is to match color of window cladding
as closely as possible with production colors.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems: Perform quality-control procedures complying with
ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material qualification
procedures, sealant testing, and system fabrication reviews and checks.
PART 3,EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
Aw, contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMR TUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411. 11
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing(without projecting stops).
E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary
support device (dutchman)to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system, screw-spline
system or head-and-sill-receptor system with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members.
G. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three
silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs
of doors.
H. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip
mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
I. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap
for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411- 10
G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
H. Operating Trim: BHMAA156.6.
1. Closers: With accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use, and adjustable to meet field conditions
and requirements for opening force.
1. Standard: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
J. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated,with integral rubber bumper and hold-open.
K. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287,
molded PVC.
2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon.
fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
L. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.
M. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
N. Thresholds: Raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height
of 1/2 inch(13 mm).
1. Standard: BHMA A156.21.
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as. specified in
Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPGPaint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos,formulated for 30-mil(0.762-mm)thickness per coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
k finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-9
2.6 DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated.
1. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbs.
b. Exterior Doors: Not more than 15 lbs.
B. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule at
the end of Part 3.
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and hardware manufacturer are
listed in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3 to establish minimum
requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each
type of door hardware.
a. Provide named hardware manufacturer's products.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with standards referenced in
this Article and with requirements for description, quality, type, and function listed in the
Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.
C. Ball-Bearing Butts:
1. Standard: BHMA A156.1,Grade 1,radius corner.
2. Provide nonremovable pins at hinges exposed to outside of door.
3. Provide nonferrous hinges where hinges are exposed to weather.
4. Quantities:
a. For doors with heights up to 87 inches2210 mm,provide 3 hinges per leaf.
b. For doors with heights of greater than 87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to
3048 mm),provide 4 hinges per leaf.
D. Locking Devices, General:
1. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of not
more than 15 lbf(67 N) for not more than 3 seconds.
b. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf(67 N)required to release latch.
E. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
F. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include notation"DO NOT DUPLICATE"to be furnished by Owner.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411.8
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded,
that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to
which sealants will not develop adhesion.
E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for
joint type and as follows:
1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with
system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for
use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in
aluminum-framed systems indicated.
a. Color: Black.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and
O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other system
components with which it comes in contact; and recommended by structural- and
weatherseal-sealant and aluminum-framed system manufacturers for this use.
a. Color: Matching structural sealant.
2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: Manufacturers standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-
(3.2-mm,) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum
members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width, as indicated.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255
mm)above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled or Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
04018,Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-7
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASSTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded,
aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal
conductance High-performance plastic connectors separate framing members exposed to
the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturers standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements,wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system, fabricated from stainless steel.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer
for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing."
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-6
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems
by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems
without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements
or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including,but not limited to,excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
C. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f. Failure of operating components to function properly.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
B. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the named product or a comparable product by
one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer.
3. Tubelite Inc.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-5
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems.
H. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of
this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including
Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units
in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests
performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.
a. Include structural-sealant-glazing quality-control program development and reporting
complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to,
system material qualification procedures, preconstruction sealant-testing program,
and procedures and intervals for system fabrication and installation reviews and
checks.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements,alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to
sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with 521 CMR, Regulations of the Massachusetts Architectural
Access Board and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG)."
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--
Aluminum."
E. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for
Structural Sealant Glazing."
F. Structural-Sealant joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.
AMW**.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUMTRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-4
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
H. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested
according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
I. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure,but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
K. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and
framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq.
m x K)when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.
3. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions,quantities, and locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Preconstruction Sealant Test Reports: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, compatibility and
adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates
and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants. Include
sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results for sealant performance and
to"* recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-3
d. Glazing-to-glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
h. Failure of operating units to function properly.
B. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-
framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. Provide sealant. that fails cohesively
before sealant releases from substrate when tested for adhesive compatibility with each substrate
and joint condition required.
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant
material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate
from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal
strength.
C. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural-sealant joints of
less than 20 psi(138 kPa).
D. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As specified in the Massachusetts State Building Code.
2. Seismic Loads: As specified in the Massachusetts State Building Code.
E. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than
13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing
lites to 3/4 inch(19 mm),whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch(3.2 mm),
whichever is smaller.
F. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330
as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change(range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss. AVON
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUMTRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-2
SECTION 08411-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed manual-swing doors and frames.
a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides or by structural sealant at
vertical edges and mechanically with gaskets at horizontal edges.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation" for insulation materials field installed with
aluminum-framed systems.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this
Section.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this
Section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411. 1
3.2 INSTALLATION ,.M%k
A. Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth.
B. Hardware: For installation,see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality
standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
D. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire.
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3-1/2 degrees)on lock edge; trim stiles and rails
only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08212
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212.6
F. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and
quality of construction.
G. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent preservative to
comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal
flashing.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A_ Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop apply stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and
first coat of finish specified in Division 9 Section"Painting"to faces and edges of doors, including
mortises and cutouts.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. Finish
faces and edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts.
B. Finish wood doors at factory.
C. Finish wood doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish wood
doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
D. Finish wood doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.
E. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect,
and sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Filled finish.
5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and substrates,with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and
rail doors will be installed.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type,size,location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
Aok
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-5
3. Panel Designs: Drawings indicate panel designs. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects,
as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are
proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
B. Door Construction for Transparent Finish:
1. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or veneered, edge-
glued, finger-jointed clear lumber. Select veneers for similarity of grain and color, and
arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces.
2. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered,wood based panel product.
C. Interior Doors:
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Flat-Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch(13 mm).
4. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick or laminated
glass made from 2 lites of 3.0-mm-thick annealed glass complying with Division 8 Section
"Glazing."
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and
bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch(10 mm)from bottom
of door to top of threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules,door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W
Series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
D. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying
with Division 8 Section"Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing
sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood stops.
E. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side "
removable.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212.4
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards unless more stringent
requirements are specified.
1. Assemble interior doors, frames including components, with either dry-use or wet-use
adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints
other than finger joints.
B. Low-Emitting Materials:
1. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain
urea-formaldehyde resins.
C. Panel Products: Any of the following:
1. Particleboard made from wood particles,with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde
resin,complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber,with binder containing no urea-
formaldehyde resin,complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
3. Medium-density fiberboard made from agricultural waste fiber, complying with
ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4. Hardboard,complying with AHA A135.4.
5. Veneer core plywood,made with adhesive containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction, General:
1. Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Premium.
2. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Cherry, as specified in Division 6 Section
"Finish Carpentry".
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-3
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE '""k
A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors of special design and construction from
same fabricator as work in Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork."
C. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6,
"Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," unless more stringent requirements are
specified.
1. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with
WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable.
D. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's
"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project
indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed,wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials
or workmanship, and have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 4Zby-
84-inch(1067-by-2134-mm)section.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Interior Doors: Five years.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212.2
SECTION 08212,STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior stile and rail wood doors.
2. Factory finishing stile and rail wood doors.
3. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork"for wood door frames.
2. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry" for specification of wood species&grade.
3. Division 8 Section"Glazing"for glass vision panels in stile and rail wood doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing.
1. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and
moldings(sticking); and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250
mm),with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of
veneer and solid lumber required..
E. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
` Florence,Massachusetts
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212- 1
` B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-5
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with .
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W
series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation,see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturers written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Job Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire.
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees)at lock and hinge edges.
D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section"Painting."
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-4
1. Southwood Door Co.
m. Vancouver Door Company, Inc.
n. VT Industries Inc.
o. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION,GENERAL
A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
B. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom(Grade A faces).
2. Species and Cut: White birch, rotary cut.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
5. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room
or area of building.
6. Stiles: Same species as faces or a compatible species.
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
2. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.
B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
1. Core: .Particleboard.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated,with the following uniform clearances and
bevels,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. ..,
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed,wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the
remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A- Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials
or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42;Iiy-84-
inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers
exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch(0.25 mm in a 75-mm)span.
1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Ampco Products, Inc.
C. Buell Door Company.
d. Chappell Door Co.
e. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division.
f. Haley Brothers, Inc.
g. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.
h. IPIK Door Company.
i. Lambton Doors.
j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
k. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211.2
SECTION 08211-FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood veneer faces, unfinished,for field-applied transparent finish.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Sections "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames for stile and
rail doors..
2. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors &Frames" for hollow metal frames to receive doors under
this Section.
3. Division 8.Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A- Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1 A,"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
,,, A_ Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
lo
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 1
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
C. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch(3 mm)plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch(9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch(19 mm).
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace '
defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
B. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
D. Galvannealed Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08111
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111.8
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch(1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard
steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with
Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors and other openings, of size and
profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
b. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
C. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and
plaster containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry
Assemblies."
5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111.7
2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces
are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the
organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas,
and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPGSP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove
dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust,
if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPGSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPG
SP 6/NACE No. 3,"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm).
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer '
complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer
for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and
providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard
steel doors and frames.
1. Examine roughing4n for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
standard steel frame connections before frame installation.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.
B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard AO%k
steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-6
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in
concrete or masonry.
4. Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches(1524 mm) in height.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 mm) in height.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches(2286 to 3048 mm) in height.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 120 inches(3048 mm) in height.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (15 24 nun) in height.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches(1524 to 2286 mm) in height.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches(2286 to 2438 mm) in height.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2438 mm) in height.
5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare standard steel doors and frames to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to
the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSVDHI Al 15 Series
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated
on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-5
2. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply
with exterior frame requirements.
1. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions.
2. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply
with the following minimum sizes:
1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches
(152 mm)longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Lock Face, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch(1.7 mm) thick.
3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm)thick.
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
F. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,not less
than 0.042 inch(1.0 mm)thick,with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
(50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5
mm)thick.
2. Compression Type for Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
G. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors,with two holes to receive fasteners.
H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or
buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness
of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper
assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before
shipment.
B. Standard Steel Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
C. Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as
frames.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111.4
2.2 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors complying
with ANSI A250.8.
a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance
value(R value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu (0.704 K x sq. nV W)when
tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1) Locations: Exterior doors.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge.
a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches(3 mm in 50 mm).
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying
with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, (Standard Duty),Model 1 (Full Flush).
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets
to comply with the following minimum sizes:
L Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6 inches
(152 mm)longer than hinge,secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm)
thick.
3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch(1.7 mm)thick.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-3
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to
jambs and mullions.
C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads
up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using
nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-
inch(6-mm)space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40(ZF120)zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating designation.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B
coating; mill phosphatized.
E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
G. Grout: Comply with Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies."
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPCPaint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-2
SECTION 08111-STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standard hollow-metal steel doors.
2. Standard hollow-metal steel frames.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for building anchors into and grouting
standard steel frames in masonry construction.
2. Division 8 Sections for door hardware for standard steel doors.
3. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting standard steel doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of standard steel doors
and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles.
3. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
4. Details of each different wall opening condition.
5. Details of anchorages,accessories,joints, and connections.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111. 1
3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE ,
A. Type l: Exterior joints at perimeter of window and door frames, and all other penetrations
through exterior walls.
B. Type 2: Exterior joints in concrete paving.
C. Type 3: For general use in building interior, for joints between trim and adjoining walls, and
similar interior locations.
D. Type 4: For interior use at porcelain plumbing fixtures and other locations subject to moisture
and mildew.
E. Acoustic Sealant: At all perimeter joints and penetrations through walls and partitions
designated for acoustic treatment on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION 07920
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-8
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist,puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins,tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant
with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-7
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil,grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after
cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates,where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) O
(open-cell material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin)or any of the preceding types, as
approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive
tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
010k B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturers written instructions and the following requirements:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920.5
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. General Use Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type,grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Type 1: Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Product:
a. DyMonic, by Tremco., or approved equal by Bostik Findley, Polymeric Systems,
Schnee-Morehead or Sika Corp.
C. Type 2: Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant(ES-<#>):
1. Products:
a. THG901,by Tremco, or approved equal by Bostik Findley, Pacific Polymers, Pecora
Corporation, Polymeric Sytems or Schnee-Morehead.
D. Type 3: Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834,Type P, Grade NF.
1. Products:
a. Bostik Findley, Chem-Calk 600.
b. Pecora Corporation;ACeM+. .",
C. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
d. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
e. Tremco;Tremflex 834.
E. Type 4: Silicone Sealant: Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Products:
a. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700, or approved equal by Dow Corning or Tremco.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable,nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
2. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation;AG20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920.4
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants,which are specified by reference to this Section.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint,
sealant manufacturer[or are below 40 deg F(5 deg C)].
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920.3
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for sealants used in
such entrances and storefronts.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
4. Division 9 Section"Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints.
5. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of
acoustical ceilings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
Amok
D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for"Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"Article
from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month
period preceding the commencement of the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
D. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution:
A.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920.2
SECTION 07920,JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section: [following applications:]
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
C. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and
louvers.
C. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
f. Joints between exposed woodwork and adjoining walls.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint
fillers and gaskets.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
JOINT SEALANTS 07920. 1
` D. Replace manufactured roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07710
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710.7
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof specialties for waterproof performance.
C. Install manufactured roof specialties plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs
in alignment, excessive oil-canning,buckling, or tool marks.
D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed manufactured roof specialties.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no unplanned joints within 18
inches (450 mm) of corners or intersections.
F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will
penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19
mm) for wood screws.
G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roofing specialties.
3.3 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A- General: Install gutters and downspouts to produce a complete roof drainage system according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation, of roof. perimeter flashing with
installation of roof drainage system and subgrade drainage system.
B. Gutters: join and seal gutter lengths. Attach gutters to firmly anchored straps spaced not more
than 36 inches(900 mm)apart. Slope gutters to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet (15.2
m) apart. Install expansion joint caps.
2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for
cleaning gutters.
C. Downspouts: join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch(25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and
bottom and at approximately 60 inches(1.500 mm)o.c. in between.
1. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as manufactured roof specialties are
installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing, as well as leaves and other natural
debris. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710.6
2.6 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for manufactured roof
specialties.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. General• Install manufactured roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified in
performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems.
1. Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of galvanized steel manufactured roof specialties with bituminous
coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of manufactured roof
specialties directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment
and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710-5
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of
sheet metal.
C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with
release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone polymer
sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing
and trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPGPaint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 31b/1.00 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).
2.5 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from same
manufacturer as raised-seam metal roofing, specified in another Division 7 Section, "Sheet Metal
Roofing", or products compatible with metal roofing materials and distributed by said
manufacturer.
B. Gutters and Downspouts: Manufactured formed gutter in uniform section lengths not exceeding
12 feet (3.6 in), with mitered and welded or soldered corner units, end caps, outlet tubes, and
other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch(25 mm) above front gutter rim. Furnish with
flat-stock gutter straps and gutter support brackets and expansion joints and expansion joint
covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.
1. Fabricate gutter from the following exposed metal:
a. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: 0.034 inch(0.85 mm) thick.
2. Gutter Style: G according to SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
3. Gutter Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame Bronze wire
ball downspout strainer.
4. Downspouts: Rectangular closed-face with mitered elbows, manufactured from the
following exposed metal. Furnish wall brackets, from same material and finish as
downspouts,with anchors.
a. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: 0.034 inch(0.85 mm) thick. Aomlh,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710.4
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from same
manufacturer as raised-seam metal roofing, specified in another Division 7 Section, "Sheet
Metal Roofing".
2.2 EXPOSED METALS
A. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation,
structural quality, and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A
755/A 755M.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions.
a. Fluoropolymer 3-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system
consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and
clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a minimum total
dry film thickness of 1.5 mil (0.038 mm); complying with physical properties and
coating performance requirements of AAM .2605,except as modified below:
1) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.
2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.
3. Color: To be selected by Architect from full production range. Architect may select color
different from roofing color or may require that drainage system color match roofing color.
2.3 CONCEALED METALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
structural quality.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710.3
1. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring manufactured roof specialties ,
including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
2. Details for expansion and contraction.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of manufactured roof specialty indicated with factory-
applied color finishes.
D. Fabrication Samples: For roof edge drainage systems made from 12 1inch(300-mm) lengths of full-
size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment,and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to
sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing,field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of manufactured roof specialties with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof,secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace manufactured roof specialties that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes,but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214,
C. Cracking, checking,peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710-2
SECTION 07710-MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following manufactured roof specialties:
1. Roof edge drainage systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Storm Drainage" for subgrade system receiving roof runoff.
2. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood roof framing.
3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for plywood substrate.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Manufacture and install manufactured roof specialties to resist thermally induced
movement and exposure to weather without failing,rattling, leaking,and fastener disengagement.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide manufactured roof specialties that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
C. Water Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof specialties that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including plans and elevations.
Identify factory-vs. field-assembled work. Include the following:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710- 1
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes,Warranty shall be null and void
until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations
affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said
alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before
starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for
claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably
justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.
S. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for,but was
not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin,
or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become
null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work
covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate
to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to
requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract
directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owners General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this (Insert day)day of(Insert
month), (Insert year).
1. Authorized Signature: (Insert signature.)
2. Name: (Insert name.)
3. Title: (Insert title.)
END OF SECTION 07610
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610.13
removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
C. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish
touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.9 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS (insert name of installer) of ( insert company name), herein
called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the
following project:
1. Owner: (Insert name of Owner)
2. Address: (Insert address.)
3. Building Name/Type: (Insert information.)
4. Address: (Insert address.)
S. Area of Work: (Insert information.)
6. Acceptance Date: (Insert date.)
7. Warranty Period: (Insert time.)
8. Expiration Date: (Insert date.)
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective
work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents,caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 60 mph(m/sec);
C. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment
supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610- 12
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form
hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and
weather-resistant performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches
(600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form
expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch(25 mm) deep, filled
with mastic sealant(concealed within joints).
C. Bar-Type Snow Guards: Attach bar supports to vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal roofing
with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate sheet metal roofing.
1. Provide snow guards, at locations indicated on Drawings. Provide number of rows and
spacing as recommended by Manufacturer to hold snow on roof required by snow zone.
D. Stop-Type Snow Guards: Attach snow guards to sheet metal roofing with adhesive, sealant, or
adhesive tape, as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate sheet
metal roofing.
1. Provide snow guards and at spacing and locations indicated on Drawings with each snow
guard centered between sheet metal roofing ribs.
E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal
to sheet metal roofing as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Roof Penetrations for Ventialtion: Provide weathertight curbs and flashing as required to
accommodate ventilation penetrations in Division 15 Section, "Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning".
3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch
in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/84nch (3-mm)
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as sheet metal roofing is
installed. On completion of sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces, including
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610. 11
D. Fascia: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping ,-.%,
screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along
lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
3.5 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form
exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering
temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,
welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two fasteners to
prevent rotation.
2. Nail cleats not more than 12 inches(300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over nails.
B. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Provide low-slope transverse
seams using cleats where backup of moisture may occur.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than
1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate,between 40 and 70 deg F(4 and 21 deg C),
set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg Q.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint
Sealants."
C. Provide expansion cleats in roof panels that exceed 30 feet(9.1 m) in length.
D. Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal pans to substrate with cleats, double-
nailed
at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. Install pans reaching from eave to ridge before moving to adjacent
pans. Lock each pan to pan below with transverse seam. Before pans are locked, apply
continuous bead of sealant to top flange of lower pan. Crimp standing seams by folding over
twice so cleat and pan edges are completely engaged.
1. Loose-lock pans at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges on back edges of gutters.
2. Leave seams upright after crimping at ridges and hips.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610. 10
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on
roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Apply primer if required by underlayment
manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for
installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply
over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150
mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3.1/2
inches(90 mm).Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing sheet metal roofing.
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install sheet metal roofing perpendicular to purlins or supports. Anchor sheet metal
roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as
recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of sheet metal roofing and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill roofing.
3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures at eaves,rakes, and at perimeter of
all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install ridge and hip caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds.
6. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the
material.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will not penetrate completely through substrate.
1. Steel Roofing: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
C. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
04018,Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610.9
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for
application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, sheet metal roofing supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles,
channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed.
2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
3. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored, and that provision has been made for flashings, and penetrations through sheet
metal roofing.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before sheet metal
roofing installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610.8
4) Snow Management Systems, a division of Contek, Inc.;Vermont Snowguard.
D. Pipe Flashing: Premolded,EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions (pan width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of
installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest extent
possible.
1. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam pans with finished seam height of 1 inch(25
mm).
B. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels to comply with details shown and roll.
formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent
leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates
without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, and
with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
�' 1. Lay out sheet metal roofing so cross seams, when required, are made in direction of flow
with higher pans overlapping lower pans. Stagger cross seams.
2. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop.
3. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral
flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage
arrangements shown and as required for leakproof construction.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with sealant(concealed within joints).
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce
weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
F. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,buckling, and
tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to
form hems.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610-7
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Roofing Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal
roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, comer units, ridge closures, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal
roofing, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as sheet metal
roofing.
2. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from the following material:
3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
4. Closures: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed,
cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and
trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include,
but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent sheet metal roofing.
C. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating
sheet metal roofing, and complete with predrilled holes,clamps, or hooks for anchoring. Provide
both specified types, as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Surface-Mounted, Plastic, Stop-Type Snow Guards: Clear polycarbonate stops designed for
attachment to pan surface of sheet metal roofing using construction adhesive, silicone or
polyurethane sealant, or adhesive tape.
a. Available Products:
1) Berger Bros. Co.; CL Snow Guards.
2) Polar Blox; Polar Blox.
3) Sno-Gem, Inc.; SNO-GEM.
4) Snojax Inc.; SNOJAX.
2. Seam-Mounted, Bar-Type Snow Guards: Aluminum or stainless-steel rods or bars held in
place by stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal roofing.
a. Aluminum Finish: Mill.
b. Stainless-Steel Finish: Mill.
C. Available Products:
1) Alpine Snow Guards, Div. of Vermont Slate &Copper Services, Inc.; Model
No. 05-98.
2) LMCurbs; S-5! SnoFence. ,.,,,,,�
3) Riddell&Company, Inc.;Snobar.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610-6
''' a) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours.
b) Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours.
2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum,
consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-
modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F(116 deg C);ASTM D 1970.
2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C);
ASTM D 1970.
3. Available Products:
a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start"HR"
High Performance Roofing Underaayment.
b. Grace,W. R. &Co.;Vycor Ultra.
C. Henry Company; Perma-Seal PE.
d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing,LLC;MetShield.
e. TC MiraDRI;WIP 300HT.
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper,minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.24 kg/sq. m),rosin sized.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and
as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed
to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing by means of plastic caps
or factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer
head.
C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints in sheet metal roofing that will remain weathertight and
as recommended by roll-formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer for installation indicated.
D. Expansion Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints,which must be free to move, provide
nonsetting, nonhardening,nonmigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610-5
1.9 ICE-DAM PROTECTION
A. Design system with sealed seams, membrane underlayment and any and all other materials and
components necessary to ensure against leakage due to ice damming.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products specified.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified:
a. Alcoa Cladding Systems
b. McElroy Metal
C. MBCI Roof and Wall Systems
d. Industrial Building Panels, Inc.
e. Flexospan
f. Centria
g. Berridge Manufacturing Co.
h. Atas International, Inc.
2.2 ROOFING SHEET METALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-
dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) .Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
3. Thickness: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings:
a. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions.
1) Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties
and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified
below:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610-4
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Store sheet metal roofing materials to ensure dryness. Do not store sheet metal roofing
materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
D. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal roofing installation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are
specified in Division 15 Sections "Plumbing" and"Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning".
B. Coordinate installation of gutters and leaders, which are specified in Division 7 Section
"Manufactured Roof Specialties".
C. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of
sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
row A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied
finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes,but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
C. Cracking, checking,peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section,
signed by Roofing Installer, in which Roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of
custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to, the following:
a. Wrinkling or buckling.
b. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage.
C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering, including nonuniformity of color or finish.
d. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials.
e. Failure of snow guards
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610.3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal roofing, including plans,
elevations, and keyed references to termination points. Distinguish between shop- and field-
assembled work. Include the following:
1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions.
2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of fasteners, clips,
and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.
5. Details of roof penetrations, including plumbing vent penetrations and curbs and flashing
for HVAC penetrations.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
9. Details of the following accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12
inches (1:10):
a. Snow guards.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal roofing indicated with factory-applied "
color finishes.
D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of sheet metal roofing.
B. Custom-Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled
workers who custom-fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to that required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNAs "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal roofing pans, components, and other sheet metal roofing materials so as not
to be damaged or deformed. Package sheet metal roofing materials for protection during
transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect sheet metal roofing materials in a manner to prevent bending, warping, '"ft'
twisting, and surface damage.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610.2
SECTION 07610-SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing:
1. Standing-seam metal roofing.
2. Snow Guards
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section"Manufactured Roof Specialties" for gutters and leaders.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide complete sheet metal roofing system, including, but not limited to, custom-
fabricated metal roof pans, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing and drainage
components related to sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories as
indicated and as required for a weathertight installation.
B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing sheet
metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance.
1. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of sheet metal
roofing work.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation
and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal roofing thermal movements. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky
heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal roofing that does not allow water infiltration to building
interior, with metal flashing and connections of sheet metal roofing lapped to allow moisture to
run over and off the material.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610- 1
E. Fill voids surrounding perimeter of exterior window and door frames with foamed in place AON%,
insulation.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten
vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings;
and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(400 mm) o.c.
C. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including
runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping
joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's
written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing
members or other solid substrates.
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor
retarder.
F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately
after installation.
3.8 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Provide the following or as indicated on the Drawings,whichever is the more stringent:
1. Exterior Walls: Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, R 13
2. Attic: Loose-Fill Insulation, min. 12" thick
3. Under Slabs and inside foundation walls: Foam Plastic Board Insulation, 2" thick.
END OF SECTION 07210
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BUILDING INSULATION 07210.6
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate
location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to
produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below
exterior grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying
protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection course with joints butted.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges
of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BUILDING INSULATION 07210.5
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws;with fender washers.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type 1, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers
for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.
B. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: Urethane-based foamed place insulation, minimal-expanding type,
intended for installation at perimeter of window and door frames.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice,rain, and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
'amok
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BUILDING INSULATION 07210.4
b. Dow Chemical Company.
C. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products Division.
2. Type VII, 2.20 lb/cu.ft. (35 kg/cu. m).
2:3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers;with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and
50,respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in
batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
1. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75
deg F(23 K x sq. m/XX7 at 24 deg Q.
2. 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75
deg F(3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg Q.
2.4 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION
A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance,
processing, and handling characteristics.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film
laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or
polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb/1000 sq. ft. (10 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum
permeance rating of 0.1317 perm (7.56 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) and with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively.
1. Available Products:
a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA SKRIM 2FR.
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BUILDING INSULATION 07210.3
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,respectively:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Perimeter wall insulation(supporting backfill).
3. Batt wall insulation
4. Loose-fill building insulation.
5. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies
of insulation specified by referencing this Section.
2. Division 15 Sections "Plumbing" and "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning":
Insulation of mechanical systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass
fibers;produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths)or rolls.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency for insulation products.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BUILDING INSULATION 07210. 1
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work,refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at -OWA
cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 14nch (25-mm) penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws
through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches,and clean entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and
to walls with adhesive.
4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects;where not possible to repair,replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 10
low
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
D. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to
open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
a. Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.
OOPI* 5. Sheen: Satin, 31.45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in,Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
A"'* level and plumb (including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm).
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-9
G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following
categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish.
2.9 WOOD COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Type of Top: 3/4"veneer plywood, edge banded as indicated on the Drawings. Species and cut as
follows: Cherry, as specified in Division 6 Section: "Finish Carpentry".
C. Type of Top: Panel product for transparent finish(wood veneer laminated over core)as follows:
D. Wood Species and Cut: Cherry, as specified in Division 6 Section: "Finish Carpentry".
1. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Random match.
2. Edge Treatment: Solid wood matching face for species and cut, as indicated.
3. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
2.10 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish.
b. Patterns, matte finish.
D. Edge Treatment: Cherry edge in public areas, same as laminate surface in non-public areas..
E. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
F. Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop
substrate.
2.11 SHOP FINISHING
A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. .. ,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-8
"* 1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood
(except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain
and color of veneered panels.
C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Random match.
D. Panel-Matching Method: No matching between panels is required. Select and arrange panels for
similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels.
E. Retain paragraph above for Economy grade; retain paragraph below for Custom or Premium
grade.
2.7 GRANITE COUNTERTOPS
A. Allowance: See Part 1 above for allowance for this product.
B. Fabricator: Santo DeSpirt,Agawam,MA, or approved equal.
2.8 PLASTIGLAMINATE CABINETS
A. Grade: Economy.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame.
C. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch(13 mm).
D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the
following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL.
2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
3. Edges: Grade VGS.
E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color,
pattern, and finish.
b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
F. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402.7
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood low
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm)
Thick or Less: 1/16 inch(1.5 mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
mm).
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be
complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of
assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling
for shipment. ANWA
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
2.5 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Cherry, as specified in Division 6 Section: "Finish Carpentry".
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
2.6 FLUSH WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Cherry, as specified in Division 6 Section: "Finish Carpentry"
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6
D. Catches: Magnetic catches,BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9,B04071;with shelf rests, B04081.
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade IHD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24
inches (600 mm)wide.
H. Grommets ("Escutcheon") for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black,
molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide " SG series" by Doug Mockett
&Company, Inc.
I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base;BHMA 652 for steel base.
J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion
sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5
B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in AO
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products) " to fabricator of
architectural woodwork, coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Cherry, as specified in Division 6 Section "Finish
Carpentry".
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: As specified in Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry"
D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative
laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Lamin-Art, Inc.
C. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products.Div.
d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,
except for items specified in Division 8 Section " Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing
Products)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMAA156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
opening, self-
closing.
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2 11/2 inches (63.5 mm) deep,
and 5/16 inch(8 mm) in diameter.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4
' 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service
performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels indicating that woodwork complies with
requirements of grades specified.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions"Article.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402.3
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap dispensers
and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
5. Apply AWI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.
2. Plastic laminates.
3. PVC edge material.
4. Granite countertop
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in. (300 sq.cm), for each species
and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250
mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face veneer seam and finish as
specified.
3. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish,with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to
1 edge.
4. Granite countertop,with specified edge profile, 12"x 24".
5. Corner pieces as follows:
a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18
inches(450 mm)high by 18 inches(450 mm)wide by 6 inches (150 mm)deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
6. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
G. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
Amok
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402.2
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate cabinets.
3. Plastic-laminate countertops.
4. Granite countertops.
5. Interior wood door frames
6. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Granite Countertops: Carry allowance of$50/sq. ft. for granite countertops . Allowance shall
cover materials,submittals, fabrication,packaging,shipping and delivery.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For lumber products, panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive
for bonding plastic laminate cabinet hardware and accessories and.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402. 1
D. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. *'da
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06200
ANk
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-6
w B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch(1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and
miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across
joints,where necessary for alignment.
1. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
2. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
3. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. Hardipanel Siding: Install hardboard siding complying with Manufacturer's "Recommended
Basic Application Instructions." Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Leave 3/16-
inch (5-mm) gap at perimeter and openings, unless otherwise recommended by panel
manufacturer.
1. Seal butt joints at inside and outside comers and at trim locations.
2. Install continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints with 3/16-inch (5-mm)
expansion gap.
3. Apply battens and corner trim as indicated.
4. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by countersinking and filling, by placing in
grooves of siding pattern, or by concealing with applied trim or battens as detailed.
5. Countersink exposed fasteners and fill with sealant.
B. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding
manufacturer.
C. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-5
D. Shelving: 12"x 3/a" cabinet birch plywood, edge banded in 1/z"x 3/a"poplar, shop primed for field
opaque painting, mounted on dual-lug heavy-duty shelf standards and brackets, white-painted, at
max 32" o.c.
E. Shelf and Pole for Coat Closet: One shelf as specified above, mounted on heavy-duty wrought
steel white-painted shelf-pole brackets, max. 32" o.c.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished
work:
1. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches(125 mm).
C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch(25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/1&inch(1.5-mm)radius
and edges of lumber 1 inch(2 5 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/&inch(3-mm)radius.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to
required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section"Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes, or patterns.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200.4
1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole,
ponderosa, or sugar pine.
a. Bed-Mold Pattern: VIM 72 (Brosco 8018), 9/16 by 2-1/4 inches (14 by 56 mm),
field primed all four sides and field finished under Division 9.
B. Fiber-cement planks for exterior fascias,rakes, casings and other exterior trim: Harditrim Planks,
by James Hardie Siding Products, shop primed in manufacturer's `PrimePlus" system, for field
painting under Division 9. Sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Texture: Smooth.
2.4 EXTERIOR SIDING&SOFFIT PANELS
A. Fiber-cement soffits and paneling: 5/16" Vertical Siding Panels, by James Hardie Siding
Products, field cut from 4'-8', 4'x9' or 4'x10' panels to avoid any exposed joints, to panel sizes
indicated, shop primed in manufacturer's `PrimePlus" system,for field painting under Division 9.
Texture: Smooth.
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger jointed or solid
lumber, of the following species and grades:
1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,
sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar;NHLA.
O
B. Hardwood Lumber Moldings &Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Grade A
finish, kiln-dried cherry, finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color. Match
hardwood used in Division 6 Section `Interior Architectural Woodwork' and in Division 8
Section: "Stile and Rail Wood Doors".
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in
sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer:
1. Stainless steel.
2. Hot-dip galvanized steel.
B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
where possible.
C. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for materials required
for sealing siding work.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 404WA;
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood,
and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary
coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during
the remainder of the construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and
warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by:
1. Fiber Cement Trim and Siding Panels: James Hardie Building Products, no substitutions.
2. Shaped Moldings: Brosco or Copper Beech
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards'Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp
and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA VIM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln.
dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200.2
SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior siding.
2. Exterior fascias, rakes,soffits, casings and other exterior trim.
3. Interior window jamb extensions, window trim, and other standing and running trim for
field-painted finish.
4. Closet and Utility Shelving
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring,blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior
woodwork,wood wainscoting&wood door frames.
3. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for shop-fabricated interior wood stile and
rail doors.
4. Division 8 Section: "Wood Windows" for windows to receive jamb extensions and trim
under this Section.
5. Division 9 Section"Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200. 1
I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are -**%,
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
K. Do not cut or remove truss members.
L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in field.
3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply
primer,when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating.
1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 06176
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176.6
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20,with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc
dust by weight.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details
required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1.
Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously
in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising
care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E. Install trusses plumb,square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.
G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METALPL-ATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-5
2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-
alloy steel Type A(HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60
(Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch(0.9 mm) thick.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER 272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 56')M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers.
2.4 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES
A. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60(Z180)coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
C. Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches (38
mm)wide by 0.050 inch(1.3 mm)thick.
D. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)wide by 1 inch (25 mm)
deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit between 2 adjacent trusses and accurately space
them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METALPLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-4
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and
Recommendations for Handling, Installing&Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
1. Store trusses flat, off of ground,and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending.
2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and
replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying
progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. 'If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S.
3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Grade and Species: For truss chord and web members, provide dimension lumber of any species,
graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding
allowable design values according to AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction" and its"Supplement."
C. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members,
graded as follows and of the following minimum design values for size of member required
according to AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its
"Supplement":
1. Grading Method: Visual or mechanical.
D. Minimum Chord Size For Roof Trusses: 2 by 6 inches nominal (38 by 140 mm actual) for both
top and bottom chords.
E. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous
lumber in Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry."
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-3
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
licensed to practice in Massachusetts, and bearing his/her professional seal. Show fabrication and
installation details for trusses.
1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss
required.
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss
members due to design loads.
4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal
connector plates.
5. Show splice details and bearing details.
6. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
7. Metal-plate connectors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AWN
A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI
and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single
manufacturer.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:
1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction."
2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses."
3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing& Bracing Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its"Supplement."
AWk
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METALPLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176-2
SECTION 06176-METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood roof trusses.
2. Wood girder trusses.
3. Wood truss bracing.
4. Metal truss accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for roof sheathing and subflooring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected
members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.
B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1
unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METALPLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06176- 1
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with"Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion-or control joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams,edges, fasteners,and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
END OF SECTION 06160
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEATHING 06160.4
'" a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap.
b. DuPont(E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company);Tyvek CommercialWrap.
3. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 125 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per
ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer
for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APAAFG-01 that is
approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives
and panels.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated,complying with the following:
1. NES NER 272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's"International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEATHING 06160.3
B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
D. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm).
2.3 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm).
a. Exception: Curved eyebrow window: Three layers of 1/4" sheathing, glued and
screwed over the radius of the curve. look
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing,provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails,Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
2.5 WEATHER RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; LTV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEATHING 06160-2
SECTION 06160-SHEATHING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof sheathing.
2. Wall sheathing
3. Building Wrap
4. Misc.plywood sheathing used at building interior.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing
according to referenced standards.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Building wrap.
1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SHEATHING 06160. 1
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less than fl-
inch nominal(89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6-
inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in
width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches(1800 to 3000
mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10
to 12 feet(3 to 3.6 m) in width.
3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements
specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to
rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first
joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- (19-by-
184-mm actual-) size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spaced 48
inches (1200 mm)o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists.
B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form
headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers.
Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use
metal ridge hangers.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply
EPA registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA
registered label.
END OF SECTION 06100
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-8
H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the State Building Code"Nailing Schedule."
I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed,pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less
than 14/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for
tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm
actual-)size furring horizontally at 24 inches(610 mm)o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by42 1inch nominal-(19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring
vertically at 16 inches(406 mm) o.c.
3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
(38-mm actual)thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for
non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on
partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-1.40-mm actual-) size wood studs
spaced 24 inches(6 10 mm)o.c.,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
(2438 nun) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same
width as wall or partitions.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180)coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, GD Plugged, in
thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/24nch(13-mm)nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER 272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594,Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade Al or A4).
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
4. KC Metals Products, Inc.
5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100.5
2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Nordic Engineered Wood.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2400 psi (17.9 MPa) for 124nch nominal-
(286-mm actual-)depth members.
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi(12 400 MPa).
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size,provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content of any species. A"k
C. For exposed and concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content
and any of the following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common(Sterling)grade;NeLMA,NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine,No. 2 grade; SPIB.
3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA-
4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA,
NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100.4
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills; sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or
concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry
or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 8 inches (200 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
ell, 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal(38-mm actual)thickness or less, 19
percent for more than 2-inch nominal(38-mm actual)thickness.
B. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir(north);NLGA.
2. Southern pine;SPIB.
3. Mixed southern pine;SPIB.
4. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA.
5. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA.
C. Joists,Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and the following species:
1. Hem-fir(north);NLGA.
2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
4. Spruce-pine-fir;NLGA.
5. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA.
6. Spruce-pine-fir(south);NeLMA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for all engineered lumber products, showing layout and
required construction detailing. Such drawings and details shall be produced by or under the
direct.supervision of a regisetered professional engineer licensed to practice in Massachusetts. If
required by the local building official, such shop drawings shall bear the professional seal of the
engineer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber,with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show
compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified ''"k
independent testing agency.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood blocking and nailers.
4. Wood furring.
5. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
*. 1. Division 6 Section"Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses."
2. Division 6 Section"Sheathing".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal(114 mm actual)in least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100. 1
placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately .•*,
1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.5 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS
A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes where not protected by curbs or other barriers.
Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch(19-mm)bolts
at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches (660 mm) above driving surface.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPCPA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm)dry film thickness.
END OF SECTION 05500
AM**,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500.8
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in"Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"Article.
2. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete or in formed or
coredrilled holes not less than 8 inches (200 mm)deep and 3/4 inch(19 mm) larger than OD of
bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500.7
2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B)and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPGSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices,bolts,welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A- Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6
6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm)
from ends and comers of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
2. Drill girders and plates for field bolted connections where indicated.
3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches
(600 mm)o.c.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two
integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.8 ORNAMENTAL BRACKETS
A. Fabricate brackets from steel shapes and bars as indicated. Provide each unit with exposed
fasteners and concealed mounting brackets.
2.9 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate
welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches(200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch(19
mm)larger than OD of bollard.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500.5
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head(countersunk) screws
or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm),with a minimum '
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500.4
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior
walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade,
and class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat
washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. Wood Screws: Flat head,ASME B 18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round,ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type,ASME B 18.2 1.1 (ASME B 18.21.2M).
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain,without failure, a
load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (Al) stainless-steel bolts
complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPGPaint 20 or SSPGPaint 29 and compatible with
AOW topcoat.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500.3
1. AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum."
3. AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field
measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items
to Project site in time for installation. Alftk
B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified
in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam
marks,roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M, except ASTM A572, grade 50 for wide
flange beams.
B. Rolled-Steel Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M
or ASTM A 283/A 283M,Grade C or D.
_'"►,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
AVW
SECTION 05500,METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction.
2. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction.
3. Metal bollards.
4. Ornamental metal brackets.
5. Miscellaneous clip angles and anchors.
B. Products furnished,but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or
built into unit masonry.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,
wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.
2. Division 4 Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and
other items indicated to be built into unit masonry.
3. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for metal framing anchors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500. 1
3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work,remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches(100 mm) in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry
waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches(450 mm)of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810.17
and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of -AWN,
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar,pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes
20.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 16
fA W. 3.10 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE,AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed
of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in
flashing with adhesive,sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe,
turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into the inner
wythe. Form 1/4-inch(6-mm) hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe.
3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer,
and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under
building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches(100 mm).
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches(150 mm) at ends and turn up not
less than 2 inches (50 mm)to form end dams.
5. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to
form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in
Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
e"k* 6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking
down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches(400 mm)o.c.
4. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after.mortar has set.
5. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install
through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie,
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 15
C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of
type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. vertically and 24
inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally,with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m)
of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: °" *
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side
of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8
inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3.9 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches
(305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without
structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches(200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 14
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch (19 mm) or more in width.
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY
A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as installed in horizontal joints, spaced not to exceed
24 inches(600 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.vertically. Stagger ties in
alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and
space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At
intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece)type ties.
2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units
of other wythe into place.
C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated L-
shaped units as well as masonry bonding.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches(150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.
2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches(305 mm)beyond openings.
OW a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 13
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at comers, jambs, and, where possible, at other
locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running
bond or Flemish bond pattern where indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than
nominal 4-inch(100-mm)horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal
lath,wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers,columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Set precast concrete trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor,
and similar holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 12
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30
g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion
and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3
m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary
from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch(') mm).
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch(3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more
than 1/8 inch(3 mm).
6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by
more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 11
2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view,regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 10
B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross4aminated polyethylene film
to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch(1.0 mm).
a. Products:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.
2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier-44.
3) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace&Co. -Conn.; Perm-A
Barrier Wall Flashing.
4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru--Wall
Flashing.
5) Polyguard Products,Inc.; Polyguard 300.
6) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing polysulfide sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalvsaturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-
inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops
or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
1. Products:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or
D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.;No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
C. Hohmann&Barnard, Inc.;#RB or#RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-9
inch (16 mm) wide by 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) long, stamped into center to provide a
slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.
b. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch-
(6.4-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
3. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured
with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8-mm) diameter by length required
to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic
polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per
ASTM B 117.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated,
fabricated from 0.034-inch(0.9-mm), galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of
dimensions indicated.
D. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or
grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition(mild).
2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or
4) for bolts and nuts;ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276,Type 304 or 316, for anchors.
2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing,where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' and as follows:
1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or HO1, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-
k /sq. in)weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft.
(5-kg/sq. m)weight or 0.0216 inch(0.55 mm) thick elsewhere.
2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet(3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by
extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30
degrees and hemmed.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-8
look I. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
B. Masonry joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch(4.8-mm)diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm)diameter.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet(3 m),with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C. Masonry joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
D. Masonry joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches
(100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in
width.
P
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc
coating.
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through
veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90
degrees and extend 2 inches(50 nun)parallel to face of veneer.
C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood
or metal studs, and as follows:
a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-11)f(445-N)
load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in
excess of 0.05 inch(1.3 mm).
2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal
anchor section.
a. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 6 inches (150
mm) long, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-7
E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and mortar ,
pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
3. Products:
a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
1) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom
Color.
2) Holcim(US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime.
3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond.
4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement.
b. Colored Masonry Cement:
1) Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.
2) Holcim(US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement.
3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Florida Custom Color Masonry or Magnolia
Masonry Cement.
4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.
C. Colored Mortar Cement: '" IN
1) Lafarge North America Inc.;Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement.
F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch(6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 (1.18-mm)sieve.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
1. Products:
a. Addiment Incorporated;Mortar Kick.
b. Euclid Chemical Company(The);Accelguard 80.
C. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W.R. Grace&Co.-Conn.;Morset. ''WI4
d. Sonneborn, Div.of ChemRex;Trimix-NCA.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-6
2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide concrete or masonry lintels at locations indicated on the Drawings, complying
with requirements below.
B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color,
texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support
loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method used for concrete masonry units.
C. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete
masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast
lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.4 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
B. Face Brick: Red Land Brick, Rocky Ridge, #15 Middle Plantation
tom`'' 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 3000 psi(20.7 MPa).
2. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-1/2 inches(89 mm)wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-
1/2 inches(190 mm)long or 3-5/8 inches(92 mm)wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)high by
7-5/8 inches(194 mm)long.
3. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207,Type S.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Products:
a. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
b. Davis Colors;True Tone Mortar Colors.
oow C. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.;SOS Mortar Colors.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-5
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. -on%,
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
days after completing cleaning.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances,will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair
the quality of completed masonry.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS(CMUs)
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi(13.1 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Lightweight, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500 psi(17.3 MPa).
2. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-
5/8 inches(194 mm) long. AM*
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4
workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become
wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover..
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 min) down face next to unconstructed wythe
and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-3
B. Determine net-area compressive strength (f m) of masonry from average net-area compressive •AV*
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Determine net-area compressive strength (fm) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to
ASTM C 1314.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.
2. Colored mortar.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
D. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used
to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm)
long by 48 inches(1200 mm)high by full thickness with precast concrete sample inserted.
2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;relationship
of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810.2
SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2. Concrete brick.
3. Face brick.
4. Mortar and grout.
5. Reinforcing steel.
6. Masonry joint reinforcement.
7. Ties and anchors.
8. Embedded flashing.
9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Site Masonry" for exterior unit masonry not part of building
construction.
C. Products installed,but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Cast-stone trim, furnished under Division 3 Section"Architectural Precast Concrete."
2. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (fm) at 28
days.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810. 1
1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using
stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from
staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed
concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 03450
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank .
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450. 13
Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout
material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without
exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117,Appendix I.
B. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the
following noncumulative erection tolerances:
1. Plumb in Any 10 Feet(3 m) of Element Height: 1/4 inch(6 mm).
2. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Joint Width(Governs over joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm).
4. Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
5. Joint Taper in 10 Feet(3 in): 1/4 inch(6 mm).
6. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch(6 mm).
7. Differential Bowing or Camber, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design:
1/4 inch(6 mm).
8. Opening Height between Spandrels: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves the
right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between
original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20
feet(6 m).
C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780.
D. Wire brush,clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.
E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply
with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete
surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment Aq%
to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450. 12
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural
precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment
as units are being permanently connected.
1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units are
being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush
with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch(19 mm).
C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims,wedges, and spacers as soon as
practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.
D. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding
electrodes, appearance, quality of welds,and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding
or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.
2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet
as specified by AWS.
3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply
a minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces
according to ASTM A 780.
4. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and
reprime damaged painted surfaces.
5. Remove,reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.
E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent
loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding
connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For
friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random
by calibrated torque wrench.
F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place
until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are
W completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450- 11
C. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with AOW*,
ACI 318 (ACI 318M)requirements for concrete strength.
D. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not
comply with ACI 318 (.ACI 318M) requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing
agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine
compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.
1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength,from
locations directed by Architect.
2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.
3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if average
compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive strength
and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
4. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to
Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include the
following:
a. Project identification name and number.
b. Date when tests were performed.
C. Name of precast concrete fabricator.
d. Name of concrete testing agency.
e. Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core
tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks,
corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation
to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.
E. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements,
clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that has no coarse
aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing has
attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel or other structure is
complete.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450- 10
, "` 3. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal
Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 72 inches (3 mm per 1830 mm).
4. Bowing: Plus or minus L/360.
5. Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch per 10 feet(6 mm per 3 m).
6. Warping: 1/16 inch per 12 inches (1.5 mm per 300 mm) of distance from nearest adjacent
corner.
7. Dimensions of Architectural Features and Rustication: Plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm).
C. Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop
Drawings.
1. Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm).
2. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch(13 mm).
3. Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches(75 mm).
4. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Fabric: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) where
position has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus 1/2
inch(13 mm).
5. Location of Rustication Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm).
2.10 FINISHES
A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false
joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast
concrete units to match approved sample panels and as follows:
1. As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets,sand streaks, and honeycombs.
B. Finish exposed top, bottom and back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match
face-surface finish or smooth,steel-trowel finish if not formed.
C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117
requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TM,
"Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute Member Plants."
B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete
fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.
1. Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production
equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing
agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for
additional testing and evaluation.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450.9
I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in
precast concrete units.
1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or
damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or
entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.
1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TT,-6, "Interim
Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute Member Plants."
K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot-and cold-weather concrete placement.
L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will
not show in finished structure.
M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat
or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect
on performance or appearance of final product.
N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements,
including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements
in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.
2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product
tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.
B. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with the following product
tolerances:
1. Overall Height and Width of Units,Measured at the Face Exposed to View: As follows:
a. 10 feet(3 m) or under,plus or minus 1/8 inch(3 mm).
b. 10 to 20 feet(3 to 6 m),plus 1/8 inch(3 mm), minus 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Not Exposed to View: As
follows:
a. 10 feet(3 m) or under,plus or minus 1/4 inch(6 mm).
b. 10 to 20 feet(3 to 6 m), plus 1/4 inch(6 mm), minus 3/8 inch(10 mm).
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450-8
look 2. Edge and Corner Treatment: As detailed.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
or concrete placement.
1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to
AWS Dl.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to
supporting and adjacent construction.
C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings
or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.
E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to
prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum coverage. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while
placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
4. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one
full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining
widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses.
G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 11,7 and requirements in this Section for measuring,
mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete hatching, no additional water may be
added.
H. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of I inch (25 mm)
or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover
specified.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450-7
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit
metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures,
at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to
ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the
following properties:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 5000 psi(34.5 MPa) minimum.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to
PCI MNL 117.
F. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or
field test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to provide
lightweight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 5000 psi(34.5 MPa).
2. Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu.m), plus
or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), according to ASTM C 567.
G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.
H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.7 MOLD FABRICATION
A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due
to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning
operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed.
Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.
B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated,within fabrication tolerances specified.
1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450-6
` D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored
water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength
of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.
F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to
not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of
admixture.
1. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D.
2. High-Range,Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type G.
3. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017 M.
2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).
C. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel
washers,ASTM F 436(ASTM F 436M).
D. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items,steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for
galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1. For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less
than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5
times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.
2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less
than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPG
Paint 20.
E. ShopTrimed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be
embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPGSP 3 and shop-apply lead- and
chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79
according to SSPGPA L
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories required
to install architectural precast concrete units.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450-5
PART 2,PRODUCTS .00%,
2.1 MOLD MATERIALS
A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will
provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated;
nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond with,
stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or
joint treatments of precast concrete.
B. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly
placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed.
B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60
(Grade 420), deformed bars, assembled with clips.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from steel wire into flat ,a,
sheets.
D. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place according to PCI MNL 117.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same
type,brand, and mill source.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse
aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed
finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
1. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as
coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C. Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117,ASTM C 330,with absorption less
than 11 percent.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450.4
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications:A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast
concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes
preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer.
1. Participates in PCI`s plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant for
Group A, Category Al -Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units or participates in
APRs "Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete
Products" and is designated an APA-certified plant.
B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI318M) and design recommendations of
PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook-Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of
architectural precast concrete units indicated.
C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality.
control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with
PCT MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast
Concrete Products."
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.IM, "Structural
Welding Code-Steel"; and AWS D1.4,"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit
unloading units temporarily on the ground.
B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.
C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to
prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion,warping or other physical damage.
D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.
E. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid
excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.
F. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions,as required, for installation.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450-3
6. Thermal Movements: Provide for in-plane thermal movements resulting from annual
ambient temperature changes of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water.
absorption tests.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.
Indicate locations,plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate
joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners.
1. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in hardware
and connections.
2. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or
attached to structure or other construction.
3. Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed.
4. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special
conditions.
5. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark
placed on panel.
6. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.
7. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance
requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not
adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or
materials and maintain the general design concept.
8. For any pre-cast concrete elements subjected to bending loads, provide comprehensive
engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, and types of reinforcement,
including special reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads
imposed on the building structure from architectural precast concrete.
D. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete
units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected;
approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).
1. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating
workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450-2
SECTION 03450-ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Architectural precast concrete cladding and load-bearing units.
2. Precast Structural Lintels at Drive-Through Canopy
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for installing connection anchors in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for concealed precast concrete lintels
installed with CMU masonry.
3. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for kickers and other miscellaneous steel shapes.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and
texture,preapproved by Architect.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of
withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Loads: As indicated.
2. Dead Loads: 50 lbs/sq.ft. of wall assembly above.
3. Live Loads: None Applicable.
4. Wind Loads: 10 lbs/sq. ft. of projected wall area.
5. Design framing system and connections to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for
fabrication and construction tolerances, to accommodate load deflection, shrinkage and
creep of primary building structure, and other building movements as follows:
a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch(13 mm).
b. Deflection Limit: 1/480 of clear span.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450.1
Apo* seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Contractor will schedule testing
and coordinate testing with construction schedule.
1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
END OF SECTION 03300
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300.7
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS AWN,
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat
float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or powerdriven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel
marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would
telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-
finish coating system.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch(3.2 mm)
D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile
is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete walks, platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (I kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1,by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width,with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6
contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, employing either
of the two following methods at Contrctor option:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide deep joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete,verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
40411 weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5
PART 3,EXECUTION ..
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Construct formwork in accordance with requirements for Rough-Formed Finish Concrete except
where Smooth-Formed Finish Concrete is specifically indicated on the Drawings.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A- Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 VAPOR BARRIER
A. Plastic Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturers written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches(150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated, or in the absence of such indication, into rectangles no more
than 300 sq. ft. in size; layout of which to be reviewed and approved by Architect. Construct
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4
D. Water: Potable.
2.5 VAPOR BARRIERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion-and Isolation-joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days, except 4000 psi (27.6
MPa)for slabs on grade.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches(100 mm),plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm).
3. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice."
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CASTJN PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. oftk
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire
into flat sheets.
C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire,plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice."
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum coarse-
aggregate size. ,
1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, Duracem-65 by Grace, or
approved equal.
2. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M,Type II.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq. m)when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap polyethylene sheet. .•
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2
SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A- This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. See Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 302, "Guide for Floor and Slab Construction"
3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete"
4. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300.1
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 BENCHES
Benches shall be Model B-20,6' length,with cast iron stanchions with black polyester powder coat finish with'/2"
anchor bolt holes,9 straight wood slats pre-drilled and sanded with chamfered ends and preservative finish,as
manufactured by American Site Furniture,56 Winthrop Street,Concord,MA 01742,1-800-366-3080,or approved
equal. The Contractor shall coordinate placement of anchor bolts set in concrete pad as shown in the detail.
2.02 BIKE LOOPS
Bike loops shall be Model 1608-01,2-3/8"O.D.galvanized steel pipe formed to an upside-down"U"form with black
powdercoat finish,36"high x 22",as manufactured by PW Athletic Mfg.Co. 140 N.Gilbert Rd,Mesa,AZ 85203, 1-
800-687-5768,pwathletic.com,or approved equal. Bike loops shall be set in concrete footings,as detailed.
2.03 WOOD FENCE
A. Wood fence shall be constructed of first grade cedar as shown in the detail. 6"x 6"posts shall be pressure treated.
All hardware to be galvanized.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
The work related to each of the site improvement items shall be fabricated,constructed and finished in every
respect in a good,workmanlike and substantial manner,to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and
specifications. All parts necessary for the proper and complete execution of the work,whether the same may
have been specifically mentioned or not or indicated on the drawings,shall be done or furnished in a manner
corresponding with the rest of the work as if the same were specifically herein described.
B. The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and neat in appearance. All work shall meet the
requirements of applicable federal,state and local codes,and other authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
C. All excavation and backfill operations shall conform to the details shown on the drawings and the applicable
provisions specified under Excavating,Filling and Grading,Section 02200.
D. Special Conditions
Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so
that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be
properly finished and connected to the work of other trades.
E. Clean-up-Site shall be left free of all debris and in a clean,orderly manner.
END OF SECTION
Awk,
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE IMROVEMENTS 02950-2
SECTION 02950
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General Requirements,of
which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and perform all operations necessary for completion of the work of this
section as shown on the Drawings,as herein specified and as evidently required to properly complete the
following items:
1. Benches
2. Bike Loops
3. Wood Fence
1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
A. Cast-in-place Concrete.......................................................................Section 03300
B. Bituminous Concrete..........................................................................Section 02600
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Forty-five days prior to installation and before any site furnishings are delivered to the job site,submit samples,
specification cuts or shop and erection drawings for all items in Section 02950 indicating materials size and
weight of steel,number,location and type of connection,welding sequence and hardware.
B. Product literature/specifications cuts required:
1. All items listed in 1.02.A.above
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASTM Standards
1. A307-Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners
2. A424-Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling
3. A500-Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes
4. B209-Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS
A. Architectural Coatings
All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings,(EPA 40 CFR Part 59,as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal
Register). Architectural coatings are defined as:"a coating recommended for field application to stationary
structures and their appurtenances,to portable buildings,to pavements,or to curbs."
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE IMROVEMENTS 02950-1
A00%.'
E. Take whatever measures are necessary to protect the seeded area while it is germinating. These measures shall
include furnishing warnings signs,barriers,and other needed measures of protection.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after seeding operations and shall continue until Acceptance or for a minimum
of 60 days,whichever is longer.
B. Maintenance of seed areas shall consist of watering,weeding,mowing/raking,repair of all erosion,and reseeding as
necessary to establish a uniform stand of grass. Lawns shall be watered daily to maintain adequate surface soil
moiture for proper seed germination. Continue daily watering for not less than 30 days. Thereafter apply 1/2"of
water twice per week until acceptance. All areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass for any reason shall be
reseeded repeatedly until a uniform stand is attained. Scattered bare spots,evenly distributed and not exceeding 8"
square of any lawn area,will be allowed at the discretion of the Architect.
C. At the time of the first cutting,there shall be a uniform stand between 3 and 3-1/2"high,and mower blades shall be
set between 2-1/2" and 3"high. Catch shall be representative of seed specified.
3.07 ACCEPTANCE
The Architect shall inspect all work for Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be
received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. Upon completion and reinspection of
all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect,he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to
the Acceptance of the work.
3.08 ACCEPTANCE IN PART
The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval
is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner
shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract.
3.09 CLEANUP
A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied,pavements shall be kept clear at all times,broom
cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings.
B. After completion of all planting operations,dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the
Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean.
3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
At the end of the guarantee period,the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for the Final Acceptance upon
written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date
for final inspection.
Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect at that time,
he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the Final Acceptance of the project.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SEEDING 02850-6
A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or worked in a frozen or muddy condition.
B. Topsoil shall be placed and spread over approved areas to a depth sufficiently greater than 6"in"loam and seed"
lawn areas and 15"in plant bed areas so that after natural settlement and light rolling,the completed work will
conform to the lines,grades,and elevations indicated.
D. After topsoil has been spread in approved areas,it shall be carefully prepared by scarifying or harrowing,and stones
over one inch in diameter shall be removed from the topsoil. It shall be free of smaller stones in excessive
quantities,as determined by the Architect.
E. The whole surface shall then be rolled with a roller which weighs not more than 100 pounds per foot of width.
During the rolling,all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional topsoil,and the
surface shall be regraded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish to the required grade.
3.04 SEED BED PREPARATION
A. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the grades specified,spread limestone at a rate specified by the
testing agancy.
B. Apply the recommended fertilizer at the rate recommended by the testing agency. Thoroughly and evenly
incorporate fertilizer and lime with the soil to a depth of 3"by discing or other approved method. In areas
inaccessible to power equipment,use hand tools. Adjacent to trees and shrubs,use hand tools to avoid disturbances
of the roots.
1*01"k C. The Seeding Contractor shall reconstitute the soil,as recommended by a soil testing agency,prior to use as planting
soil. Any deficiencies in the topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor,as recommended,at no expense to the
Owner.
D. After incorporation of fertilizer and lime into the soil,the seed bed shall be fine graded to remove all ridges and
depressions and the surface cleared of all debris and of all stones one inch or more in diameter.
3.05 SEEDING
A. Immediately before seeding,the ground shall be restored,as necessary,to a loose friable condition by dicing or
other approved method to a depth of not less than 2". The surface shall be cleared of all debris and of all stones 1"
or more in diameter.
B. Seed all areas to be seeded with specified grass seed,sowing evenly with an approved mechanical seeder at the rate
of 6 ballast roller. Extreme care shall be taken during seeding and raking to insure that no change shall pounds per
1,000 square feet. Spread seed when soil is moist. Cultipacker,or approved similar equipment,may be used to
cover the seed and to firm the seed bed in one operation. In areas inaccessible to cultipacker,the seeded ground
shall be lightly raked and rolled in two directions with a water occur in the finished grades and that the seed is not
raked from one spot to another.
C. Promptly after seeding,wet the seed bed thoroughly,keeping all areas moist throughout the germination period.
D. Mulch shall be placed immediately after seeding. Hay that has been thoroughly fluffed shall be spread evenly and
uniformly at the rate of two to three tons per acre or(2)50 lbs.bales per 1,000 sq.ft.of area. Lumps and thick
mulch materials shall be thinned. All mulch anchor stakes,strings and matting shall be removed before final
acceptance of lawns.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SEEDING 02850-5
A. General-All grass seed shall be:
1. Free from noxious weed seeds and recleaned.
2. Grade A recent crop seed.
3. Treated with appropriate fungicide at time of mixing.
4. Delivered to the site in sealed containers with dealer's guaranteed analysis.
B. Seed Mix Proportions by Weight
%by Weight Seed %Puri %Germination
10% Baron Bluegrass 90% 75%
10% Flyking Bluegrass 85% 75%
40% Illahee Red Fescue* 98% 90%
5% Annual Ryegrass 98% 90%
35% Manhattan II Perennial Rye* 98% 90%
*denotes seed mixture containing active endophytes
Weed seed content shall not exceed 0.25%. Wet,moldy,or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected.
SECTION 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section,carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades,and verify that all
such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that seeding may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall do whatever grading is necessary to bring the subgrade to a true,smooth slope,parallel and 6"
below finished grade,for all seed bed areas. Remove all existing lawns and grasses,including roots.
B. There must be sufficient grade staked,as determined by the Architect,to insure correct line and grade of subgrade
and of finished grade.
C. Immediately prior to being covered with topsoil,the top 3"of the subgrade shall be raked or otherwise loosened and
shall be free of stones,rock,and other foreign material 2"or greater in dimensions.
3.03 FINISH GRADE PREPARATION
mssk
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SEEDING 02850-4
well-drained areas. It shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances which may be harmful
to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be clean and free from clay lumps,stones,
stumps,roots,or similar substances one(1)inch or more in any dimension,debris,or other objects which might be
a hindrance to planting operations. Furnish all topsoil required to complete the work. Materials removed shall be
disposed of by the Contractor.
B. Testing
The Contractor shall take representative samples of topsoil from the site and from topsoil to be hauled in and shall
submit samples to a Soil Testing Laboratory for chemical analysis,and physical analysis. The Contractor shall
indicate to the testing agencies that turf is to be planted and who the Owner is. The Contractor shall forward to the
Architect two copies of analysis and recommendations of the testing agencies.
2.02 FERTILIZER
A. General
All fertilizer shall be a commercial balanced, 10-6-4 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the
manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.
B. Commercial Fertilizer
Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer in which 50-70 percent of the nitrogenous elements shall be
derived from organic sources;phosphate shall be derived from superphosphate containing 16-20 percent phosphoric
acid or bonemeal containing 25-30 percent phosphoric acid and 2-3 percent nitrogen;and potash shall be derived
from muriate of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. 12-4-8 50%organic may be substituted.
Fertilizer shall be mixed,as specified,and delivered to the site in standard,unopened containers showing weight,
guaranteed analysis,and name of manufacturer.
C. Special Protection
If stored at the site,protect fertilizer from the elements at all times.
2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Peat
Peat shall be moist. It shall be finely shredded,consist of 90 percent organic moss peat,be brown in color,and
suitable for horticultural purposes. Shredded particles shall not exceed one(1)inch in diameter. Peat shall be
measured in air dry condition,containing not more than 35 percent moisture by weight. Ash content shall not
exceed 10 percent.
B. Limestone
Ground dolomitic limestone shall be an approved agricultural limestone and shall contain not less than 85 percent of
total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100 mesh sieve,and 90
percent will pass a 20 mesh sieve.
2.04 GRASS SEED
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SEEDING 02850-3
2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this Section.
3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or
these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Architect.
B. Certificates
1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments.
2. Prior to installation,deliver all certificates to the Architect.
1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage
1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Architect's
inspection.
2. Immediately remove from the site all seeding materials which are not true to name and all materials which do
not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications.
3. Use all means necessary to protect seeding materials before,during,and after installation and to protect the
installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage or rejection,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.09 PLANTING SEASON
A. Seeding/Sodding
Seeding/sodding shall be done between August 15th to September 30 and/or April 1st to June 1st.
B. Variance
If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates,a written request shall be
submitted to the Architect stating the special conditions for the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will
be given if warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Regardless of the time of seeding,the Contractor shall be
responsible for a full growth of grass.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 TOPSOIL
A. General
Topsoil,except that existing on the site,will not be made available by the Owner. The Contractor shall be
responsible for supplying any additional topsoil needed and hauling it to the site. It shall be obtained from naturally
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SEEDING 02850-2
SECTION 02850
SEEDING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
A. The General Provisions of the Contract,including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1,apply
to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide
such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified,
in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by
addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Architect's
interpretation.
1.04 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Planting required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and,in general,includes seeding and ground cover
throughout the Work.
1.05 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
A. Excavating,Filling,and Grading.........................................................................Section 02200
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work,be
thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation,and direct
all work performed under this Section.
B. Standards
1. All planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection
for plant disease and insect control.
2. Quality shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards"for number one grade nursery
stock,as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen. ANSI 2260.1 -Nursery Stock.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List-within 35 days after award of Contract and before any seeding materials are delivered to the job site,
submit to the Architect a complete list of all seeding materials and other items proposed to be installed.
1. Include complete data on source,size,and quality.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SEEDING 02850-1
E. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their
acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said
extended guarantee period,the Owner may elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item.
F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspection at no extra cost to the Owner during the guarantee period to
determine what changes,if any, should be made to the Owner's maintenance program. Submit in writing to the
Architect any recommended changes.
3.08 CARE OF EXISTING TREES
A. Upon completion of the work under this Section,all existing trees shall be pruned and any injuries repaired. The
amount of pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to
compensate for the loss of roots as a result of construction operations. Roots greater than 2"shall be hand-cut to
provide clean,concise,cutting and removal. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural
habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made at the branch collar,leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4"
diameter and bruises or scars on the bark,the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed;
wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water.
3.09 CLEANUP
A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied,pavements shall be kept clear at all times,broom
cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings.
B. After completion of all planting operations,dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the
Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean.
3.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. At the end of the guarantee period,the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final acceptance upon written
request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for
final inspection.
B. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect at that time,
he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final acceptance of the Project.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-9
D. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not equipped with an
irrigation system
3.05 INSPECTION
In addition to normal progress inspection,schedule and conduct the following formal inspections,giving the Architect at
least 24 hours prior notice of readiness for inspection:
A. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting.
B. Inspection of plant locations to verify compliance with the Drawings.
C. Schedule the final inspection sufficiently in advance and in cooperation with the Architect so that the final
inspection may be conducted within 24 hours after completion of planting.
D. Final inspection will be at the end of the maintenance period,provided that all previous deficiencies have been
corrected.
3.06 ACCEPTANCE
A. The Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be
received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection.
1. Acceptance of plant material by the Architect shall be for general conformance to specified size,character,and
quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, ,.
including correct species.
2. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the Architect,he
shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the acceptance of the work.
B. Acceptance in Part
1. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when
approval is given to the Contractor in writing to complete work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by
the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract.
3.07 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS
A. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance.
B. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one(1)year from the date of Acceptance to
be in good,healthy and flourishing condition.
C. When work is accepted in parts,the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal
date of the last guarantee period. Thus,all guarantee periods terminate at one time.
D. The Contractor shall replace,without cost to the Owner and as soon as possible as weather conditions permit and
within a specified planting period,all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous thriving condition,as determined
by the Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and
branch rips and shall bear foliage of a normal density,size,and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent
specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification. ,.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-8
1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery
shall be kept in the shade,well protected with soil,wet moss,or other acceptable material and shall be kept
well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. Plants shall not be
bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and
handled from the bottom of the ball only.
2. Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug. Set
plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and
roots.
3. Cut and remove ropes,strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been set. Leave balance of
wrappings intact around ball. If wrapping is plastic,remove top 2/3.
4. Backfill plant pits with prepared planting soil. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full,
water thoroughly,eliminating all air pockets. After watering,install planting soil to top of pit and repeat
watering.
5. Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings.
6. Finish grade planting areas to conform to grades on Drawings.
7. Mulch all pits and beds with a 4"layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after planting.
8. Immediately after planting,water all plants thoroughly.
C.Pruning
1 Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural
character of the plant. Pruning to be done under supervision of the Project Architect.
Pruning and trimming shall include the following:
a) Remove all dead wood,suckers,and broken or badly bruised branches,unless otherwise directed by
the Architect. Contractor shall not cut main leader of tree.
b) Use only clean sharp tools.
3.04 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until acceptance of the project
by the Owner after final inspection or 60 days,whichever is longer.
B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning,watering,cultivating,weeding,mulching,resetting plants to proper grades or
upright position,restoration of the planting saucer,and furnishing and applying such sprays or other items as are
necessary to keep the planting free of insects and disease and in thriving condition.
C. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage of all kinds for the duration
of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or injured,they shall be treated or replaced as directed
by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-7
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully
resolved.
3.02 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS
A. Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain approval of the Architect
before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 percent of total planting must be staked before inspection will be
made.
B. Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings.
C. Separate subgrade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever encountered during
planting operations.
D. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil condition which the Contractor considers detrimental to growth of plant
material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Architect for correcting condition.
Notify the Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions which the Contractor considers detrimental growth
of plant material.
E. Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting the
retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Architect.
,
F. If rock,underground construction work,tree roots,or obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits,
alternate locations may be considered by the Architect. Where location cannot be changed,as determined by the
Architect,submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6"below the required pit
depth. Proceed with work after approval of the Architect.
3.03 PLANTING OPERATIONS
A. Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated
1. Immediately before digging,spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf with anti-desiccant,
applying an adequate film over trunks,branches,twigs,and/or foliage.
2. Dig,ball and burlap("B&B")plants with firm,natural balls of earth with diameter not less than that
recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and
feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during
planting operation.
3. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery
shall be kept in the shade,well protected with soil,wet moss,or other acceptable,materials and shall be kept
well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery.
4. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants
shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only.
B. Planting Trees and Shrubs
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-6
The balls of"B&B"plants and container grown plants which cannot be planted immediately on delivery
shall be covered with moist soil or mulch,or other protection from drying winds and sun. All plants shall
be watered as necessary until planted.
2.07 INSPECTIONS
A. Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be required by law for
transportation. File certificates with the Architect prior to acceptance of the material. Inspection by Federal or
State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at the work site.
2.08 SELECTION AND TAGGING
A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at their place of growth and upon delivery for
conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection
during the progress of the work. A Contractor's representative shall be present at all inspections.
B. Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to the Architect at least
10 calendar days prior to digging. Written requests shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be
inspected. The Architect may refuse inspection at this time if,in his judgement,a sufficient quantity of plants are
not available for inspection.
C. Plants identified as"selection specimen"shall be approved and tagged at their place of growth. For distant
material,submit photographs for pre-inspection review.
2.09 PLANT LABELS
A. Plant labels shall be durable,legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather-resistant ink or embossed
process lettering.
2.10 ANTI-DESICCANT
A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surfaces,permeable enough to
permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the
manufacturer's directions("Wiltpruf'manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products Inc.,Stubbings Road,Groton
Falls,New York,or approved equal).
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section,carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all
such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards.
000w, B. Discrepancies
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-5
C. Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an approved method.
Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in otherwise unsatisfactory condition,as
determined by the Architect.
2.06 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in accordance with good
horticultural practice under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for at least two years.
They shall have been root-pruned within the last two years. All plants B+B or container grown. No heeled-in
plants or plants from cold storage will be accepted.
B. Unless specifically noted otherwise,all plants shall be of specimen quality;exceptionally heavy;and symmetrical,
so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form,
compactness and symmetry. They shall be sound;healthy;vigorous;well-branched and densely foliated when in
leaf, free of disease;insects;eggs or larvae;and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that would
prevent thriving growth.
C. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders,unless specified,will be rejected. Trees
with a damaged or crooked leader,abrasion of bark,sunscalds,disfiguring knots,insect damage,or cuts of limbs
over 3/4"in diameter,not completely calloused,will be rejected.
D. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists,except that plants larger than specified may be
used if approved by the Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are
approved,the root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant.
E. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6"above natural ground line for trees up to 4"in caliper and 12"
above the natural ground line for trees over 4"in caliper. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main
body of the plant and not from branch tip to tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal
position. If a range of size is given,no plant shall be less than the minimum size,and not less than 50 percent of
the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are minimum size,acceptable
after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a normal balance
between height and spread shall be rejected.
F. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be attached securely to all plants,bundles,
and containers of plant materials delivered with care that those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth.
G. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted,unless authorized in writing by the Architect. If proof is
submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant specified is not obtainable,a proposal will be considered for
use of the nearest available size or similar variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price.
H. Type of Protection to Roots
1. Balled and Burlapped Plants
Plants designated"B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm,
natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system
necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and
bound with twine,cord,or wire mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during
the process of planting,the ball may be secured to a platform.
2. Protection After Delivery
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-4
C. Planting Season
1. Planting shall be done within the following dates:
Deciduous material: March 1 -May 15
October 25-December 1
Evergreen Material: March 1 -June 1
August 15-October 15
2. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates,a written request shall
be submitted to the Project Architect stating the special conditions and the proposed variance. Permission
for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Variances permitted will not
relieve the Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FERTILIZER
A. Plant fertilizer packets shall be installed as per the drawings.
2.02 BARK MULCH
A. Shredded cedar bark mulch shall consist of a standard size,free of chunks and pieces of wood thicker than 1/4" and
approved by the Architect. The mulch must be partially decomposed and dark brown in color..
2.03 PEAT MOSS
A. Brown;acid reaction about 4 to 5 pH;low in content of wood material and free of mineral matter harmful to plant
life;water absorbing capacity, 1100 to 2000 percent;moisture content 30 percent natural,shredded or granulated.
2.04 WATER
A. Contractor shall make,at his expense,whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of
water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall also furnish all necessary hose,equipment,attachments,and
accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as
specified.
2.05 PLANTING SOIL
A. The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free from subsoil,stumps,
roots,stones over one(1)inch diameter and other extraneous materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by
the Contractor. Soil shall not be used for planting.while in a frozen or muddy condition.
B. Planting soil mix shall consist of seven parts loam and one part peat moss by volume. It shall have pH value
between pH 5.0 to pH 6.0.
00h,
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-3
1. All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring
inspection for plant disease and insect control.
2. Quality and size shall conform with the current edition of"Horticultural Standards"for number one grade
nursery stock,as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen.
3. All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the name and size of the
plants,in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen. In all
cases,botanical names shall take precedence over common names.
4. All Plants to be grown from stock hardy in USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 2 through 5.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site,submit to the Architect a complete list of all
plants and other items proposed to be installed:
1. Include a complete data on source,size,and quality.
2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section.
3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or
these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Architect. ,lWot
B. Certificates
1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments.
2. Upon completion of the installation,deliver all certificates to the Architect.
C. All submittals shall follow the Provisions of Section 01330-Submittal Procedures.
1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage
1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Architect's
inspection.
2. Immediately remove from the site all plants which are not true to name and all materials which do not
comply with the provisions of this Section of these Specifications.
3. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before,during and after installation and to protect the
installed work and materials of all trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage or rejection,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
Architect,at no additional cost to the Owner.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-2
SECTION 02800
PLANTING
PARTI -GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General Requirements,
of which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide
such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work
specified,in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by
addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Architect's
interpretation.(See Article 1 of the General and Supplementary General Conditions.)
1.04 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
A. The General Provisions of the Contract,including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1,apply
to the work specified in this Section.
1.05 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide
such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work
specified,in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.06 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Planting required for the Work is indicated on the Drawings and,in general,includes planting of trees and/or shrubs
throughout the Work including furnishing all materials,equipment,and labor necessary for root protection,and tree
guards where applicable.
1.07 RELATED WORK
A. Excavating,Filling&Grading............................................................................Section 02200
B. Seeding and Sodding...........................................................................................Section 02850
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work,
thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods of their installation,and direct
all work performed under this Section.
B. Standards
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
PLANTING 02800-1
2. Testing shall include visual observation of interior of pipeline including all joints and connections.
Pipeline shall be certified by testing agency to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents
including requirements for slope,joining,and absence of debris and foreign matter.
3. Duplicate copies of test reports shall be submitted to the Architect.
F. Manhole Testing
1. Leakage testing of sewer manholes shall be included in the testing of the gravity sewer system. Leakage
for each manhole shall not exceed 1 gal./vertical ft.of manhole per 24 hours.
G. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction,submit a written statement to the
Architect that work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
H. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing,a report fully describing test procedures and listing
test results shall be submitted to the Architect and to governmental agencies that have jurisdiction. The report
shall be signed by the Contractors'superintendent.
I. Pipe deflection testing for PVC piping.
1. Six months following completion of the backfill over the PVC pipe installation,the pipeline shall be tested
for deflection using a"go/no go"deflection mandrel. The"go/no-go"gage shall be passed through all
sections of the pipeline.
2. Pipe deflections shall be measured and converted to percent deflection. Deflections shall be recorded,with
a copy of results submitted to the Architect. Test results shall be mailed or delivered to the Architect not "� '
later than the day following the day on which test was made.
3. Sections of pipe with deflection greater than 7.5%shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-8
manhole. Before any measurements are made,a period of about 2 hours shall be permitted to allow for
absorption and escape of trapped air. Following this,a test period of at least 4 hours shall begin. At the
end of the test period,loss of water shall be measured and leakage computed therefrom.
3. Air testing shall be performed in accordance with the procedures described in ASTM C 828,except as
otherwise noted. For low-pressure air tests use equipment specifically designed and manufactured to test
sewer pipelines with low-pressure air. The equipment shall be provided with an air regulatory valve or air
safety valve so set that the internal air pressure in the pipeline cannot exceed 8 prig.
a. The leakage test using low-pressure air shall be made on each manhole-to-manhole of pipeline after
placement of the backfill.
b. Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the pipe to be
tested. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test pressures without requiring external bracing or
blocking.
C. All air used for testing shall pass through a single control panel.
d. Low-pressure air shall be introduced into the sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches a
value 4 psig greater than the maximum pressure exerted by groundwater that may be above the
invert of the pipe at the time of the test. However,the internal air pressure in the sealed line shall
not be allowed to exceed 8 psig. When the maximum pressure exerted by the groundwater is
greater than 4 psig,conduct infiltration test.
e. At least two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to stabilize in the section under test. After
the stabilization period,the low-pressure air supply hose shall be quickly disconnected from the
control panel. The time required in minutes for the pressure in the section under test to decrease
from 3.5 to 2.5 psig(greater than the maximum pressure exerted by groundwater that may be above
the invert of the pipe)shall not be less than shown in the following table:
Pipe diameter in inches Minutes
8 4.0
10 5.0
12 5.5
f. Where the sewer section to be tested contains more than one size of pipe,the minimum allowable
time shall be based on the largest diameter pipe in the section,and shall be the time shown on the
table reduced by 0.5 minutes.
4. Rate of infiltration and exfiltration shall not exceed 20 gal./in. of pipe diameter per mile of pipe per 24
hours. Each section of pipe tested shall meet the above criterion.
E. Closed Circuit TV Testing
1. In addition to the leakage testing specified above,the entire sewer system piping shall be tested using
closed circuit TV testing equipment. Testing shall be done by specialty pipeline testing agency
experienced in closed circuit TV testing of utility pipelines and acceptable to the local DPW. Equipment
used shall be specifically designed for inspection and testing of utility pipelines.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-7
5. Where required,new piping shall be connected to existing manholes by mechanical smooth wall coring
into existing structures. Drilling,jackhammering,breaking will not be allowed. Completed work shall be
adequately patched and finished with non-shrinking grout to the satisfaction of the Architect.
6. Maximum misalignment of pipe into manholes shall be indicated on the Drawings.
C. Connections to existing facilities
1. The Contractor shall make all required connections of the proposed sanitary sewer into existing sanitary
sewer facilities,where and as shown on the Drawings.
2. Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from entering existing piping or
structure.
3. Remove debris,concrete or other extraneous material which may accumulate.
3.02 TESTING
A. The entire sewer system,including piping and manholes shall be tested for leakage.Piping shall also be tested by
the use of either water or low-pressure air. Piping shall also be tested using closed circuit TV. All testing shall
conform to the requirements of the local Department of Public Works.
B. General Test Requirements
1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure sewer line shall have
thrust blocks installed(under another section of the specifications)and the concrete shall have attained full
design strength before test pressure is applied to the line.
2. Piping system shall be flushed clean,and sediment,scale,dirt,and debris removed before piping is tested.
3. Adequate provisions shall be made for carrying off flushing water without causing erosion or other
damage.
4. Manholes and piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible.
5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority of having jurisdiction.
C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Architect and the local plumbing inspector,and received by them
not less than five days before the date of test.
D. Gravity flow system test
1. When the groundwater is more than 1 ft.above the crown of the pipe at the upper end of the section to be
tested,an infiltration test shall be made. The upper end of the section to be tested shall be plugged on V-
notch weir of appropriate size shall be fitted into the lower end. There shall be no leakage around the weir
plate. Commercially manufactured weirs,made and calibrated for the purpose,may be employed.
2. When groundwater is less than 1 ft.above the crown of the pipe at the upper end of the section to be tested,
an exfiltration test shall be made. The sewer shall be plugged at the inlet pipes of both the upper and lower
manholes. The line shall then be filled with water to a level 2 ft.above the crown of the pipe in the upper
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-6
4. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate
measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench.
5. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation,and shall be maintained free from foreign matter
during installation.
6. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts of
the required grade.
7. Piping shall be properly graded,free from pockets.
8. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently support on saddles,blocking or stones.
9. Where necessary,tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at
end of each day's work.
10. Cleaning
a. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
b. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. In large,accessible piping,use brushes and brooms for clearing.
d. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work stops.
e. Flush lines between manholes if required to remove collected debris.
B. Manhole Installation
1. Manholes shall be set vertical on a base material as indicated on the Drawings,with each section in true
alignment.
2. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be plugged thoroughly with mortar and finished smooth and flush
with adjoining surfaces.
3. Brick shall be employed to bring frame and cover to required elevation as indicated on the Drawings.
Complete brick installation shall be coated with at least a 3A in.thickness of mortar on outside to provide
a fully sealed and watertight collar between the top manhole section and the cover frame
a. Before installation of castings,chipped and scraped areas shall be touched up with one coat of
bituminous paint.
b. Cast iron frame shall be set concentric with manhole opening in a full bed of mortar. A thick ring
of mortar extending to the outer edge of brick or concrete shall be placed all around the bottom
flange of the cast iron frame. Mortar surface shall be smooth and sloped to shed waterway from the
frame.
4. Portland cement-based mixtures used on this work shall receive a minimum of three days of moist curing,
which shall start immediately after the material has been placed. Suitable means shall be employed to
protect cement-based mixtures from too rapid drying and damage from cold weather and frost.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-5
5. Manholes shall be designed to safely withstand an AASHTO H-20 loading,as specified in the AASHTO
Specifications.
D. BRICK
1. Brick for support of cast iron cover and frame shall meet the physical requirements of MDPW
Specifications Section M4.05.2.
2. Brick for sewer manhole invert channel shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M4.05.2.
E. MORTAR
Mortar shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M4.02.15.
F. GROUT
Grout shall be a nonshrink cement-based type,such as Master Builders Company"Embeco",or U.S.Grout
Corporation"Five Star Grout".
G. CASTINGS
1. Manhole frames and covers shall be cast iron conforming to MDPW Specifications Section M8.03.0 and
MDPW Construction Standard Drawings 202.6.0,202.7.0 and 202.8.0. Frames may be Type A or Type B.
Covers shall have the letters"SEWER"cast into the cover. All covers shall be submitted to and approved
by the local DPW.
2. Castings shall have a shop-applied coal-tar-pitch varnish coating,thoroughly covering all metal.
H. EMBEDMENT MATERIALS
PVC pipe embedment materials shall conform to Class I or Class II embedment materials as defined in ASTM D
2321.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall install all sanitary sewer structures and pipe in the locations as shown on the Drawings and/or as
approved by the Owner's Field Representative and in accordance with the local DPW Standards.
A. Piping-PVC
1. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects.
2. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.
3. PVC pipe installation shall conform to ASTM D2321.
**w,
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-4
B. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe
1. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)nonpressure pipe for gravity sewers shall conform to ASTM D 3034,SDR35
minimum wall thickness.
2. Pipe shall be bell-and-spigot in standard lengths of 12'-6".
3. Bell end shall be an integral wall section with solid cross section rubber ring,factory assembled.
4. Spigot end shall be beveled to ensure proper insertion. Spigot end shall be imprinted with an"assemble
stripe",to which the bell end of the mated pipe will extend upon proper jointing of the two pipes.
5. Rubber rings shall conform to ASTM D3212.
6. Pipe ends shall permit checking of the rings with a feeler gage to ensure their proper location in the
coupling grooves.
7. PVC fittings shall be bell-and-spigot type,compatible with the pipe.
C. SANITARY MANHOLES
1. Precast concrete manholes shall conform to local DPW Standards and shall be similar to those
manufactured by Nashua Precast Corp.or approved equal.
a. Sections shall have tongue and groove joints.
b. Joints between sections shall be made with preformed rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C433.
C. Each section shall have no more than two lifting holes or cast-in lifting devices.
d. Precast base shall be manufactured with wall openings to receive the ends of pipes which are to be
connected to structure.
e. Pipe openings in base shall be minimum size required to receive pipe,and shall be accurately set to
conform to the required line and grade.
2. Pipe shall be joined to precast base using a seal as indicated on the Drawings or a seal approved by the
local Department of Public Works.
3. Manholes shall have shaped brick inverts.
4. Manhole steps shall be polypropylene plastic reinforced with 3/8 in.diameter steel rod,as manufactured by
M.A.Industries,Inc.Peachtree City,GA 30269,or approved equal.
a. Steps shall be drop-front anti-skid design, 12 in wide. Projection of front edge of step shall be
greater than or equal to 5 in.from manhole wall.
b. Steps shall embedded 4 in.into manhole wall.
' C. Steps in precast sections shall be embedded at time of casting.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-3
3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Departmetn(MHD or MDPW):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
4. Local Municipal Requirements
a. The Contractor shall notify the local DPW prior to installation. All work and materials shall be
subject to the approval of the local DPW.
b. The abutting property owners shall be notified prior to installation of the sewer service.
5. Permits
The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
6. Inspection
1. All sanitary sewer System installation shall be inspected and approved by the local DPW. The
Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the DPW and paying all fees
associated with the Sanitary Sewerage System installation.
2. The Contractor shall have the new pipe system televised and supply a certified video tape to the
local DPW. Arrangements shall be made with the Town prior to performing the TV inspection,so
the DPW personnel can witness the taping process.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for sanitary sewage
system materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for sanitary sewage systems,and maintenance data.
C. Record Drawings: Submit record drawings at Project Closeout.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
The materials to be used in the construction shall be those indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
A. IDENTIFICATION
1. Provide underground-type plastic line markers,manufacturer's standard permanent,bright-colored,
continuous-printed plastic tape,intended for direct-burial service.
2. Size: Min. 6 in wide x 4 mils thick
3. Provide green tape with black printing reading"CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW".
4. During backfilling/top-soiling of sanitary sewage systems,install continuous underground-type plastic line
marker,located directly over buried line at 6 in.to 8 in.below finished grade.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-2
SECTION 02730
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract,including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1,apply to
the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such
item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified,in
accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by addendum,
the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor,materials and equipment
necessary and required to install exterior sanitary sewer system beginning at a point 1 foot outside of tight-of-way,
in accordance with the Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to:
1. Installation of sanitary sewers consisting of manholes,pipe and all necessary and required accessory items
and operations including service connections to each parcel.
2. Pay costs and fees related to connecting sanitary sewerage system to existing services. File applications,
details,and drawings required by the local authority having jurisdiction.
3. Alteration,reconstruction and/or relocation of existing sanitary sewer facilities as required.
4. Installation of sanitary sewer facilities with the Public R.O.W.and/or easements,including connections to
existing sanitary sewer facilities.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating,Filling and Grading..................................................................Section 02200
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO):
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
2. American Society for Testing and Materials:
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe,Using Rubber Gaskets C433
Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe D3231
Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3034
'l Joints for Drain and Sewer and Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3212
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM 02730-1
accepted,but in any event the Contractor shall be responsible for tightness of the line within the above
leakage and pressure requirements.
E. Before submitting system for final approval of the authorities having jurisdiction,submit to the Engineer a written
statement that work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and signed by the
Contractor's Superintendent.
F. Promptly following satisfactory completion of leakage testing,a report fully describing test procedure and listing
test results shall be submitted to the Engineer and to governmental agencies having jurisdiction.The report shall
be signed by the Contractor's superintendent.
G. The contractor shall be required to conduct test in accordance with NFPA 24 for all underground piping
associated with fire protection.
3.05 DISINFECTION
A. The Contractor shall disinfect the lines and tank carrying potable water. The work shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements of the City DPW Standards. Test results shall be sent to the Engineer and local
DPW.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfection,and shall
perform the work in accordance with procedure outlined in the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C651 except as
otherwise specified herein.
., C. The dosage shall be such so as to produce a chlorine concentration of no less than 25 ppm(mg/1)after a contact
period of not less than 24 hours.
D. After treatment,the pipeline shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content does not exceed
1.0 ppm(mg/1).
E. After flushing samples shall be collected as per Town DPW standards.
F. During the disinfection period,care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in existing mains.
G. The Contractor shall dispose of the water used in disinfecting and flushing in an acceptable manner.
H. Any temporary connections required for disinfection shall be installed and subsequently properly abandoned at
the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-7
4. Piping shall be tested before joints are concealed or made inaccessible.
5. Tests shall be made in the presence of an inspector of the authority having jurisdiction and in accordance
with the DPW Standards.
C. Notice of tests shall be made in writing to the Engineer and the DPW and Water Department,and received by
them at least five days before the date of test.
D. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests
1. Testing shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard C600,Section 4,and at test pressure indicated in the
DPW Standards.
2. Pressure pipe shall be given combined hydrostatic and leakage tests in sections of acceptable length as the
Engineer shall direct.
3. Furnish and install suitable temporary testing plugs or caps; all necessary pressure pumps,pipe
connections,meters,gages,and other necessary equipment;and all labor required.
4. Unless it has already been done,the section of pipe to be tested shall be filled with water of approved
quality,and all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If hydrants or blow-offs are not available at high points
for releasing air,make necessary excavations,do backfilling and make taps at such points. Plug holes
after completion of the test.
5. The section under test shall be maintained full of water for a period of 24 hours prior to the combined ,
pressure and leakage test being applied.
6. The meter and gage shall be installed and shall be kept in use during the test so that water entering water
main under test will be measured and the pressure in the water main indicated.
7. The pressure test shall be made at 1.5 times the normal working water pressure(based on the elevation of
the lowest point of the section under test),but not less than 150 PSI. If the Contractor cannot achieve the
specified pressure and maintain it for the specified time,with no additional pumping,the section shall be
considered as having failed to pass the test.
8. Following a successful pressure test,or concurrently with test,make a leakage test by metering the flow of
water into the pipe while maintaining in the water main and pressure equal to the specified test pressure.
If the average leakage during the period exceeds specified the rate of gallons per hour,the section shall be
considered as having failed the leakage test.
9. If the section shall fail to pass the pressure test,the leakage test,or both,locate,uncover,and repair or
replace defective pipes,fittings,or joints,without extension of time for completion of work. Additional
tests and repairs shall be made until the section passes the specified tests.
10. All joints within vaults shall have no visible leakage. Joints from which water continues to run or squirt in
an active manner will not be accepted.
11. Upon successful completion of the tests,plugs or caps installed for the testing shall be removed.
12. If,in the judgment of the Engineer,it is impractical to follow the foregoing procedure exactly for any
reasons,modifications in the procedure shall be submitted for approval and be made as approved and -A"k
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-6
1. Except as otherwise approved,all cutting shall be done with a machine suitable for cutting ductile iron
pipe. Hydraulic squeeze cutters are not acceptable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Travel type cutters and
guillotine or rotary type abrasive saws may be used. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks
caused by cutting.
2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of pipe or fittings will render
them unfit for use;he shall use the utmost care in handling and installing lined and coated pipe and fittings
to prevent damage. Protective guards shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed.
E. Concrete Thrust Blocks
1. Changes in direction,both vertical and horizontal shall be braced with concrete thrust blocks.
2. Where pipe is being capped for future connection,cap shall be braced with concrete thrust block.
3. Concrete shall meet requirements of Section 03300,CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
4. Thrust block sizing and installation shall be in accordance with DPW Standards.
3.03 ASSEMBLING SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings,the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 in.
Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket,in that order,shall be slipped over each
pipe to a distance of about 6 in.from the end,and the middle ring shall be placed on the already laid pipe and
low until it is properly centered over the joint.The other pipe end shall be inserted into the middle ring and brought to
proper position in relation to the pipe already laid. The gaskets and followers shall then be pressed evenly and
firmly into the middle ring flares.
B. After the bolts have been inserted and all nuts have been made up fmgertight,diametrically opposite nuts shall be
progressively and uniformly tightened all around the joint,preferable by use of a torque wrench of the appropriate
size and torque for the bolts.
C. The correct torque as indicated by a torque wrench shall not exceed the sleeve manufacturers recommendations.
D. An approved tar coating shall be applied on the entire outer surface of such couplings,including bolts,following
installation.
3.04 TESTING
A. All portions of the water system installed shall be hydrostatically tested for leakage.
B. General Test Requirements
1. Piping shall be adequately restrained against movement before testing. Pressure line shall have thrust
blocks installed and the concrete shall have attained full design strength before test pressure is applied to
the line.
2. Piping system shall be flushed clean,and sediment,scale,dirt,and debris removed before piping is tested.
3. Adequate provision shall be made for carrying off flushing without causing erosion or other damage.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-5
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section,carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all
such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations,the
original design,the referenced standards,and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the referenced DPW Standards.
Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not indicated on the Drawings,the Engineer's approval shall be
obtained for proposed locations.
B. Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the DPW Standards. Awk
1. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate
measures including de-watering as required shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench.
2. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to
the required grade.
3. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently
supported on saddles,blocking,or stones.
4. Where indicated,new system shall be connected to existing Municipal Water Distribution System in
accordance with the City Requirements.
C. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation,and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during
installation.
1. Where necessary,tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at
end of each day's work.
2. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill.
D. In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient fracture beyond the limits of
the visible crack,the cracked portions,if so approved,may be cut off by and at the expense of the Contractor
before the pipe is laid so that the pipe used will be perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound portion at
a point at lest 12 in.from the visible limits of the crack.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-4
3. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C11.
4. Inside of pipe and fittings shall be given a cement lining 1/8 inch minimum thickness on pipe 12 inches
and smaller in accordance with ANSI/AWWA A21.4/C104. The outside of the pipe and fittings shall be
coated with a standard bituminous coating conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.6/C106.
5. Pipe for use with sleeve-type couplings shall be as specified above except that the ends shall be plain
(without bells or beads). The ends shall be cast or machined at right angles to the axis.
B. Sleeve-type couplings shall be cast iron and shall be Dresser style.
1. To ensure correct fitting of pipe and couplings,sleeve-type couplings and accessories shall be furnished by
the supplier of the pipe and shall be of a pressure rating at least equal to that of the pipeline in which they
are to be installed.
2. Couplings shall be provided with epoxy coated steel bolts.
3. Outer surfaces of couplings including bolts and nuts shall be coated with an approved tar coating upon
installation.
2.02 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A. Gate valve shall be iron body,New York Style(Metropolitan Patter)conforming to AWWA C500. Gate Valve
00ft, shall have mechanical joint ends,interior epoxy coated,2 in.square operating nut.Valve shall open to right
(clockwise). Gate valve shall be designed to be bottle-right for a minimum working pressure of 200 lb.per sq.in.
B. Each valve shall be provided with a valve box. Box shall be 2 pieces slip-style cast iron and shall be an
adjustable telescoping,heavy pattern type.
1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic loads to the piping or
valve.
2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to prevent undue settlement. Lower
section of box shall be designed to enclose the valve operating nut and stuffmg box,and rest on the
backfill.
3. Boxes shall be adjustable by 6 in.vertically without reduction of the lap between sections to less than 4 in.
4. Inside diameter of box shall be at least 5 1/4 inch and length of box shall be as required to suit finish
ground elevation.
5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight. Top of cover shall be flush with top of box
rim. Cover shall have a word"WATER"cast into top.
6. Box shall be equal to that as manufactured by the Tyler Corporation.
C. For valves installed with depth of cover substantially greater than that specified,extensions,including centering
spacers,shall be added to the operation nut assembly to raise the operating nut to a depth below grade equal to
that with the normal required depth of cover.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-3
B. Inspection and Testing
1. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to
which the material is manufactured. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in duplicate sworn
certificates of such tests.
2. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe,fittings and special castings inspected and/or tested
by an independent testing agency at either the manufacturer's plant or elsewhere. Such inspection and
tests shall be at the Owner's expense.
3. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and a hammer test just before being
installed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
After the award of the Contract and before any water system materials are delivered to the job site,submit to the
Engineer,a complete list of materials proposed to be furnished and installed.
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item,furnish complete catalog cuts and technical
data,and furnish the manufacturers'recommendations as to method of installation.
2. Upon approval of the Engineer,the manufacturers'recommendations shall become the basis for
acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work.
3. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site until it has been approved by
the Engineer.
B. Record Drawings
1. During the course of installation,carefully shown in red line on a print of the utility plan all changes made
to the water system during installation.
2. Upon completion of the water system installation,these marked plans shall be supplied to the Engineer.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A. Ductile iron pipe shall be furnished and installed in sizes as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
latest ANSI Standards'Designations A21.50(AWWA C150)for"Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal
Molds of Sand-Lines Molds for Water or Other Liquids." Unless otherwise indicated or specified,ductile iron
pipe shall be at least thickness Class 52.
1. DI pipe shall be push-on joint type except as otherwise indicated or specified.
2. CI or DI fittings shall conform to ASA/AWWA A21.10/C100 or ANSI/AWWA A21.10/C110
respectfully,and shall be of a pressure classification at least equal to that of the pipe with which they are
used. „00*
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Mzssachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-2
SECTION 02666
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
All of the Contract Documents,including the General and Supplementary Conditions,Division 1 General Requirements,
apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor,materials and equipment
necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract
Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to:
1. Installation of water distribution system consisting of excavation,piping,valves and boxes,pipe fittings,
thrust blocks,vaults and all necessary and required accessory items and operations including sheeting,
bracing,pumping and coordination with interior plumbing and electrical contractors. -
2. Furnishing and installation of building water service lines,from the water distribution system in the street
to each building,including curb stop and curb box,temporary cap,and marker as necessary,as required by
the Northampton DPW.
3. Testing and disinfection.
4. Installation of water lines within the Public R.O.W.and/or Easements,including connections to existing
water supply facilities.
5. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting water system to existing services and
shall file all applications,details,and drawings,required by the local authority having jurisdiction.
1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
Earthwork.............. 02200
Paving and Curbing........................................................................................Section 02600
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. City Requirements
1. The Contractor shall notify the City Board of Health and DPW sufficiently in advance of connecting new
or relocated water services to existing water main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval of
the City.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the City and State personnel and
paying all fees associated with the water system installation and testing.
3. All water distribution materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the City Board of
Health and Water department Standards. Should discrepancies exist between the City Standards and this
Specification,the City Standards shall prevail. For materials or methods of installation not included in the
City Standards,but specified herein,the Contractor shall submit this material or methodology to the City
DPW for approval prior to purchase and/or execution.
ew
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02666-1
1. When the modified asphalt adhesive is dry to the touch,the pavers shall be carefully placed by hand in
straight courses with tight joints and uniform top surface.
2. The pattern shall be as shown on the plans.
3. Newly laid pavers must be protected at all times by panels of plywood on which the installer stands.
The panels can be advanced as work progresses,but the plywood protection must be maintained in
areas which will be subjected to continued movement of materials and equipment. These precautions
must be taken in order to avoid depressions and protect paver alignment. If additional leveling of the
pavers is required,and before sweeping in joint filler,the surface shall be roller with a power roller
after sufficient heat has built up from several days of hot weather.
E. Joint Treatment
1. The joints shall be hand tight joints and read from 0"to a maximum of 1/4". A dry mixture of one part
colored Portland cement to match color of pavers and three parts sand shall be swept into joints until
joints are completely filled. The joints shall then be lightly filled with water. Cement stains that
remain shall be cleaned with a 10%solution of muriatic acid or mortar cleaner or swept with moist
sand.
2. Voids greater than 1"shall be fitted with sections of pavers cut on masonry saw set in a table saw
configuration.
, 3.03 REMEDIAL MEASURES
A. Upon direction of the Architect,cut out and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas which do not meet the
requirements of this section. Perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. Sweep surfaces of pavers thoroughly,removing all dust and foreign materials. Hose with water to ensure a clean,
unsoiled surface. Sweep and hose all adjoining areas to remove all stone dust and paver debris. Remove all debris
from area.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE MASONRY 02640-5
1. Prior to all work of this section,carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that
all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that pavers may be installed in strict accordance with the original design and all pertinent
portions of the referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully
resolved.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General-All masonry work is to be done by masons who are skilled in their trade in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
B. Gravel Base
1. After subgrade has been completed as described in Section 02200 of these Specifications,and has been
approved by the Architect,roll the surface to a smooth and uniform texture to free from lumps,rock
pockets,soft spots,and spongy areas.
C. Bituminous Setting Bed
1. To install the setting bed over the surface of the base,place 2"deep control bars directly over the base.
If grades must be adjusted,set wood chocks under depth control bars to proper grade. Se two bars
parallel to each other approximately eleven(11)feet apart to serve as guides for striking board(12'
long x 2"x 6"board). The depth control bars must be set carefully to bring the pavers,when laid,to
proper grade.
2. Place some bituminous bed between the parallels depth control bars. Pull this bed with the striking
board over these bars several times.After each passage, low porous spots must be showered with fresh
bituminous material to produce smooth,firm and even setting bed. As soon as this initial panel is
completed,advance first bar to the next position in readiness for striking the next panel. Carefully fill
up any depressions that remain after removing the depth control bars and wood chocks. The setting
bed shall be roller while hot with a power roller to a nominal depth of 2"as designated on the plans.
3. The elevation shall be adjusted so that when the paving units are placed,the top surface of the pavers
will be at the required finished grade.
4. A coating of two percent(2%)neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive shall be applied by mopping,
squeegeeing or troweling over the top surface of the bituminous setting bed so as to provide a bond
under the pavers. If it is troweled,the trowel shall be serrated with serrations not to exceed one-
sixteenth(1/16)of an inch.
D. Placement of Pavers
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE MASONRY 02640-4
When temperature is below 40 deg.F and falling,or same is forecast to occur within 48 hours,provide fireproof
protection covering of work and heat materials with UL approved flame heaters,as approved. Maintain
materials and work above 50 deg.F for 72 hours. Do not use any admixture to prevent freezing.Do not lay
frozen materials or build upon frozen surfaces. Lay masonry units dry. Any completed work found to be
affected by frost shall be taken down and rebuilt,at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS
A. Unit pavers, as shown on the plans, shall be as manufactured by Hanover Prest Paving Co.,RD#4 -Bender Road,
Hanover,PA 17331 (717)637-0500 or approved equal.
1. Styles specified include:
a. Hanover Prest Pavers with tudor finish
Size: 6"x6"x 2-3/8"thickness
Color:Red Charcoal Blend
2. Concrete pavers shall meet or exceed ASTM C936-82 paving standards to include: 8,500 psi compressive
strength,5%water absorption rate, 155 lbs/cu.ft.density.
3. The Owner shall approve final color selection.
B. All concrete units shall be dimensionally stable in regard to height,width and length.
C. All concrete units shall be free of organic impurities that will cause rusting,staining,etc.
2.02 NEOPRENE-MODIFIED ASPHALT ADHESIVE
A. Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive shall consist of two percent(2%)neoprene(Grade WM1)oxidized asphalt
with a 155 degree softening point(80 penetration)and ten percent(10%)long fibered asbestos.
2.03 ANCHORS AND TIES
A. Provide all anchors and ties for proper performance or work,as detailed on drawings.
B. All angles or ties shall be galvanized or non-corrosive material.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE MASONRY 02640-3
After award of Contract and before any unit paving materials are delivered to the job site,submit to the
Landscape Architect a complete materials list of all masonry materials.
A. Show manufacturers'name and catalog number for each item,furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data,
and the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation.
B. Upon approval of the Architect,the manufacturers'recommendations shall become the basis for acceptance or
rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work.
C. The paver supplier shall submit 6 copies of all necessary shop drawings to the Landscape Architect for his
approval. These drawings shall show all bedding,bonding,jointing and anchoring details,and the dimensions
and setting number of each piece of granite. No final sizing or finishing shall be done until the shop drawings
for that part of the work have been approved.
D. Samples:The Installing Contractor shall submit to the Architect four production units of each color and style
selected. This submission is made for final approval and establishes job site criteria for quality and color
uniformity.All surface texture shall be uniform within the normal color range established between the
manufacturer and Architect. Submit affidavits stating that masonry units to be used on the job complies with all
applicable ASTM specifications.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
1. Use all means necessary to protect the masonry units and materials before,during,and after installation
and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
2. Masonry units shall be protected against wetting prior to laying.
3. Do not use,and immediately remove from the project site all materials in broken containers or in
packages showing water marks or other evidence of damage.
4. Do not use any chipped,broken,or otherwise damaged or defective masonry units.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
Architect,at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this section.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public,
neighbors,and concurrent performance of other work on the job site.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
AOW*,,
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE MASONRY 02640-2
SECTION 02640
SITE MASONRY
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract,including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1,apply to
the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such
item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the work specified,in
accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by addendum,
the better quality of greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included
Work includes all labor,materials,equipment and incidental items necessary to complete the installation of
Precast Paving Units,the filling of joints in all areas noted and detailed in the drawings and/or indicated in the
finish schedule as paving units.
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating,Filling&Grading..................................................Section 02200
Bituminous Concrete Pavement.................................................Section 02600
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications of Workmen
A. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required,completely
familiar with the design and application of the work described in this section,be present at all times during
progress of work of this section,and direct all work performed under this section.
B. For actual installation and finishing of precast pavement surfaces and operation of the required equipment,use
only personnel that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required.
C. Masonry units shall conform to the physical requirements of the local building code and the current applicable
ASTM specifications applying to particular use for the construction in which units are employed.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
Materials List
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE MASONRY 02640-1
F. Portions of granite curb which become broken,cracked or chipped shall only be allowed for use if approved by the
Engineer after a thorough visual inspection.Precast concrete curb which becomes broken,cracked or chipped shall
not be allowed for use.
G. Joints between pieces of curbing shall be filled with an approved mortar mix in conformance with M4.02.15.
3.08 REMEDIAL MEASURES
Upon direction of the Engineer,cut out,and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade areas which do not meet the
requirements of this Section;perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so
that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be
properly finished and connected to the work of other trades.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-8
base,and subgrade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing
pavement when subjected to traffic.
11. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement(if greater than or equal seven days since binder
placed),parking lot overlay areas,manholes,concrete collars and similar structures shall be thoroughly
cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed.
Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5-7 gal./100 s.y.after evaporation of
vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not
be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed
before tack coat has dried or dusted over.
12. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to
thickness of course being constructed,allowing at least 1 ft.of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted
simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before
placing earth or other approved material along edge.
13. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in.when tested with a 10 ft.
straight edge,applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved area. At joints with existing
pavement,and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required,pavement elevation
tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 feet. At other areas pavement elevation tolerance shall not exceed+0.05 ft.
Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing
defective work and replacing with new material conforming to this section.
3.06 TRAFFIC STRIPING
A. Traffic paint materials,equipment,methods of placement,and precautions to be observed as to weather,condition
of surface,etc.,shall conform to MHD Specifications for traffic striping first class road work. Striping shall not
begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured for a minimum of 14 days.
B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings.
C. Striping width shall be as detailed in the 1978 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
3.07 GRANITE AND PRECAST CONCRETE CURB
A. Curb work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 35 degrees F.
B. Installation shall be timed to permit placing curb during daylight hours,unless artificial light satisfactory to the
Engineer is provided.
C. Pieces of granite curb shall be set on wooden blocks and leveled over an adequate length to verify true vertical
alignment. The concrete shall then be poured and hand troweled to fill all voids below and in front of the curb as
detailed.
D. Curbing shall be tapered to meet existing grade in areas adjacent to handicapped access ramps.
E. Where new curbing joins existing or new bituminous curbing,the bituminous curbing shall be replaced for a
distance of 2 feet and shall be tapered to conform to the curb end shape.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-7
Awk
Bituminous concrete pavements shall be furnished,handled and laid in accordance with Section 460 and Section
701 of the State Specifications,except as herein modified.
1. Binder and wearing surface courses for sidewalks may each be applied individually, in single lifts of full
thickness indicated on the Drawings.
2. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt
emulsion a short time before paving commences,as directed by the Engineer.
3. Adjacent concrete work,curb,etc.,shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation.
Damage and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original condition.
4. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications,
Section 460,Class I,Bituminous Concrete Pavement,Type-I.
5. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor,and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 10 days prior to the pavement
construction. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours,
unless artificial light,satisfactory to the Engineer,is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or
otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted.
6. Establishment of grades,grade control,and conformance to finished pavement surface grade tolerances
required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
7. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Breakdown rolling shall begin as
soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling shall be
completed while the mix temperature exceeds 150 degrees F. Rolling shall proceed longitudinally,starting
at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on
successive strips shall be greater than or equal to width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be
of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials
before rolling is completed. Skin patching of areas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted.
Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling,crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in
compatible condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and
application of fresh mixture or removal or mixture,as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued
until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to
be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold.
8. In places not accessible to roller,mixture shall be compacted with hand tampers. Hand tampers shall weight
at least 50 lb.and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq.in. Mechanical tampers capable of
equal compaction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively.
9. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be
removed,replaced with fresh mixture and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Asphaltic material
spilled outside lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall
not be employed in the work.
10. Joints shall present same texture,density,and smoothness as other sections of the course. Continuous bond
shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of
new pavement. Any longitudinal or transverse joint which has cooled below 150 degrees F prior to
placement of adjacent mix,shall be treated with a coat of tack coat prior to new mix placement. New
material at joints shall be thick enough to allow for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement,
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-6
3.04 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE
A. The gravel shall be furnished,hauled,deposited and spread in layers as specified in applicable provisions of Section
40,and 405 of the State Specifications and compacted as specified for the formation of embankments,for sub-base,
shoulders etc.,and as specified herein.
B. The gravel shall be spread in layers from self-spreading vehicles,or with power graders of approved types,or by
hand upon the prepared subgrade. Gravel shall be spread in layers no more than six(6")inches thick,compacted
measure. Compaction requirements shall be to 95%maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557,Method D.
Stone greater than 2 in.shall be excluded from course. .The method of compaction proposed by the Contractor
shall be approved by the Engineer and the approved method and procedure,once established and providing the
required results,shall be used throughout the entire operation. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified
density. Trucks shall not be used for compaction purposes.
C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface,if continuous lateral support is
provided during rolling,and shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond edge of the course above,if not so
supported.
D. Width of Base
1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall,manhole,catch basin,and other structures only after they have
been set to required grade and level.
2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas,and shall begin on low side and
progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave
ahead of roller wheels.
3. Surface irregularities which exceed 112 in.measured by means of a 10 ft.long straightedge shall be replaced
and properly compacted.
E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to
become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired.
F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated,softened,or dislodged by passing of
traffic,or otherwise damaged,shall be cleaned,replaced,and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of
this specification before proceeding with next operation.
3.05 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING
A. Preparation
Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign matter and when the weather is not
foggy or rainy,and fii Cher these operations shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less
than 40 degrees F in the shade. Actual mix delivery temperature shall adhere to Section 460.61. Under no
circumstances shall mix temperature exceed 325 degrees F upon arrival at the site. Temperature exceeding 325
degrees F will result in rejection of the entire load.
B. Placement
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-5
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Compacting Equipment
All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of 10 tons,except that
hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance
by the Engineer.
B. Paving Equipment
All equipment for paving shall be spreading,self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable of maintaining line,
grade and minimum surface course thickness specified,with laser grading sensors for tolerance accuracy.
3.03 GRADING
A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade elevation under Section 02200,
EARTHWORK,before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading,filling,and compaction of subgrade
to receive paving,as required to form a firm,uniforni,accurate,and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and
to required lines,shall be done under this Section.
B. Existing subgrade materials which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace
unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section.
C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in.of material immediately below
gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90%of maximum density,as determined by ASTM D 1557,Method
D. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft.beyond pavement edge.
D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade
are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade or subbase,subsequent backfill and
compaction shall be performed as directed by the Engineer as specified in Section 02200,EARTHWORK.
Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded.
E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal
to 2 in.deep in subgrade,shall be graded out,reshaped as required,and recompacted before placing pavement.
F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section,and material unsuitable for or in
excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site.
H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Engineer. Subgrade shall be approved by the Engineer before
installation of paving base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under
this section of the specification. ,
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-4
2.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of Class I,Type I-1,conforming to the requirements of
Section 460,Subsection M3.11.00 of MHD Specifications.
1. Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve,and bitumen
content=5 1/2%+ 1/2%by weight.
2. Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1/2 in.sieve,and bitumen content
=6 1/2%+ 1/2%by weight.
Complete job mix formula,listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties,shall be submitted to and approved
by the Engineer at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin.
B. Bituminous tack coat shall be applied as required. Bituminous material for tack coat on the existing surface,where
required or specified,shall be emulsified asphalt,grade RS-1 conforming to Subsection M3.03.0 of MDPW
Specifications.
2.03 GRANITE CURB AND GRANITE CURB INLETS
A. New granite curbs,shall conform to the requirements of Type VB granite curb, Section M9 9.04.1 of the MHD
Standard Specifications.New granite curb inlets,shall conform to the requirements of granite curb inlets,Section
M9 9.04.5 of the MHD Standard Specifications
2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB
Precast concrete curb shall be as detailed on the drawings,as manufactured by Chase Precast,W.Brookfield,MA, or
approved equal.
2.05 CONCRETE FOR CURB SETTING
All concrete,unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer,shall be transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C-
94. Concrete shall be Massachusetts DPW standard specifications class D.
2.06 TRAFFIC PAINT
Pavement striping shall conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MDPW Specifications.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this Section,carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all
such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original design,all
pertinent codes and regulations,and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-3
AWN
B. Paving work,base course etc.,shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them
has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance. All trenches for
utility installation shall be completed and backfilled for a period of 30 days prior to paving over these trenches
unless approved by the Engineer.
C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship and materials for
such repair and replacement shall match those employed in existing work,except as otherwise noted.
D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade.
E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall,if damaged or removed during the course of this project,be
repaired or replaced under this section of the specification in conformance with applicable codes,standards,and
practices.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor,and it shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction.
1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before,during and after installation and
to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer at
no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this Section.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public,neighbors and
concurrent performance of other work on the job site.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GRAVEL BASE COURSE
Gravel base and/or sub-base courses for areas beneath new pavement as hereinbefore defined and indicated on the
drawings,shall consist of gravel borrow composed of hard durable stone,and coarse sand,free of loam,clay or silt,
uniformly graded and containing no stone having any dimension greater than the gradation shown on the plans. When
spread and rolled on the prepared surface,it shall form a stable surface. The gradation shall conform to State
Specifications,Section M1,sub-section M1.03.0,Type"b",and attention is directed to the selected gravel size limitation.
Samples of gravel and results of gradation tests performed by an approved testing laboratory shall be submitted for
approval of the Engineer. No stone shall be greater than 4"in any dimension. ,•N
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-2
SECTION 02600
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
A. The General Provisions of the Contract,including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1,apply
to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide
such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified,
in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by
addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Engineer's
interpretation.
1.04 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bituminous concrete pavement required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes,but is not
necessarily limited to:
1. Roadway pavement
2. Granite curbing
3. Precast concrete curbing
4. Patching
5. Line painting and striping
1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO):
B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):
C. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department(MHD or MDPW):
Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
D. Comply with standards specified in accordance with City of Northampton Department of Public Works.
1.06 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
Excavating,Filling&Grading.....................................................................................Section 02200
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless otherwise specified,work and materials for construction of the asphaltic concrete paving shall conform to
the applicable portions of the following:
1. MHD specifications Section 460 for pavement and Section 405 for gravel base course and Section 500 for
"curb and edging".
2. MHD specifications Section 860 for fast drying traffic paint.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING 02600-1
F. Where required,new piping shall be connected to existing manholes and catch basins by cutting or breaking into
existing structures. Completed work shall be adequately patched and finished with nonshrink grout to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.07 CERTIFICATES
Affidavits shall be fiunished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and installed under this Section,
certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these Specifications.
3.08 TESTING
A. Tests for outside stormwater drainage piping shall be paid for by this Contractor as requested by the Engineer and
approved before acceptance. All tests shall be performed after installation is completed including all backfilling,
compaction and cleaning.
B. Leakage
The sewers and appurtenant structures shall be made as nearly watertight as practicable and leakage
measurements shall be made as directed by the Engineer.
The leakage into the sewers,including manholes,constructed under this contract shall not exceed an average of
five hundred(500)gallons per inch diameter in twenty-four(24)hours per mile of sewer.
Where practicable,the leakage tests shall be made at a time when a head of water can be maintained at least one
(1)foot above the top of the pipe of the highest section of work being tested. The Contractor shall construct such
weirs of other means of measurement as may be required and shall do all necessary pumping to enable the tests to
be properly made.
Portions of sewers which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are
complied with.
END OF SECTION
A*
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-10
section in true alignment. Materials shall be as listed herein and exceptions shall not be taken without prior
approval.
1. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush
with adjoining surfaces.
2. Drain pipe shall extend,around its entire circumference,to inside surface of wall of structure into which it
is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using either a flexible manhole sleeve or nonshrink grout.
For grouted joints,surface between pipe and wall shall be filled with nonshrink grout.
B. Castings
Casting frames shall be set on a full bed of mortar,true to grade and concentric with the masonry. All voids
beneath the bottom flange shall be completely filled to make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar at least 1 inch thick
shall be placed around the outside of the bottom flange extending to the outer edge of the masonry all around the
frame.
Mortar surface shall be smooth and shall be sloped to shed water away from the frame.
C. Laying Brick
Bricks shall be clean when laid. For best results,bricks should have a section rate,when laid,not in excess of 40
gpm,in accordance with the NBS test procedure. Except in cold weather,all brick shall be set as directed by the
Engineerto approximate this condition.
Each brick shall be laid in a full bed and joint of mortar without requiring subsequent grouting,slushing or filling
and shall be thoroughly bonded as directed.
Brick work shall be protected against weather and frost as approved or required by the Engineer.
D. Plastering
Outside faces of brick masonry shall be plastered with mortar 3/4 inch thick. The masonry shall be properly
wetted as above specified before the plaster is applied. The plaster shall be carefully spread and troweled so that
all cracks are thoroughly worked out. After hardening,the plaster shall be carefully checked,by being tapped,for
bond and soundness. Waterproofing shall be added to the mortar for underground masonry in accordance with the
waterproofing manufacturer's directions.Other additives will not be permitted in the mortar. Two coats of
bituminous waterproofing material shall then be applied to the hardened plaster. The material shall be"miniwax
Fibrous Brush Coat"made by the Miniwax Company,New York,N.Y. "Tremco 121 Foundation Coating"made
by the Tremco Manufacturing Company,Cleveland Ohio; "Intertol No. 7"made by Intertol Company,Newark,
NJ;or approved equal. The material shall be applied by brush or spray(using a primer if necessary)in
accordance with the direction of the manufacturer.
The Engineer at his discretion may require that two coats of the above described bituminous waterproofing
material be applied to the outside of precast manholes installed in wet areas.
E. Stubs in Manholes
The stubs shall be short pieces cut from the bell end of the pipe,and sealed as specified. The stubs shall be set to
the required line and elevation and encased in the manhole masonry as shown on the drawings or as directed by
low the Architect.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-9
INN I
8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill.
9. Lifting holes in concrete pipe shall be at top of pipe as installed. Holes shall be sealed with precast
concrete plugs. Before plugs are installed,entire contact surface between plug and pipe shall be coated
with asphalt mastic. Plug shall be driven home before mastic has set up.
3.05 PIPING
Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets,Portland cement mortar,nonshrink grout,or asphalt mastic compound.
A. Rubber gasketed joint: Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants,cements,adhesives,and other accessories
and methods recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe
has been properly drawn up and the joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the pipe
immediately before joint is made up. Jointing materials shall be inspected and defects repaired before joint is
completed.
B. Portland cement mortared joint: Mortar joint shall be caulked with jute or oakum,and remainder of joint depth
filled with cement mortar. Jute or oakum may be omitted if joint space is completely filled with mortar,and a
continuous bead is left around full circumference on both inside and outside surfaces of pipe. Pipe surfaces to
be in contact with mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned and well wetted before joint is made. On inside of pipe,
joint shall be left smooth and flush with pipe wall,completely free from obstructions to flow. Joints shall be
protected from sun and wind for a minimum of three days.
1. Placing of mortar in joints shall lag at least five pipe sections behind pipe installation.Final four joints
shall be made up after last pipe section is its final position.
2. Mortar in bell and spigot pipe shall be bevelled off on outside of pipe at a 45 degree angle to barrel.
Mortar shall be extended from barrel of one pipe to outer-most edge of bell of next pipe.
C. Nonshrink grout joint: Joints shall be as specified for Portland cement mortar above,except using nonshrink
grout.
D. Asphalt mastic joint: Asphalt mastic joint shall be caulked with jute or oakum,and remainder of joint depth
filled with asphalt mastic. Jute or oakum may be omitted if joint space is completely filled with mastic,and a
continuous mastic bead is left around full circumference on both inside and outside surfaces of pipe. Surfaces of
pipe to be in contact with asphalt mastic shall be thoroughly clean and dry when mastic is placed in the joint.
Inside of pipe joints shall be left smooth an flush with pipe wall,completely free from obstruction to flow.
1. Placing of mastic joints shall lag at least five pipe sections behind pipe installation. Final four joints
shall be made up after last pipe section is in final position.
2. Mortar in bell and spigot pipe joints shall be bevelled off on outside of pipe at a 45 degree angle to
barrel. Mastic shall extend from barrel of one pipe to outer-most edge of bell of next pipe.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASINS&MANHOLE
A. General
All drainage structures to be constructed within this contract shall be as indicated on the drawings and location
shall be in strict accordance with the plans. Manholes and catch basins shall be plumb and vertical,with each
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-8
Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work,strictly conforming to the requirements for
trenching described in Section 02200 of these Specifications.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. General
Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and state DPW Standards.
Concrete pipe installation shall conform to Class B,Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual.
VC pipe installation shall conform to NCPA Manual for Figure 8,Class C Bedding Condition.
B. Approvals
No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect. Each pipe shall be subject to inspection by the
Architect immediately before it is laid,and defective pipe will be rejected. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades
and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into
trenches.
C. Controls
The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batterboards,laser equipment,or
parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet.
Grades and lines between points shall be set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls
shall be established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be 1 in
1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment,and approval shall be obtained from
the Architect before backfilling work commences.
D. Procedure
1. Before being laid,each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is not cracked,
permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid to conform to the lines and grades
indicated on the drawings or given by the Contracting Officer.
2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe
bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell.
3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts
continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with compacted crushed stone,graded in size
from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch,to obtain a substantially unyielding bed.
4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the various kinds and types of
pipe,the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before laying them
5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles,blocking,or stones.
6. Where a concrete cradle is used,the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so constructed as to provide
lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being placed.
Aowl 7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected,and approved.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-7
2.14 MORTAR FOR BRICKWORK
The mortar shall be composed of Portland Cement,hydrated lime,and sand,in which the volume of sand shall not exceed
three times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime. The proportions of cement and lime shall be 1 1/4.
Cement shall be Type II as previously specified.
Lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes,
Designation C 207. "Mortaseal"made by U.S.Gypsum or"4 Hydrate"made by the New England Lime Company shall
normally meet this specification.
The sand shall conform to the ASTM Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar,Designation C144.
2.15 ADJUSTING AND REMODELING OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Existing manhole and catch basin structures to be adjusted or remodeled shall be adjusted and remodeled in conformance
to MHD Specifications.
2.16 STORMWATER TREATMENT CHAMBERS
The stormwater treatment chamber shall be Stormceptor Model 4501,fitted with a catch basin frame and grate,or
approved equal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION '
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this section,carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all
such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and
regulations,the original design,the referenced standards,and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy,immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully
resolved.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design.
3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-6
Class A Concrete shall be used for all reinforced and plain concrete not otherwise specified or noted on the drawings.
Class A concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi,at 28 days with aggregates proportioned to
produce a dense and watertight concrete.
Class B concrete may be used wherever low-strength concrete can be allowed,including concrete fill under foundations
and elsewhere as specified or indicated on the drawings.
Class B concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi,at 28 days.
2.07 PORTLAND CEMENT
Cement shall be single brand of approved American made Portland Cement conforming to current specifications of
ASTM Standard Specification for Portland Cement,Designation C 150,Type II or,where required. Type III high early-
strength cement.
When used in the work,cement shall be free from lumps and partially or wholly set cement.
2.08 ADMIXTURES
The use of admixtures to improve workability,facilitate hardening of waterproofing,will not be permitted.
2.09 WATER
Clean,fresh water shall be used for mixing concrete.
2.10 FINE AGGREGATE
Concrete sand shall be clean,sound,sharp,screened,and well graded with no grain larger than will pass a 3/8 inch sieve.
Not more than 30 percent by weight shall pass a No.50 sieve.
2.11 COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall be washed screened gravel or crushed stone,hard,tough,durable,and having not more than 5
percent by weight of deleterious substances and soft fragments. Aggregate shall be well graded from the largest which
shall pass a 1 1/2 inch mesh to the smallest which shall pass a 3/8 inch mesh and not over 5 percent passing a 1/4 inch
mesh.
2.12 SAMPLES OF AGGREGATE
If required,the Contractor shall submit clearly labeled samples of sand and coarse aggregate to the Contracting Officer as
directed.. No aggregates shall be delivered or used before the samples have been approved and aggregates as delivered
shall in all respects be equal to the approved samples.
2.13 BRICK
The brick shall be good,sound,hard,and uniformly burned brick,regular and uniform in shape and size,of compact
texture and satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Brick shall be Grade SA conforming to the ASTM Standard
Specification for Sewer Brick(made from Clay or Shale),Designation C 32. In case the Contracting Officer rejects any
brick,the same shall be immediately removed from the worksite and brick satisfactory to the Contracting Officer
substituted. Brick shall be culled and completely piled as soon as delivered.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-5
D. Each section of the precast manhole shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and laying. These holes
shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation.
E. Monolithically pressure cast base sections shall be as shown on the drawings or as ordered by the Owner's
Representative. Holes for pipes shall be case in the base section so that there is a clear distance of four(4)inches
minimum between the inside bottom of the base section and the pipe invert.
F. The joint for the pipe at the base section shall consist of a cast iron compression flange together with cast iron
inserts(imbedded in the wall of the base section)and an"O"Ring(or approved equal)to provide a water tight
seal and to allow a flexible joint capable of deflecting a maximum of 9 degrees from center line of pipe.
G. 3/4"crushed stone foundation six(6)inches in depth is required under the pre-cast base at no additional cost.
H. Frames and covers shall be furnished and installed as specified under their respective items. A minimum of 12
inches red sewer brick shall be used under the frames. The grates shall fit so as to prevent rocking or unnecessary
space at the joints.
2.05 CATCH BASINS
A. Catch basins shall be constructed of the materials,size,form thickness and in the manner shown in the plan detail.
B. Precast concrete basins shall consist of pre-cast reinforced riser sections,haunched concentric cone top section,
and a base section conforming to the typical catch basin details. Where required by shallow installations or
directed by the Engineer,provide a flat slab top constructed to support HS-20 wheel loading.
C. Pre-cast catch basins shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Designation C 478. The minimum
compressive strength of the concrete for all sections shall be 4,000 psi of a 28 day test. The circumferential steel
reinforcement for riser sections and base walls shall be 0.17 square inch per linear foot. Reinforcing in the
bottoms of bases shall be of the same design.
D. Each section of the pre-cast catch basin shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and laying. These holes
shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation.
E. Type II cement to be used. Sections shall be set so as to be vertical and in true alignment. Joints shall be
completely mortared by buttering the groove and immediately prior to setting a section assuring a water tight
sump.
F. Catch basin connections to the manhole shall enter immediately above the shelf.
G. Red Sewer Brick shall be used in the catch basins. Limits of Class B Rock excavation will be six(6)inches below
and twelve(12)inches outside the base.
H. 3/4"crushed stone foundation six(6)inches in depth is required under the pre-cast base at no additional cost.
I. Traps,frames,grate and inlets shall be furnished and installed as specified under their respective items. A
minimum of 12 inches red sewer brick shall be used under the frames. The grates shall fit so as to prevent rocking
or unnecessary space at the joints.
2.06 CLASS OF CONCRETE
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-4
Aomk
Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers,with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,as approved by the Architect.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Construct drainage structures in accordance with Northampton DPW standards.
2.01 CASTINGS
A. The catch basin frame and grate shall be Model R-3570 Heavy Duty (approximate weight=300 pounds),as
manufactured by the Neenah Foundry Company,or approved equal that conforms to MHD Specifications.
B. The manhole frames and covers shall conform to MHD Specifications.
C. Traps shall conform to MHD requirements.
2.02 HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE
This pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the most recent AASHTO M294 Type S or SP specification. It shall
be constructed of high density polyethylene,and shall be seamless with a smooth interior waterway. It shall not be used
where the pipe will be exposed to sunlight.
2.03 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and subdrainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785 Standard Specifications for
PVC plastic pipe,Type I Schedule 40. Joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice
for Making Solvent-cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings.
2.04 MANHOLES
A. Precast reinforced concrete manholes shall consist of precast reinforced riser sections,a concentric or eccentric
top and a base section conforming with the typical manhole details.
Precast manhole section shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard Specification for Precast
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections,designation C 478. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete
for 4-foot diameter and for 5-foot diameter manholes for all sections shall be 4,000 psi. The circumferential steel
reinforcement for riser pipe,cone sections and base walls for the various sized manholes shall be as required by
ASTM Standard Specification for welded Steel Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement,Designation A 185 and shall
be as follows:
For 5-foot diameter manholes:
An area of 0.12 square inch per vertical foot reinforcement for the 4-foot diameter portion and an area of 0.17
square inch per vertical foot reinforcement for the 5-foot diameter portion of the manhole in both ell and spigot.
B. Reinforcing in the bottom bases shall be of the same design as that required for the various sized manholes.
Reinforcing shall extend into the tongue and groove of each manhole section.
C. Manhole steps shall be aluminum drop-front type as manufactured by Alcoa Aluminum Company(or approved
equal). All steps shall be cast into walls of the precast sections so as to form a continuous ladder with a distance
of twelve(12")inches between steps.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-3
Awk
C. Codes
The work shall be completed in accordance with standards and approval of the The City of Northampton
Department of Public Works.
D. Permits
The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required.
E. Inspection
All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible
for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local municipality and paying all fees associated with the
drainage system installation.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials List
After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to the job site,
manufacturer's product data shall be submitted.
1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item,furnish complete catalog cuts and technical
data,and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation.
2. Do not permit an storm drainage or sewerage co
P y g g component to be brought onto the job until it has been
approved by the Architect.
B. Record Drawings
1. During the course of installation,carefully show,in red line,on a print of the grading plan,all changes
made to the storm drainage system during installation.
2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation,these marked plans shall be supplied to the
Architect.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain
system materials before,during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements
In the event of damage,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Delivery and Storage
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-2
SECTION 02300
STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
The General Provisions of the Contract,including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1,apply to
the work specified in this Section.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide such
item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified,in
accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by addendum,
the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes,but is not necessarily
limited to:
- storm drainage pipe and field subdrains
- catch basins,manholes,storm drains and interconnecting lateral lines
- Stormwater Treatment Chambers
- testing
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Site Demolition,Clearing and Grubbing............................................Section 02100
Excavating,Filling&Grading...........................................................Section 02200
Bituminous Concrete Pavement.........................................................Section 02600
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of
the work in this Section.
B. Standards
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): Standard Specifications
for Highway Bridges
2. American Concrete Institute(ACI):Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete-318
3. American Concrete Pipe Association(ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual
4. Massachussetts Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges
5. City of Northampton Subdivision Standards
OPOK
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
STORM DRAINAGE 02300-1
at drum force
5000# 10,000#
Medium vibratory drum roller
minimum minimum 8" 18" 24" 6 6
weight dynamic
at drum force
10,000# 20,000#
*And no more than two-thirds(2/3)loose lift thickness.
3.10 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture(-1%to+3%).
Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift,and shall be adjusted as
necessary to obtain the specified compaction.
B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture
conditioned by sprinkling,disking,windrowing,or other method approved by the Engineer.
1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall
maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose.
C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and
compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow,discs,or
other approved methods,and air-dried to meet the above requirements.
D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above,but which display pronounced elasticity or
deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment,shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture
Content,or below,to secure stability.
E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather,exposed subgrades and fills which,in the opinion of
the Engineer become inundated or excessively moistened,shall have excess water removed and soil dried as
specified above.
F. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions.
3.11 CLEANING UP
Upon completion of the work of this Section,immediately remove all debris and excess earth materials from the site.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-11
C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following table:
Fill Area %of Maximum Dry Density
Pavement base course 95
Beneath pavement base course 92
Beneath landscape areas 90
D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item(base course,footing,
or structure),and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill,and enclosed by the following planes:
1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item(base course,footing,or structure),
within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item.
2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the
horizontal,to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages
of compaction overlap,that of the higher percentage shall apply.
E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill.
F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained.
G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started.
H. Grading tolerance
Rough Grade
Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft.
Grass areas plus/minus 0.10 ft.
Finish Grade
Pavement areas plus/minus 0.005 ft.
Grass areas plus/minus 0.05 ft.
3.09 COMPACTION METHODS
The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way
relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort
that is necessary.
Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum#passes
Below Below Less
Maximum Structures Less Critical Structures Critical
Stone Size* and Pavement Areas &Pavement Areas
Hand-operated vibratory plate or
light roller in confined areas 4" 6" 8" 4 4
Hand-operated vibratory drum
rollers weighing at least 1,000#
in confined areas 6" 10" 12" 4 4
Light vibratory drum roller
minimum minimum 8" 12" 18" 4 4
weight dynamic
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-10
C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal
and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night.
D. Except as otherwise noted,tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be+2 inches from true grade
indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 8"lift
maximum.
3.06 BEDDING
A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed
is less than full width of trench,Sand-Gravel shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the
trench,and shall be compacted with bedding material.
1. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation.
B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe,or otherwise,it shall be repaired to specified
grade,contour,and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it.
C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished,placed,and compacted under the
appropriate utility specification section. Bedding material to be Crushed Stone.
3.07 BACKFILL
A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking,timbering,forms,debris,and refuse
shall be removed before backfill is placed.
B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Engineer or Geotechnical Consultant have inspected
and approved subgrade,foundations,or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection
shall be given promptly,and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations.
C. In order to prevent lateral movement,care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to utility lines,
foundation walls and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the
same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling,the difference
in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches.
1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items.
2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand
the loads they will bear in completed project;they have not been designed to withstand construction loads
or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings.
D. Except as otherwise noted,tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be+ 2 inches from true grade
indicated,and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area.
1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus
2 inches.
2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 1 inch.
3.08 COMPACTION
A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557,Method C.
B. Except as otherwise noted,fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not
exceed specified thickness.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-9
°"'4,
standards. In materials where sloping walls are not stable,or tree damage may occur,trench walls shall be
supported by sheeting or trench box.
1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing
pipes or structures,the excavation below normal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the
Engineer may direct.
L. Rock excavation is not expected on this project. If rock is encountered,rock cuts shall be excavated in
accordance with MI-ID Specifications Section 120.63,Presplitting Rock. Use of explosives shall conform to
MHD Specifications Section 7.12 and as specified herein,and shall be in strict accordance with applicable laws
and ordinances. Explosives shall be stored on-site only when blasting is in progress. When the need for
explosives has passed,they shall be removed from the site.
1. Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the masonry and embankments to
be built and,if required,shall be cut to rough benches or steps.
2. Before masonry is built upon rock,the rock shall be made free of all vegetation,dirt,clay,shale,
excessively cracked rock,water,ice,snow and other objectionable substances. Picking,wedging,streams
of water under high pressure,stream jets,and other effective means shall be used to clean exposed rock.
3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings,rock shall be excavated to a depth 6 inches or more below
bottom of structures.
M. Below-ground Demolition
1. Underground construction,pipe,and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or
removed,shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items,not indicated on the Drawings;which impede
construction of new work indicated,shall be abandoned,demolished and/or removed only with the
approval of the Engineer.
2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be
stiff concrete,with a thickness,measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter,for pipe less than 18
inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in
diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged.Abandoned pipes
within proposed buildings(if existing)shall be removed or if left in place,they shall be properly grouted.
3.04 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Subgrade preparation for spread and continuous wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to minimize
disturbance of the silty/clayey subgrade. Dewater as necessary to provide stable subgrade.
B. After scarification of subsoil as noted above,and prior to any fill placement,proofroll/compact the exposed subgrade
with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds(static weight). If
soft and unstable material is observed,it should be overexcavated and replaced with Granular Fill,compacted as
specified herein at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level,they should be re-excavated
and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel Fill prior to foundation construction or fill
placement.
3.05 PLACING EMBANKMENTS
A. Filling shall be done any area only after the Engineer or Geotechnical Consultant has reviewed subgrade.
B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical shall be keyed or A"�
benched into the existing slope not less than 5 feet to prevent the formation of slippage planes.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-8
3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested,inspected and approved,make all repairs and
replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of
uncovering,all at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Stripping of Topsoil
Any topsoil within"Limits of Work"and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped,cleaned of all
rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in fmish grading.
3.02 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES
Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines,to the required tolerances.
Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and,if displaced or lost,immediately replace to the approval of the
Engineer,at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.03 EXCAVATING
A. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable
material shall be removed and disposed of off the site.
B. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions-where depressions result from,or have resulted from,the
removal of surface or subsurface obstructions,open the depression to equipment working width and remove all
debris and soft material as directed by the Engineer.
C. Sheeting,shoring,bracing,pumping,bailing,and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain
excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete,utility lines,and fill/backfill
materials,shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas
only.
D. Sheeting shall be installed,where required,to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations and where
adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging of the tree. Sheeting,including
necessary wales and struts,shall be selected and designed by the Contractor.Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed
minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards.
E. Structures,pipes,pavement,earth,and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be
braced,underpinned,and supported as required to prevent damage and movement.
F. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures,excavation shall be done by hand tools.Such
manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made.
G. As excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material.
H. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding
material.
I. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels(over-excavation),shall be filled to those levels with
compacted Granular Fill.
J. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill,concrete footing,structure,or other construction becomes
softened,disturbed,or unstable,unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced
with suitable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from further
disturbance until construction item is placed.
K. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set,place,and remove forms for concrete,install piping,or
perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the
outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-7
2.04 SAND-GRAVEL
Sand-Gravel-shall consist of durable sand and gravel and shall be free from ice and snow,roots, sod,rubbish and other
deleterious or organic matter. Sand-Gravel shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
3 inch 100
1/2 inch 50-85
No.4 40-75
No.40 10-35
No.200 0-8
2.05 CRUSHED STONE
Crushed Stone shall consist of durable crushed rock or durable crushed gravel stone and
shall be free from ice and snow,clay,loam and other deleterious or organic matter. Crushed Stone shall conform to the
following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90- 100
1/2 inch 10-50
3/8 0-20
#4 0-5
2.06 GRAVEL BASE COURSE Aft�
Gravel base course for roadway and sidewalk construction shall comply with the relevant sections of Section 02600
Bituminous Pavement and MHD requirements,Section M1,sub-section M1.03.0,Type"b".
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Prior Familiarization
Prior to all work of this Section,become thoroughly familiar with the site,the site conditions,and all portions of
the work falling within this Section.
B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related
thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent
destruction. Elevations shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans.
C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals
1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of
Section prior to all required inspections,tests and approvals.
2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved,uncover all such work at
no additional cost to the Owner.
Awk
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-6
materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or
rejection,shall be at the Contractor's risk.
1.15 DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED OR FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade,underlying natural soils and
compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods of construction shall be revised as necessary to
avoid disturbance described above,including restricting construction access and types of vehicles or equipment,
dewatering,or other acceptable control measures. Disturbance shall be construed to include detereoration of soils
due to the contractor's operations,such as moving equipment,hauling,etc. The contractor shall cooperate with
the engineer to modify operations as necessary to minimize disturbance and protect bearing soils.
B. All excavated or filled areas that are disturbed during construction,including all loose or saturated soils,fill that
cannot be compacted within 48 hours due to saturation and other areas that will not meet compaction requirements
as specified herein shall be removed and replaced with compacted Granular Fill Sand-Gravel,or Crushed Stone at
the Contractor's expense..
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIAL,GENERAL
A. Approval Required
All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIAL,ORDINARY BORROW
A. Common fill/ordinary borrow material shall be well graded,natural inorganic soil,approved by the Engineer and
meeting the following requirements:
1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials,of frozen materials,and of stones larger
than six inches maximum dimensions.
2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities.
3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays,from all materials subject to decay,decomposition,or dissolution
and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal.
4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs.per cubic foot.
B. Re-use of excavated on site common fill is dependent upon meeting compaction criteria.
2.03 GRANULAR FILL
Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow,roots,sod,rubbish and other deleterious
or organic matter.Granular Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
2/3 of the loose lift thickness 100
No. 10 30-95
No.40 10-70
No.200 *0- 15 (*0-8 where used behind walls)
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-5
1.12 FROST PROTECTION
Frozen,excessively moist or material containing snow shall not be placed as fill or backfill. Special care should be taken
when placing fill material when the temperature is below 320F.
1.13 SHORING AND SHEETING
A. Provide shoring,sheeting and/or bracing at excavations,as required,to prevent collapse of earth at site of
excavations.
B. Comply with federal,state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety and Heath Act
(OSHA).
C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like,as backfilling operations progress,taking all necessary precautions to
prevent collapse of excavation sides.
1.14 DEFINITIONS
A. Subgrade-shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil, excavation,and prior
to filling,or placement of roadway subbase.In proposed building area,subgrade shall be soil or rock which
remains after stripping of top soil and subsoil.
B. Embankment-shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed subgrade elevations.
Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and cross-section.
C. Utility Trench Backfill-is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the cover material over the
respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform with applicable requirements for embankment,structural ,
backfill or utility company requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed.
D. Unsuitable Material-material which is classified as "unsuitable"shall be material having at least one of the
following properties:
1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb.as determined by ASTM D 1557.
2. Material containing visible organic matter,topsoil,organic silt,peat,construction debris,roots and stumps.
3. Material which has a Liquid.Limit greater than 50.
4. Material designated in the field by the Geotechnical Consultant.
E. Topsoil-The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation as evidenced by the
existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter.
F. Subsoil-loose silt and fine dand layer located directly below the topsoil.
1.15 COORDINATION
A. Prior to start of earthwork,the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Engineer for the purpose of
establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements.
B. As construction proceeds,the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Engineer prior to start of earthwork
operations requiring inspection and/or testing.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and
transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of ..
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-4
1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall provide,at his own expense,adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated
areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures
or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades.
B. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and
subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage(minimum 1.0%slope)shall be maintained at all times.
C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through the temporary sediment basins in such a manner as
will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property,not to the surface of roads,walks,and
streets,not cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent
shall not cause erosion or siltation.
D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills,pour concrete,or install piping and appurtenances in
excavations containing free water.
E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment,in good working order,available at all times to remove water.
F. Where,in the opinion of the Engineer,pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry,firm
subgrade,other acceptable dewatering methods shall be employed.
1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on-site observation and testing
during the following phases of the construction operations. The services of the testing laboratory may include,but
not be limited to,the following:
1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab areas.
2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades.
3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills.
4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified,as required.
5. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas.
6. Observe construction and perform water content,gradation,and compaction tests at a frequency and at
locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Engineer,
copy to the Contractor,on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to
remedy indicated deficiencies.
7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather.
B. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor,his
employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency,nor any observations and testing performed by
him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work.
C. Compaction Control
Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified,it shall be the in-place dry density
divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100.
D. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Standard Methods of
Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil Using 10-1b.Rammer and 18-inch Drop,Designation D1557-78.
(Method C).
E. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of
Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method,Designation D1556-82 or ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of
,. Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods,Designation D2922-81.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-3
6. Filling and backfilling as required for walls,including furnishing of any extra material
required.
7. Base and subbase course materials under structures,pavements, slabs and
footings,including compaction.
8. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material.Excavation shall include
removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughout
the site.
9. Removal,hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subsequent use
in the work.
10. All rehandling,hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling,filling,
backfdling,grading and other such operations.
11. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required.
12. Rock excavation and disposal.
1.07 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
A. Site Demolition,Clearing and Grubbing..........................................................Section 02100
B. Bituminous Concrete Pavement.......................................................................Section 02600
C. Topsoil for Seeding..........................................................................................Section 02850
1.08 SUBMITTALS
Submit a 50 lb. sample of each type of fill(off-site and on-site)to testing laboratory in an air tight container at least seven
(7)days prior to use. Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any
change in source throughout the project requires written approval by the Engineer or engineer.
1.09 JOB CONDITIONS
A"
A. Dust Control
1. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all off-site borrow areas,if
such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the work or if resulting from the
condition in which the Contractor leaves the site.
2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public,neighbors and
concurrent performance or other work on the site.
B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities
1. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other
property and existing improvements such as,but not limited to : streets,curbs,paving,trees,utility lines
and structures,monuments,bench marks and other public and private property,and to protect existing
structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement,lateral earth movement,undermining,
washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work,the Contractor shall,at his own
expense,make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of,and without cost to the Owner. Existing
roads,sidewalks,and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original
condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace,at his cost,existing bench marks,
monuments,and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.
3. Buried structures,utility lines,etc.,including those which project less than 18 inches above grade,which
are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard.
Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas,by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks
and other construction equipment,and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project. Ao%k
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING,GRADING 02200-2
SECTION 02200
EXCAVATING,FILLING AND GRADING
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 -General Requirements,of
which this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED
A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section,provide
such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work
specified,in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation.
1.03 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT
A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications,or within either Document not clarified by
addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided,in accordance with the Engineer's
interpretation
1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site,consult records and drawings of adjacent structures
and of existing utilities and their connections,and note all conditions which may influence the work of this
Section.
B. By submitting a bid,the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting
work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of
existing conditions.
C. The Contractor may,at his own expense,conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own
information.
1.05 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED
A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions,natural phenomena,and
existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for
the information and convenience of the Contractor,and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not
guaranteed.
B. Plans,surveys,measurements,and dimensions under which the work is to be performed are believed to be correct,
but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period,as no additional compensation
will be made for errors and inaccuracies may be found therein.
1.06 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavating,filling and grading required for this work includes,but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Clearing and preparation of site.
2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
3. Protection of embankments,environmental controls.
4. Excavation:
a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated.
b. Excavation and backfill of utilities.
5. General exterior rough grading,cutting and filling required.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
EXCAVATING,FILLING AND GRADING 02200-1
jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits,licenses and certificates and give all notices
as required during the performance of the demolition work.
3.02 DEMOLITION
All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Damaged items
shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner.The contractor shall take possession of
all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same.
3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING-GENERAL
A. Cut down all trees and brush,as designated on the plans. Remove all stumps and debris,and remove from the
property. No burning of materials will be permitted on the site.
B. The felling of trees shall be carefully carried out so as to avoid any damage to trees that are to remain,or to any
wetlands areas.
C. Remove from the site all brush,rubbish,pavement,concrete or masonry foundations designated to be removed.
D. The limits of clearing shall be confirmed and approved in the field by the Architect prior to clearing operations.
3.04 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval of the Engineer.
3.05 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE
Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re-use shall be carefully removed as
to not damage,scratch or otherwise mar the object in any way,and then shall then be stored by the Contractor until such
time as the Contractor is ready for installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any
other necessary installation procedures required for the complete,safe use of the item installed.
END OF SECTION
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE DEMOLITION,CLEARING&GRUBBING 02100-3
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 OTHER MATERIALS
All materials,not specifically described,but required for proper completion of the work of this Section,shall be as
selected by the Contractor,subject to approval of the Engineer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notification
Notify the Owner at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section.
B. Site Inspection
Prior to all work of this Section,carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to
be preserved.
C. Clarification
1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site.
2. Before commencing the work of this Section,verify with the Engineer all objects to be removed and all
objects to be preserved.
D. Scheduling
1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Owner. Before
commencing any work,submit a schedule for review to the Engineer showing the commencement,the
order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work.
2. Avoid interference with use of,and passage to and from,adjacent buildings and facilities.
3. Prior to any work performed on the site,the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the following number, 1-
800-322-4844.
E. Disconnection of Utilities
Before starting site operations,disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be
removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of the work,as shown in the drawings,
performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved.
F. Protection of Utilities
Preserve,in operating condition,all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to be disconnected.
G. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules,regulations,codes and ordinances of local,State
and Federal Authorities,and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility Corporations having
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE DEMOLITION,CLEARING&GRUBBING 02100-2
SECTION 02100
SITE DEMOLITION,CLEARING&GRUBBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to General Requirements of which
this section is hereby made a part.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Work by General Contractor
Demolition,clearing and grubbing required for this work includes,but is not necessarily limited to removal and
disposal,removal and delivery to the Owner,or removal and reuse of the following:
1. Bituminous pavement
2. Signs
3. Trees,shrubs,vegetation
4. Debris and rubble within project
5. Other items as noted on the drawings
B. Related Work Described Elsewhere
Excavating,Filling and Grading......................................................................Section 02200
C. Definitions
The term"demolition,clearing and grubbing,"as used herein,includes the removal of all existing objects(except
for those objects designated to remain)down to the existing ground level,including their underground root
systems,plus such other work as is described in this Section of these Specifications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Oualifications
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition operations and'who shall be
thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure
coordination with the applicable utility agencies.
B. Codes and Standards
In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations,comply with the requirements of those insurance
carriers providing coverage for this work.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Dust and Mud Control
Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during performance of the work of the Section;
thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent mud and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents
AOW and the neighbors.
Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
SITE DEMOLITION,CLEARING&GRUBBING 02100- 1
§14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.
§14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the
Contractor shall:
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and ,esrvation of the Work;
and
.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termiaiati n stated in the
notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter intomo er subcontracts
and purchase orders.
§14.4.31n case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be en'tle, to receive payment
for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonabl 'ovv ead and profit on
the Work not executed.
r
p
t �
i
AIA Document A201" - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1967 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. i7ARNING: This k Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 39
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of
days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. Am-*
§14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14:1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days'
written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work
executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery,
including reasonable overhead,profit and damages.
§14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault o'the€Contractor or a
Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work un er contract
with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligati(
Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may, pon seven additional
days'written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover fro Owner as provided
in Section 14.1.3.
§14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
§14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:
.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled v or rs or Proper
materials;
.2 -fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance wit the respett
agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a piablLthorJ ha .
jurisdiction;or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
§14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient caus
exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and aft in the
Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days'written notice,terminate employment o on I r -low,
and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and constructi i ment an
machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and
.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon reque the
Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by
the Owner in finishing the Work. ,�-
§14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14. �'I,the Contractor shwa
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
§14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,inclt�dm compensatio or
the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and t
expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid b ance,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contract r 40 Owner,as th case
may be, shall be certified by the Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payme shall survive
termination of the Contract.
§14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or int ptthe Work in
whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
§14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost andtimp caused by
suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sutra shall include
profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent: �
.1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or intetraptl by another cause
for which the Contractor is responsible;or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of th
AIA Document A201- - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 193e, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNINC: This hie Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
Internaticral Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 38
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
§13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary
by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
§13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise req ' y the Contract
Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
§13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contra Documents,the
Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing.
§13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made;ron ptly to avoid
unreasonable delay in the Work.
§13.6 INTEREST
§13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from th a payment is due at
such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rat( ailing fr m e to
time at the place where the Project is located.
§13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
§13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor.
.1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior both zetevarrUad of
Substantial Completion,any applicable statute of limitations shall commend
cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of
Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act
occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance a final
Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to any a ed
cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not lat an th 10
issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring a e relev to of
issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable.statute of limitations sh ence t
run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events no
than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under
Section 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor
under Section 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to-peffe any duty or
obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
§14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
§14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents cr employees o any
other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract 'ith ItheCo for,for
any of the following reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction
be stopped;
.2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Wor
stopped;
3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not no ' ed tkC ntract
the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Confracf Documents;or
.4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable
evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.
§14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a u contra or,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing
under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work
AIA Document A2011- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937: 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and 37
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and wi11 be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish
the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
§12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
§12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which the Contract Sum
will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or got I inal payment has
been made.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§13.1 GOVERNING LAW
§13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located
§13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
§13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,=1 gns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal repre fives of such other
party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents Except as pr ded
in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without ` en cons ev Except -
other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party all neverthel4ss main
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
§13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to an instilionWhenden roviding------�
construction financing for the Project.In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obl tions
under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such
assignment.
§13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
§13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the in ' ' or a r
of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if deliver or y
registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice.
§13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
§13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies in
there
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or availab
by law.
§13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a w er of a righ r du
afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval If or cqui en a
breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
§13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
§13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Doc ents or I s,
ordinances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be male an a ro�iatt time.
Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspecti and approvals with an��
independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public "r
bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such pry
Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until-a`°iter bids are
received or negotiations concluded.
§13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that porrionsof the Work require
additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect vill, 'pon written
authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additionalesting,inspection
or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice tolhe Architect of i
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for suc``fi—pr-pr ch
costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense.
AIA Document A2010 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA� Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 36
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
§11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment
of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a
copy to be made.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
§12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to require en specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be un ove ed for the
Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.
§12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically rpqupstedto-exams ---�
prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncov red by the Contractor.If
such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacendentshall,by appropriate
Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the ConDocuments,
correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the OwnehYa separate contractor
in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
§12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
§12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing tc coi form to
requirements of the Contract Documents,whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and ivhedier or
not fabricated,installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including ad litio�an&
inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary the
Contractor's expense.
§12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date o
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commence of w tie
established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by on cum is
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Docum the Contra or
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the , has p ' usl
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice prom after
discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify th
Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require
correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the or
Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.
§12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work t
performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Comple"on nd the actaal
performance of the Work.
§12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective or erfformed by
Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.
§12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted b e �or
12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, ethCompleted
partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work
which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of lhnita'on with respect to
other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents.Establislme4t of the one-year
period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation o e on c or i
to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to compl�
AIA Document A201°- 1991. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951, 1956, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. NARNINC: This A19 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 35
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A19 Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
-OWN I-
§11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other
special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such
insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
§11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent
to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if-after final payment
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies ckhe than those insuring
the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with a terms of Section
11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. I
§11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy c f each policy that
includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable
conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall ci intain a provision
that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduc*mtil at least 30 days'
prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.
§11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)ea o er and anytiy otheir
subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Arhi ct,Archi ct'
consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,Sub-subcolatra tors,
agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered>y propert+in"ce
obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,+cept-sach-ri'ghts s drey
have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or ContractdZ_U=prgpXigtgjha11
require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the
subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,wChal
legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The polici
provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effe
person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnificatio tr
otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the on or
insurable interest in the property damaged.
§11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduci payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just sinsurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally requreor
validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar m
§11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occ ence1�an used ss,
give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall b char against
proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so rece' ed,which the
Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may read, in accordance with
an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If aftei su4h loss no I r
special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,r�pl ement of eed
property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work inccordance with Article
7.
§11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one
interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise Ft6is power;if such
objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided.in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as dticia" ry shall;"
the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitra, rs.If distribution
of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
§11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
§11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of
the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or spec is y
required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. i
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNINC: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 34
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197-1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
§11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner,
Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the
proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
§11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or othei ons or entities as
additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1.
§11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE
§11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company o companies a y
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance v '
risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus vaI4 osubsequent Contract
modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for tl*1 entire Project at the
site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.Such property insurance shall be raintained,unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all personsentities who are
beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9 r until no person or
entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11 to be covered,
whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subc n ctors and Sul
subcontractors in the Project.
§11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall includ ,with im tion,
insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage inclu , t
duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood, �Sx�k.
testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and
expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
§11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Con d wi o
the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in 90A
commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect e�of the
Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change er the e o
shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner t chase r
maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shal all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
§11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered b u7othe h
deductibles.
§11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site;and iso portiorWo
in tra nsit. 1.
§11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence untilthemsurance omany
or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement oar
otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of. insurance company or
companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy
would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance.
§11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and m lfinery assurance
required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured o ' cg
installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of re wner,Contractor,
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall belnatned insureds.
§11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will
insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The i
Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,mc7um9
consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused.
AIA Document A201s'— 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WNING: This &19 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Lax and 33
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AiA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
§10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of
a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the OMNI*,
Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.
§10.6 EMERGENCIES
§10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at llre-Contractor's
discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by
the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.31 nd rticle 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
§11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies la JeC ly authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect to trac tor from claims
set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Conct and for which
the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a contractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of 1 may be liable:
.1 claims under workers'compensation,disability benefit and other similar em;&oy a benefit ac'is which
are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or diseas ,o death of e
Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death In person of er
the Contractor's employees; i
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself;because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property,including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property d<on g out of
ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operat
.8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor' der
Section 3.18.
§11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of 'fled m th Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater.Coverages,whetheoccurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of com of the Wor until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after l pyyt.
§11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior tcS comme ecn rqent of
the Work.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall cvn a pro 'sio�' f
coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at leas 30 p ays'prioAwriten
notice has been given to the Owner.If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are require toiremain in Force er
final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of�such coverageshall
be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.Information concerning'reduction
of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or bot ,still be finished by
the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information land belief.
§11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability in�uxan
§11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE ,✓
§11.3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project an gement Protective
Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and
Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract.Unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sumto pay the cost of
purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not to responsible for
purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum limits of liability purc ase wi '
such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability..i
Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright -O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This A7A" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AL1 Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 32
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the max-,mum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order N0.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
,^+way
§10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
§10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are
necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on�sceeh activities under
supervision of properly qualified personnel.
I
§10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss' ured under property
insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 d'I0.2.1 caused m
whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directl or' ' y pUWed
by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is sponsible under
Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Ye# er or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts eithet m may be liable,
and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations o ontractor are in
addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18.
§10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the-Contractor's organization a the site- osi duty
shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated
by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. I
§10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded
safety.
§10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
§10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons
resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl ,
•. encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition, ' atel p
Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence bsence o in erial
or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be ptesekt,to ve '
that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall ' h in
writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests
verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe
containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply weer in
writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities propo d by the Owner.If
either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,�tlre"b r s
propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.Wensthe matertl
substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written gr ement of tU Owner
and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum s all.16 increasId iq the
amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which a'djustmenq shall be
accomplished as provided in Article 7.
§10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmles ,
Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,
damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting Dmm- .
performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the ris�bodily injury or
death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such a' age,loss o
expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction tangible property
(other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not due to th'sole negligence of a
party seeking indemnity.
§10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the
Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A2011- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNINC: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Al- Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 31
oivil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further
representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment
have been fulfilled.
§9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other irbdebtedness connected
with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or enc umbered(less amounts
withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that i uiiance required by the
Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will no be anceled or allowed
to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a writt statement at the
Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cov;the
the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if requirey a Owner,other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of lie ,claims,security
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as mayllbe esignated by the
Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the or may fuunish a
bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien rema' atisfied after
payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be ornpelle d 15-1 iay in
discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys'fees.
§9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially lela yed throui h ne fault
of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Arch ect so confin is,t ie
Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and wi ut th
Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed an ccented.If the =
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents,and if bonds have been famished,the written consent of surety to payment of t<or e for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to thrior to
certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions gov ht,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
§9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner exceng from:
.1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract ,.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Docume.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
§9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier saconsute a
waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that pa ettled at
the time of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
§10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safe precautio'is and-
programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.
§10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide re
prevent damage,injury or loss to:
.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; r..-----
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in stone on or off the
site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcoo c rs o SuDb subcontractors;and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks, avements,
roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or r�l 'ement in the
of construction.
§10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rul s,re a ions an
orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection fro
AIA Document A2011— 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This.AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 30
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294290731)
§9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the
Work for its intended use.
§9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner.grew to accept
separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Archite`w a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such Ili s does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu�nerits.
§9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine
designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not
included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contact Documents so
that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use the Contractor
shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such�n upon notification
by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspecth7 y the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion.
§9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Archite wi I prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Complefiun, hall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,dam e t the Wor an
insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the lis ac th`
Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of
of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
§9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their writt
acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of ,if
any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion the Such e t
shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of Con ocument .
§9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
§9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at tage w en
such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is co ted
to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over th
Work.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided
the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of th=ave ents,
retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,an ree
writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warrantiesequue n ct
Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractoil prepare-an
submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to Oartial occupancy orb e
shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined ty written 2gre ment
between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Archit ct.
§9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect
the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record
Work.
§9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the W -shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Document. '`.
§9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
§9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and accept ce and upon receipt of
a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,whelp th6 Architect finds the i
Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Archttec'will promptly issue
a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,informa ione RET,—afia on
the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in aL=Iance with
conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the
AlA Document A2010 - 1997. Copyright a 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This A19 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 29
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under order No.1000144197_1which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or
equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contracl Tir ie,and that the
unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Doci ments.
§9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will bemade for amounts
previously withheld.
§9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make paymttt'in the manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect.
§9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from thi�Owner,o at the
amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the o� t to whii,h s id
Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Conga or on acc unt 01
such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,b appropriate eement with
r y �'
require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. !
§9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on
account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
§9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payMnL of m to a
Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
§9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sectio 2, 9. . aild
9.6.4.
§9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum f tb�n
payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppAers shall beheld
the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,lnd
contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall re°qu' e
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,sliall create any
fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall enitl erso or -ntLty
to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
§9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
§9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,w
after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Con for within seven
days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Archite or ed by
arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owne an Architect,stop the
Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extendd appropriately and
the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of slut-down,delay and
start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201m - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and 28
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order N0.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material
suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.
§9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in
the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of
the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders.
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work fer ich the Contractor
§ PP Y q P Ym P
does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been rfo ned by others
whom the Contractor intends to pay.
§9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on a¢Ico r t of materials and
equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Worl I�pproved in advance
by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored iff the site at a location
agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall conditioned upon
compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Om title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the cos s o applicabl"�
insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored oil e site.
§9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Paymen t wil pass to t ie C wner
no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of al Ap lication f or
Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and pa ent eiveftol I
Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and
security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work.
§9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
§9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Pa either e
the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the itect 'a j is
properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for certification
in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Own
based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Wor
has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the
quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representatio ect to an
evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Com etion,to results of
subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents pinor oaap ion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Paym nt will flfrh
constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified However,the Issu�ice
of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or cont�uo(is on-
site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means, 'methods,tochn ques,
sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors Wbaterial s pliers
and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or 4)made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on acco unr.—-- --
§9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
§9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent r onably necessary
to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required b Se citi .4.2 canno
be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the tlrch'ect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised
amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to
make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for 1'ayient or,because of
subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to
such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss 0 wf Rc a on c or is it
responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,be
.1 defective Work not remedied;
AIA Document A2010- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This A19 Document is pro'tacted by U.S. Copyright law and 27
im
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A19 Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and crinal panalti ax es, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
ARTICLE 8 TIME
§8.1 DEFINITIONS
§8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in
the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
§8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
§8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordan cle ,kh Section 9.8.
§8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless ot=ingthe ,
defined.
§8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
§8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By �em ent
the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the WT ! I
§8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owne in vnting,prematurely
commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance requ d bey Article 1 to be
famished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not t a changed by he
effective date of such insurance.Unless the date of commencement is established by the Co itrapt Documents r a
notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not I ess tharrfive-tl ys 01 ---
other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,: ] �
other security interests.
§8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completio
within the Contract Time,
§8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
§8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work b act or negle ct
the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed b Owne ,
changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable cas es or o he,
causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbi or
by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by
Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
§8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Se ' n 4.3.
§8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party and dth re pro sio of
the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
§9.1 CONTRACT SUM
§9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,ems the total amount
payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract D
§9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
§9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a s dule of values
allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data Ito sub mate its y
accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shill b ,used as a basis for
reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
§9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
§9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the sc e e o v ues.
Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating '
AIA Document A201° - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 2 6
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
§7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be
based on one of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutuallyceeptable fixed or
percentage fee;or
.4 as provided in Section 7.3.6.
§7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed wi e c ange in
the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement Vrith t wmestl a---,
provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in a ontract Sum or
Contract Time.
§7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement o e Contractor
therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for detex ffllrOng them. Such
agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. I
§7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjusti ieni in the Coi ktra Sum,
the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable dypenditures aild
savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an in cease in the C n ct
Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under Section J.13`1, eu i Cto
shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting;txg ha mdtb
appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this
Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance;
.2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,wheth corpo o
consumed;
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether r to the CoJ ct rr
or others;
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar elate to
the Work;and
.5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
§7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or chan results in a
net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.Whe oth additions and
credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for o erhegdro� 1
be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change.
§7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amopn%not in
dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompan=tthatre g
Order indicating the parties'agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of suc cnsin
dispute,the A rchitect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those
costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Chan ,
right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4.
§7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect con rnmg the
adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the �ustpaits such
agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and executi o of appropriate
Change Order.
§7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjLinthe
Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the( ontrac ocumen .
Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contracre bon
shall carry out such written orders promptly.
AIA Document A2010 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNINC-: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 25
international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/l/05, and is not for resale.
User Noise: (3294240731)
§6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by
the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly
report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable
for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that
the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit an er to receive the
Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
§6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner witichl are payable to a
separate contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction Dftlie Contractor.TEE
Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because o F de 1y—.--
timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor.
§6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor o completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in 9MV on 10.2.5.
§6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutt ng d patc i g are
described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.
§6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
§6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to t—hi re ponsibilit r er
their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from wast m rub
the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
§7.1 GENERAL
§7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidat e
Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the W ubject the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and 'ect;a clio
Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to e
Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the
Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Constructio Directive
or order for a minor change in the Work.
§7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
§7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the er,Contra or d
Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and
.3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time.
§7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3.
§7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
§7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed b er an
Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Con t Sum or Contract
Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invali dating the ot ct,order changes
in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or ot ier visions,the
Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
§7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on 1,he tdr—msbt a ange
Order.
AIA Do A2011 - 1997. Copyright 0 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937; 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This ALA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document, or any portion of it, may result in severs 24
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
§5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
' §5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by
terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents,
assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontract ,unless specifically
provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redi6ss 6gainst the
Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where zppropnate,the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcantractcan 'The-
Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and upon written equest of the
Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may
be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of aWcable portions of
such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
§5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS F1
§5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor o tI Owner ovtded
that:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner fDr cause pursuant
Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner acepts by_� . ng ire-------
Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the
Contract.
§5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor'
,,ow compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
§6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACF
§6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to th e Project wi Owner's
own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other cons or
operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those
portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provide on 4.3.
§6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other cortstruetion o pe
on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes
each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. I I
§6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forcesan a of each separate
contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor, a1 artici ate with
other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when diected to do so.The
Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed nece rt-review
agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate
contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised.
§6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs Con�ttuctiprr or operation
related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations
and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Cont act„including,without
excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. I I I
�° §6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
§6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity or m o uc ion an3 "'"
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall conn.
Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201"'- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute.of Architects. All rights reserved. NAMINC4 This A19 Document is protected by U.S, copyright Law and 23
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, nay result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
§4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include,
by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants,except
by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect,Owner,Contractor
and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any
other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other
persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is requiredif complete relief is
}
to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a sepirati contractor as
described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party toan arbitration whose
interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not
constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity got n ed or describea
therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an addi�io
duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicabl law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
§4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbi ion must assert in the
demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demand
§4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall r e fImmal,and j dent
may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction ere f.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§5.1 DEFINITIONS
§5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor tq�
Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor"
does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
§5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subc ctor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throu ut the ct
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized represen of the Sub-
subcontractor.
§5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as
practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of
persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a spe )
proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Co ctor in writing
stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable ob cti to such
proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute nonce of no
reasonable objection.
§5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect-has made
reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyo a tam whom the
Contractor has made reasonable objection.
§5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the
Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the prs�s
rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum am tract Time shall
be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appro ate ange Oar rd
shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no cr. e in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promplie and responsively
in submitting names as required.
§5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if Owner or
Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute.
a
AIA Document A2011— 1997. Copyright O 1911 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 22
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000199197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3299240731)
§4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the reasons therefor and
which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection
of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration.
§4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject-to mediation and
arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after
the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure 16 demand arbitration
within said 30 days'period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and bindi upon the Owner and
Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initia ed,suc ecision may
be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision A acce
concerned.
§4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect o the Owner may,but
is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Cl relates to a
possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,mmfy the surety and
request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy.
¢4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such C1 Lim nay proceed i
accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolu ion of th Cle im by
the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration.
§4.5 MEDIATION
§4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those
waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days
after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or
institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party.
§4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the p s mu agree
otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the Anderi bitration
Association currently in effect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other t"pazto trot
and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing a demand
for arbitration but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable pro . gs,
which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer
period by agreement of the parties or court order.
§4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in rpaocse
where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reach m m iat be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§4.6 ARBITRATION
§4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetc a ect and a c
waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Ar hit ct or 30 dAys after
submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the p14rdes shall endeavor to
resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5.
§4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mu
otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the Amer*-Arbitration
Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other p to the "
Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Pc ct.
§4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 411.6�nd 4.6.1 as
applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made
after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim wouldbe arced by the
applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7. {
i
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 21
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
Usar Notes: (3294240731)
§4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
§4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided
herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on
progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary.
§4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim hall be documented
by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could t hive been reasonably
anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
§4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injuny or damage to person or
property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such p
responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within
a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient de ' to enable the other
party to investigate the matter.
§4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,andM aantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Vre so th it
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequi° to the Own or
Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
§4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims agate Lst 4ach other or -
consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income '
business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of
such persons;and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of
personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of
except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work
This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either s termination in
accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to pre an a �f
liquidated direct damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Do nts.
§4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
§4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims,including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding
those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5,shall be referred initially to the Architect for dec" ' initial
decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration litigation c all
Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due,unl ss ys ve ed
after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by e ArchitectTh
Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than e�wner.
§4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim takc one or more c f the
following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response wi h supportin data trom
the other party,(2)reject the Clain in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest ag compromise,or(5)
advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks s
evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be
inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim.
§4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or ek info hon from
either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect' nderhng a
decision.The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the er's expense.
§4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional upporthng data,
such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide response on the
requested supporting data,advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be fim—E a or a vise a
Architect that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting-data,
Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.
AIA Document A2021 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1967 and.1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 20
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
§4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of,the
Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests
will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If no
agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in
compliance with this Section 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish
such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them.
4.2.12 interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable
§ rP , � Y
from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations
and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner imd-Contractor,wi
not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions io r
§4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consi to with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents. 17
§4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
§4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a mat of right,ad a trient or
interpretation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with rt spelt to the t I lof the
Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between thi.Owner and C ontfactor
arising out of or relating to the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
§4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after
giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,
whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party.
§4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed' Ting
or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfo ce of
Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract en
§4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the s ich ar
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicate Contract
Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those or
found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions
are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after fast observance of the conditions.The Arc 1 promptly
investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in die Conks cost
of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable Adjustmen ' thei
Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at tt a sife are not materi
different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms o the Contract i j led,
the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims b either party
opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given1notice of the decision.If
the conditions encountered are materially different,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall lie equitabF ad`uste
but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Con�ract Time,the
adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further pro
Section 4.4.
§4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in th ep ontract Sum,
written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior fioticce t require
for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.67
§4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not lui pited to(1)a written
interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,
(3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5)
termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable g oun aIl"Ei;�
filed in accordance with this Section 4.3.
AIA Document A2011— 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. NARNINC: This Ale Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 19
T_nternatioral Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that
the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will
not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.
The Architect will neither have control over or charge of,nor be responsible for,the construction means,methods,
techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since
these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,eFc t as provided in
Section 3.3.1.
§4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Wo in. ccordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be
responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or empl° ee
persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
§4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in a he Contract
Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and,-'tractor shall
endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out o elating to the
Contract.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Arclite .Co mmu lca'ons
by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Commumica ions by th
separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
§4.2.5 Based on the Architects evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,th Architect wi I re view
and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amo duLb.
§4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever
the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of
the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or
completed.However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to e e or
not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Con or, ,
Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other pers or ent' ' erfo
portions of the Work.
§4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's ttals suc
as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for co and
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be take
with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,Contractor or
separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to pe quate
review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the acc and completeness
other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installatton pe ognance
equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by tht Contract
Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Conoctgr of the obliga
under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precauti on or, ess
otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods,techniques ,sequences pr
procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of whic th item
is a component.
§4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor
changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.
§4.2.5 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Cqmple and the
of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,ydritten warranties
and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issu a final Certificate
for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in
carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations o au on o
such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Con
AIA Document A201"- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1967 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA� Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 18
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294290731)
§3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
§3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress
wherever located.
§3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
§3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend pits or claims for
infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless firm loss on account
thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process car product of a
particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where tie copyright violations
are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.Imi owever,if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringen ent
patent;the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptI3 fur iished to the
Architect.
§3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
§3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or Wises are not covered
by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accor ian$a with Se To—a 11.3,
the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents anh
employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including bu not limited to
attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that suc claim,damage,loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destru on f tangible preperty
(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omission of tor,
Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts th
regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.
Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which
would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.
§3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employe a Co ct ,
a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts the?ma) ' le,to
indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount a of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers ensa.
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§4.1 ARCHITECT
§4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully
architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract D , ents as ' ingul
in number.The term Architect means the Architect or the Architects authorized representdti
§4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in thl Contract Docume
shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contra r and Architect.
Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld
§4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Ar itect against whom the
Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents s'' ill-be drat-of-the framer
Architect.
§4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract . ocu a ts,d i
an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and(3)with'the;4wner's
concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work describecin Section 12.2.The
Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.
§4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate
Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner info
and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and
AIA Document A201°'- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 1,7
international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
§3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of 40
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop
Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Di has been issued
r
authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors o omissions in Shop
Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof.
§3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Dn¢wings, o uct ata,
Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previ
absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to uch revisions.
§3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which consti$utee practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Docents for a portion of
the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Cctor's
responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor s ot be
required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design s?rvices or
certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are speci all required f
Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all perfo an L desi 'teria
that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications tole ed b a
properly licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawmgJ,ca ,
specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such profess
and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear
such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled
to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications or approvals performed by
design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance esign
criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review rove o fake
other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for confo a wi rmation
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall n b onsible fo th
adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.
§3.13 USE OF SITE
§3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances,permits and the
Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
§3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
§3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to comp to o or o e
its parts fit together properly.
§3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or part complete
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering�uci construction,or by
excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner r apse crate c ntractor
except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent sha o not be unreasonably
withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate co"tract en-t-ie c-ontractor"s
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
§3.15 CLEANING UP
§3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation o w�te ma'nals o
rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractoi shall remove from and
about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,lachinery and surplus
materials.
§3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Own may do so and the cost
thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
AIA Document A201° - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. aARNIM: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA? Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 16
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197-1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written
request in each case.
§3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
§3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and
Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shat exceed time limits
current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by 4e conditions of the
Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contrad D cuments,and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
§3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a sched ile
coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonablc tin e to review
submittals.
§3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent ZNdules submitted to
the Owner and Architect.
§3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
§3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specific Dons,
Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to ri I cor#field change s and
selections made during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Proinq Data,Sample and
similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered dt fo
submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
§3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
§3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by th
Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some . ion of
the Work.
§3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,'brot es,diagrams d
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some n of or
§3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establis
standards by which the Work will be judged.
§3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract DocumeThepurpose of
their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are requked by the Coc tract
Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given aiid esi coc
expressed in the Contract Documents.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of S ction 4.2.9. .
Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action�may be so identifie. in
the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents ma'bett=returned by th
Architect without action.
§3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve end submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Co
reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of
separate contractors.Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contra7co;nstruction ts"M
approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.
§3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar su mitth` ntractor
represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements an field
criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such
submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
§3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require su mi
and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respect iue�subtta'
approved by the Architect.
AIA Document A2 I'm - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 15
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA. Document, or any portion of it, may result in severs
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
(3294240731)
User Notes:
§3.5 WARRANTY
§3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the
Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the
Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to
the requirements of the Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions
not properly approved and authorized,may be considered defective. The Contractor's watraexcludes remedy for
damage or defect caused by abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper Dr nasufficient
maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required bythe chitect,the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equup ent.
§3.6 TAXES
§3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provid d by the Contractor
which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not et g ffective or merely
scheduled to go into effect.
§3.7 PERMITS,FEES AND NOTICES
§3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure ar Fdpay for the Rui c ing
permit and other permits and governmental fees,licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and
completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and 1" A are legally
required when bids are received or negotiations concluded.
§3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rul s,r gatatiom and
orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
§3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations.However,if the Contractor obs
that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify chitect
and Owner in writing,and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
§3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances, ing codes, in
rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall a appr to
responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
§3.8 ALLOWANCES
§3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items
covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the y direct,
but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor as reaso
objection.
§3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment el ered at the site and
all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts;
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs overhe pro t and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included" the Contract Sum but
not in the allowances;
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly
by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference be
costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's cpsts under Section
3.8.2.2.
§3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner m sufficieriddme to avoid delay
in the Work.
§3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants wlo s I be iri'affenclance
at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the C=U:actor,and
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.Important
AIA Document A201= - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and 14
Interna tional Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of
any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.
These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of
discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,any errors,inconsistencies or
omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in
such form as the Architect may require.
§3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be rg pored promptly to the
Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capac ty a contractor and
not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract)ocumen :"'Yw6e
Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with pplsa -lawr� stat -----�
ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or 1 n ode known to the
Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.
§3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifica rM or instructions
issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information p t to Sections 3.2.1
and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the.ion ctor fails"To
perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and images to the er as
would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor s hal not be liabl to the
Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Clontr�act Documents or
for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor
recognized such error,inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report'.
eport t tJ�ect:
§3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
§3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,segue
and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract D nts
give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific' ction
concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contra a s all to th�
jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for e e safety of suc
_ )
means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that suc ,in ,
techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice a er
and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from
Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences o
procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any
resulting loss or damage.
§3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contr4cto Tp oyee!,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portio e orlc or
on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
f Work already erf to determinehat
§3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions o o y p e§d
such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
§3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
§3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,
materials, equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportati
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether r or perm.anent
and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the.Work.
§3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect
and in accordance with a Change Order.
§3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's6mployees and other 3
persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons no
skilled in tasks assigned to them.
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937,, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Doamwnt is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 1.3
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIii Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be proaeCUted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
continuation of the Work.After such evidence has been furnished,the Owner shall not materially vary such
financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. '"WI
§2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Section 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the
Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,
assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structur� for permanent
changes in existing facilities.
§2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations anc utility locations for
the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on n the accuracy of
information famished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safee pea4a€
Work.
§2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be ed by the Owner
with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's711*Pormance of the Work
under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contracto _ written request for
such information or services.
§2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be fumisl ed, 3ree of charge such
copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work
§2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
§2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirem
Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the
cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to
duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person o ity,
except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.
§2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
§2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Co ct Doc is d
fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and con corn c tio
of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may after such seven-day period give
Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period.If the Contractor within
such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies,
the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficienc ch case an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the orn
reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation f
additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure.Such action by the Owner and amounts
charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then gr thereafter due e
Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference o a Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§3.1 GENERAL
§3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred
Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's
authorized representative.
§3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration ofi'the Pontract,or by tests,
inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.
§3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
§3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before starting each portion of th losk,.th
shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the
AIA Document A201-- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 195e, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA` Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 12
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order N0.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
§1.3 CAPITALIZATION
§1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles
of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.
§1.4 INTERPRETATION
§1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such-as"all"and"any"
and articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from o ie datement and appears
in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
§1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the 4
both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request.
§1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor hg s united the site,
become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed a Ittiorrelated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
§1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS 0--S RVICE
§1.6.1 The Drawings,Specifications and other documents,including those in electronic form,4epared b3 th
Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the World to a execute b the
Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subconactor,
Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the �fic
and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants,and unless ott
Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law,
statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the
Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion
the Work.The Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Archite '
consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to� ect.Th e
not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material or eq ent s, er on r
projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific 'tt nsent of th
Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-sut ccttors atelrial
or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Sp ations an
other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the lion
of their Work under the Contract Documents.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory
copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the ArFave hitt and
the Architect's consultants.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or f
connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Archite s or Arch
consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§2.1 GENERAL
§2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referre lto ougho
Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a repres'entativvee who
express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approal or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.
the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.
§2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written req es� t,information
necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien gk uch
information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which thw*oject is located,
usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein.
§2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 1
§2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement offthe Work and thereafter,
furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made t fu a wne s
obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent
AIA Document A2010 - 1997. Copyright a 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This A19 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 11
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS "'
§1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement),
Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda
issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifieations issued after
execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed byboth parties,(2)a
Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor chanRe hithe Work issued by
the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents nol include other
documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bi d ers,sample orms,
the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).
§1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or age nnents,either written
or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Dents shall not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Cot( or,(2)be wee, the
Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and Architect or 4) tween an(persons
or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled tc peformance md l
enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Arc 'test's duties.
§1.1.3 THE WORK
The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents
partially completed, and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by
the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
§1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents a the of
or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
§1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, lion d
dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams.
§1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirem materials,
equipment,systems, standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related sey6ce s.
§1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding re ements,sample
forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.
§1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the properexecution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and-wlCatis�
one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent
consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to pr
indicated results.
§1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangeni4t 0�5_ wings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the a lth.1 nt of Work to be
performed by any trade.
§1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known ca l or construction
industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. '
AIA Document A201s'- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved, WARNING: This ALA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and to
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3299240731)
1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5,
10W 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6,
Written Interpretations 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14
4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders
Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2,
13.5.2, 14.3.1
AIA Document A201f1 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING. This Ale Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and _ 9
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
5 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
Subcontractors,Work by CONTRACT
1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, 14
9.6.7 Tests and Inspections
Subcontractual Relations 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,
5-3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10 10.2.1,11.4.7,11.4.8,14.1, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2
14.2.1,143.2 TIME
Submittals 8
1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2, Time,Delays and Extensio is
9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,577,-7-2-7,73.1,
Subrogation,Waivers of 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 1 OI617-144 2
6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 Time Limits
Substantial Completion 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3, .10 3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,
4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5 ,54, 6.2.4,7.3,7.4,
9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,!'S;9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,
Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4 .4.10, 12.2, 13.5,
9.8.1 13.7, 14
Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims
5.2.3,5.2.4 43.2,43.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,A.6
Substitution of Architect Title to Work
4.1.3 9.3.2,9.3.3
Substitutions of Materials UNCOVERING AND CO F
3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 WORK
Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 12
5.1.2 Uncovering of Work
Subsurface Conditions 12.1
4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions
Successors and Assigns 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3
13.2 Unit Prices `
Superintendent 4.3.9,7.3.3.2
3.9,10.2.6 Use of Documents
Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3
1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Use of Site
6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1
Surety Values,Schedule of
4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2 9.2,93.1
Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Arc 'ect
9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.2
Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Coatra4tor
2.2.3 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.,
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Om oner
14.4 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4 11. .3, 11.4.5 11 .7,
Suspension of the Work 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4
5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Consequential I lamages
Suspension or Termination of the Contract 43.10,14.2.4
4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waiver of Liens
Taxes 9.10.2,9.10.4 ,,.-•------,,,��
3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation
Termination by the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7
4.3.10, 14.1 Warranty
Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.5.3,9.3.3,9.8 4, 9.1,9.10.4,12.2.2,
4.3.10,5.4.1.1, 14.2 13.7.1.3
Termination of the Architect Weather Delays
4.1.3 4.3.7.2
Termination of the Contractor Work,Definition of
14.2.2 1.1.3
Written Consent
AIA Document A201°— 1997. copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925,1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright law and 8
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and
7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Architect
Permits,Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2
2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and
PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor
OF 3.12
10 Rights and Remedies
1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2 4.2 6,4.3.4,4.5,4.6,5.3,
Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.',9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3,
10.3.1 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14
Product Data,Definition of Royalties,Patents and Col yri ts--� ----- ...!
3.12.2 3.17
Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration
3.11,3.12,4.2.7 4.6.2
Progress and Completion Safety of Persons and PropTffiy
4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4 10.2,10.6
Progress Payments Safety Precautions and Pri ign ms
4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1, 1 .2, 10.6
Project,Definition of the Samples,Definition of
1.1.4 3.12.3
r
Project Management Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,!ro uct Data an
Insurance 3.11,3.12,4.2.7
11.3 Samples at the Site,Docu nts and
Project Manual,Definition of the 3.11
1.1.7 Schedule of Values
Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1
2.2.5 Schedules,
Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.Construction12.1 .1,43. ,
4.2.10 6.1.3.
Property Insurance Separate Contracts and Contra
10.2.5,11.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4, 4.6. , 3.1
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5
10 Shop Drawings,Definition of
Regulations and Laws 3.12.1
1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples
9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7
13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of
Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1
3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections
Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.J 4. .4,9.4.2, .10. 3.5
9.10.2 Site Visits,Architect's
Representations 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5i 1, .9.2,9.10. , 1$.5
1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Special Inspections and Tesing�
9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Representatives Specifications,Definition o
2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6
13.2.1 Specifications,The .--
Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3. .12.10,3.17
4.4,4.5,4.6 Statute of Limitations
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 ,
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, Stopping the Work i
10 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Retainage Stored Materials
9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 114.1.4
Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of
Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS
AIA Document A201e` - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This 419 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 7
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA* Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order N0.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
(3294240731)
User Notes:
Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.6,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2,4.1.2,
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1,
3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, 8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,
9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10,
Means,Methods,Techniques, Sequences and 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4
Procedures of Construction Owner's Financial Capabili
3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5
Mechanic's Lien Owner's Liability Insurance
4.4.8 11.2
Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurace
4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3
Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with S ibc?ntractors
1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9. 0Jte 2, 14.2.2
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry O t Work
13 2.4,12.2.4. 14.2.2.2
Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean U
1.1.1 6.3
Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform o}tstruction ani to
1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1, Award Separate Contract,
9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1 6.1
Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the NVork
6.2 23
Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend til Work
9.6.6,9.9.3, 12-3 14.3
Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract
2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2
12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Spec' ions
Notice and Other Instruments of Servi
2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,22.5,3.2.1,3.11 .17.1 2,5.
4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use
11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5
Notice,Written Patching,Cutting and
2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.2.5
5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Patents
12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14 3.17
Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment,Applications for
13.5.1, 13.5.2 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,93,9.4,9.5. ,9.6.3,9.7.1`; .8.5,
Notice to Proceed 9.10.1,9.10.3 9.10.5, 11.1. 14111 f. . .3
8.2.2 Payment,Certificates for
Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,! .6.L34.291"'!,.1,9 .1,
2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 1 .1. l if.6
Occupancy Payment,Final
2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, r'i..I`z'';13 i.3, 1 f.4.f, --
Orders,Written 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond
13.5.2, 14.3.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11
OWNER Payments,Progress
2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 3 14.2.3
Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMP E ION
2.1 9
Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors
2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2, 9.6.3, .,6.4 9.6.7, 11.4.8,
6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 14.2.1.2
11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 PCB
Owner's Authority 10.3.1
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING.: This A19 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA! Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 6
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Insurance,Project Management Protective
3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.4, Liability
8.2,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 11.3
Extensions of Time Insurance,Property
3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, 10.2.5, 11.4
9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials
Failure of Payment 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4
4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS
Faulty Work 11
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Conse°/nt to Partial Occupancy
Final Completion and Final Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5
4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Insurance Companies,Settlemel with
11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.4.10
Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Docurbents
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Interest
11.4 13.6
GENERAL PROVISIONS Interpretation
1 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,1 .1. ,8.1.4
Governing Law Interpretations,Written
13.1 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
Guarantees(See Warranty) Joinder and Consolidation o CI
Hazardous Materials 4.6.4
10.2.4,10.3, 10.5 Judgment on Final Award
Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.6
1.5.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12 ,3.15.1
5.2.1 42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3 .3.3,9 .3
Indemnification 9.10.2, 10.2.19 10.2.4, 14.2. .
3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 Labor Disputes
Information and Services Required of the Owner 8.3.1
2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Laws and Regulations
6.1.4,6.2.59 9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,
11.2, 11.4, 13.5.19 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13 13.5.1,
Injury or Damage to Person or Property 13.5.2, 13.6, 14
43.8,10.2,10.6 Liens
Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10
3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.29 Limitation on Consolidation or. oink`
9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.4
Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of
1.1.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability
3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12, 8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.6,3 12.10,3.1 J,3i 18,
Insurance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9�.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4,
3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1,i 1.4.7, . .
9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time
Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,4�-6.2.4j�7.3," 1
11.4.2 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3 7.4,
Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5 9.6 . ,9. ,
11.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 1.1.4.611 .12, 13.5,
Insurance,Effective Date of 13.7, 14
8.2.2, 11.1.2 Loss of Use Insurance
Insurance,Loss of Use 11.4.3
11.4.3 Material Suppliers
r Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.21, Y.
11.2 Materials,Hazardous
10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AW Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 5
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (3294240731)
3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 6.2.5,3.14
11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
Contractor's Liability Insurance Contractors
11.1 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1,
Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.4, 12.2.4
and Owner's Forces Damage to the Work
3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2 , 1 .6, 11.4, 12.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages,Claims for
1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 32.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.1.3, 5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3,
11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Damages for Delay
1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10 .2
3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, Date of Commencement of t ie I lork,Definition of
4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 8.1.2
9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, Date of Substantial Comple Definition of
13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3
Contractor's Representations Day,Definition of
1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 8.1.4
Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions of the Architect
Work 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,A.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.11 4.4.5,
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8, .1.11,8.3.1,9. ,9 ,
10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 1 .2.2-9 14.2:4--1
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Ce '
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance,
9.7 Rejection and Correction of
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5 2,9 .8.2,
4.3.10, 14.1 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3
Contractor's Submittals Defective Work,Definition
3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1
9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions
Contractor's Superintendent 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2, 3,4. . ,
3.9, 10.2.6 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1, 9. , 1
Contractor's Supervision and Construction Delays and Extensions of Time
Procedures 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,
1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 7.4.19 8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 1 .3.2
6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14 Disputes
Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3, .3.
11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples a thefSite
Coordination and Correlation 3.11
1.2, 1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5
1.6,2.2.5,3.11 Drawings and Specificatio Use and rs oy p f�
Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3
1.6,3.17 Effective Date of Insurance
Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2
2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, Emergencies
12.2, 13.7.1.3 4.3.5, 10.6, 14.1.1.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees,Contractor's
1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18. 4.x`3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
Cost,Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1€
7.3.6 Equipment,Labor,Materia and
s
Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2 3.$ ,3.12,3.13,3.15.1,
2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4:3,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.36, .3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,
7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7, 7.3.8,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2..2
11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of
Cutting and Patching
AIA Document A2011K- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects.. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA° Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 4
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3294240731)
9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4,
Certificates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1,
4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions
Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3
13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract
Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4
9.10.2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written
Change Orders 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.x.2, .3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2,
1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,1.4. ,
4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OV NFJt-^GP B Y--
11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACT
Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6
7,2,1 Construction Change Direct ev e,; efinition of
CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1
3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Dire, s
Claim,Definition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,74,7i3,9.3.1.1
4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Coatra or's
Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.214.3 7.2,6.1.3
3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of ut contracts
10.3.3 5.4,14.2.2.2 il
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Perfrmae
4.6.5 43.3
Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of
3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2
Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINAWondieh
3.2.3,4.3.4,43.7,6.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2 SUSPENSION OF THE
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9,14
4.3.4 Contract Administration
Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5
3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Executi 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 to
Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3,
4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,The
Cleaning Up 1.1,1.2
3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies d Use of
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 r,
13.7 Contract Documents,Definition
Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.1.1
2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Sum
5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3 7. ,7.3,7.4, .1,= .4.2,
11.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, LA. , 14.2.4, 4.3 2
Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of _�_____
8.1.2 9.1
Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Time
Administration 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4, 8.1.1,8.2,
3.9.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3
Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of
1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 8.1.1
9.9.1,9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR
COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3
9 Contractor,Definition of
Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2
4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules g y
9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3. . , . .
Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees
AIA Document A2011 - 1997. Copyright a 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and 3
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document, or any portion of it, nay result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
(3294240731)
User Notes:
INDEX 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5
(Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Approvals
2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work
9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 122.1
Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright
9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 1.6
Access to Work Architect's Decisions
3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12, .2. 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.3,
Accident Prevention 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.
4.2.3, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 1 .2. , 14.2.4
Acts and Omissions Architect's Inspections
3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9. 3, .9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
9.5.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Architect's Instructions
Addenda 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2 .4.1, 12.1, 13.52
1.1.1,3.11 Architect's Interpretations
Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 Architect's Project Represen ath e
Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.10
9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architect's Relationship wi Contractor
Additional Time,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2. 3 . , . . , .4.2,9.51,
4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.1613.18.4.1.2.4.1.3,E I
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,
3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10<9.
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 13.4.2, 13.5
1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with
Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,42.4,4.2.6,9.6
4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations
Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1
3.8 Architect's Site Visits
All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4 ,
11.4.1.1 13.5
Applications for Payment Asbestos
4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,93,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1
9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Attorneys'Fees
Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3
2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 Award of Separate Contrac
Arbitration 6.1.1,6.1.2
4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, Award of Subcontracts an her Cont acts r
11.4.10 Portions of the Work
Architect 5.2
4.1 Basic Definitions
Architect,Definition of 1.1
4.1.1 Bidding Requirements
Architect,Extent of Authority 1.1.1, 1.1.7,52.1, 11.5.1
2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Boiler and Machinery Insurance
9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 11.4.2
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Bonds,Lien
Architect,Limitations of Authority and 9.10.2
Responsibility Bonds,Performance,and Pays a
2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4. 1115
4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.4, Building Permit
5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 3.7.1
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization
2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 1,3
Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion
AIA Document A2011— 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 and 1997 by
The n American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This Al Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and
Internatioal Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA! Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe 2
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/l/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: —
(3294240731)
E Lr AIA Document A2 O 1� - 1997
b.
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
for the following PROJECT:
(Name and location or address):
THE OWNER:
(Name and address):
ADL[ITIONS A17L1—iJEI.ETIOD7S
MEMO= Thy author f This document
hal added i fo tion
THE ARCHITECT: nee�ded for Lts completion.
Thq author day also have
(Name and address): ht 'e text o t e
revise
11111111= 1.
mom
An Additions and Deletion
Report that notes
information ell a
TABLE OF ARTICLES revis' ' to t s andard
rm t s av ilble from
1 GENERAL PROVISIONS th or and hold be
r ed.
2 OWNER
This documen impo
3 CONTRACTOR legal consequences.
Consultation with an
4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT at ney 'sencourag wit
esp® toy its Co "leti
5 SUBCONTRACTORS (T,r odificklo his document s been
6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS approved an4 a dorsed by
Th Associaied General
7 CHANGES IN THE WORK Contractors of America
8 TIME w
9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT prohibited and constitutes a
violation of copyright laws
as set forth in the footer of
this document.
AIA Document A201°- 1997. Copyright O 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1967 and 1997 by
The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA` Document is protected by U.S. copyright Law and 1
International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe
civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA
software at 15:43:06 on 11/08/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
(3294240731)
User Notes:
ARTICLE II CONTRACT TIME
The date of Substantial Completion established by this Amendment is:
OWNER CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
(Si ature) (Signature)
Flow
(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)
Date Date
ATTEST ATTEST
AIA Document Al2M24c — 2003 Amendment No. 1. Copyright O 1991, 1998 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This-document is protected by V.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 2
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:43:45 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(1857687976) -
FTAIA Document A121n' Mc - 2003
Amendment No . 1
Ab&-WrH NT NO. 1
TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONSTRUCTION IL TAGER
Pursuant to Section 2.2 of the Agreement,dated in between I(Owner)and I(the Construction ftwet,f.
(the Project),the Owner and Construction Manager establish a Guaranteed Maximum
Price and Contract Time for the Work as set forth below.
ARTICLE I GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE TIONS AMY-VELETICNS:
The Construction Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price for the Work,including the
estimated Cost of the Work as defined in Article 6 and the Construction Manager's Fee as Th author f his document
ha� added i fo ation
defined in Article 5,is ).This Price is for the performance of the Work in ne ed for is completion.
accordance with the Contract Documents listed and attached to this Amendment and MTh authoray also have
marked Exhibits A through F,as follows: revise t e text of the
Exhibit A Drawings,Specifications,addenda and General, An Additions and Deletion
Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract on which the Guaranteed Report that notes
Maximum Price is based,pages through dated information ell a
revis' tot s andard
Exhibit B Allowance items,pages. through dated rm t s avilble from
�t,h or and hold be
Exhibit C Assumptions and Clarifications made in preparing the re`v� ed.
Guaranteed Maximum Price,pages El through 1l,dated in. This document impo
legal consequences.
Exhibit D Completion Schedule,pages through dated consultation with an
at L ney encourag, wit
Exhibit E Alternate Prices,pages through dated resp It co i ti
r aodi�fica io
Exhibit F Unit Prices,pages through ,dated
z
EIXCTRONIC COPYING of any
portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
prohibited and constitutes a
violation of copyright laws
as set forth in the footer of
?? this document.
AIA Document A1210CMC - 2003 Amendment No. 1. Copyright O 1991, 1996 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING; This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International 1
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, anal will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:43:45 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
- (1857687976)
User Notes:
terminate such subcontract,purchase order or rental agreement and the Owner shall pay the Construction Manager
* the costs necessarily incurred by the Construction Manager by reason of such termination.
§10.2 TERMINATION SUBSEQUENT TO ESTABLISHING GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE
Subsequent to execution by both parties of Amendment No. 1,the Contract may be terminated as provided in Article
14 ofA201TM-1997.
§10.2.1 In the event of such termination by the Owner,the amount payable to the Construction Manager pursuant to
Section 14.1.3 of A201 TM-1997 shall not exceed the amount the Construction Manager would have been entitled to
receive pursuant to Sections 10.1.2 and 10.1.3 of this Agreement.
§10.2.2 In the event of such termination by the Construction Manager,the amount to be paid to the Construction
Manager under Section 14.1.3 of A201 TM-1997 shall not exceed the amount the Construction lianager would have
been entitled to receive under Sections 10.1.2 and 10.1.3 above,except that the Construction Manager's Fee shall be
calculated as if the Work had been fully completed by the Construction Manager,including4T6asonable estimate of
the Cost of the Work for Work not actually completed.
§10.3 SUSPENSION
The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of A201TM-1997;in such)case,the Quarunteed
Maximum Price,if established,shall be increased as provided in Section 14.3.2 of A201 TM-1997 except t at the
term"cost of performance of the Contract"in that Section shall be understood to mean the(ost of the Work and the
term"profit"shall be understood to mean the Construction Manager's Fee as described in Se0ions°6-.I.ttuid�3: f—
this Agreement. -» - -
ARTICLE 11 OTHER CONDITIONS AND SERVICES ,.
This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. ~° k
OWNER CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
(Signature) (Signature)
(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)} s
Date Date Se k
V
ATTEST ATTEST
E
AIA Document A121"CMe - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright. Law and International 17
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criranal
l:rnalties, e.::d will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197-1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
(515170148)
User Notes:
MW
instrument signed by both the Owner and Construction Manager.If anything in any document incorporated into this
Agreement is inconsistent with this Agreement,this Agreement shall govern. ,
§9.2.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS
Article 1.6 of A201 TM-1997 shall apply to both the Preconstruction and Construction Phases.
§9.2.4 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.
§9.2.5 ASSIGNMENT
The Owner and Construction Manager respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors, ssigns.�ad-legal
representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other
party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents:Except as provided
in Section 13.2.2 of A201 TI`S-1997,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written
consent of the other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent-ihat party shall
nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. . 1
ARTICLE 10 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
§10.1 TERMINATION PRIOR TO ESTABLISHING GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE
§10.1.1 Prior to execution by both parties of Amendment No. 1 establishing the Guaranteed Maximum Price,the
Owner may terminate this Contract at any time without cause,and the Construction Manager mAy terminate this
Contract for any of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 of A201TK-1997.
§10.1.2 If the Owner or Construction Manager terminates this Contract pursuant to this Section 10.1 prior to
commencement of the Construction Phase,the Construction Manager shall be equitably compensated for
Preconstruction Phase Services performed prior to receipt of notice of termination;provided,however,that the .� y
compensation for such services shall not exceed the compensation set forth in Section 4.1.1.
§10.1.3 If the Owner or Construction Manager terminates this Contract pursuant to this Sectic 10.1
commencement of the Construction Phase,the Construction Manager shall,in addition tothe ensation
provided in Section 10.1.2,be paid an amount calculated as follows: -. �"
.1 Take the Cost of the Work incurred by the Construction Manager. ' w
.2 Add the Construction Manager's Fee computed upon the Cost of the Work to the date of e i ination ""
at the rate stated in Section 5.1 or,if the Construction Manager's Fee is stated as a fixed sum in that'-,,,..,
Section,an amount which bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum Fee as the Cost of the Work at the "`
time of termination bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost of the Work upo its °
completion. ,
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner on account of the-C&Rtructi on pfi
Phase. '� b
The Owner shall also pay the Construction Manager fair compensation,either by purchase or rental at the election of
the Owner,for any equipment owned by the Construction Manager which the Owner elects'to retain and which is
not otherwise included in the Cost of the Work under Section 10.1.3.1.To the extent that the O%ner e�,,lect to take
legal assignment of subcontracts and purchase orders(including rental agreements),the Construction Manager shall,
as a condition of receiving the payments referred to in this Article 10,execute and deliver all,such1nper =d°take--- °°-
all such steps,including the legal assignment of such subcontracts and other contractual rights of the Construction
Manager,as the Owner may require for the purpose of fully vesting in the Owner the rights and bene flu of-thhe—. ,
Construction Manager under such subcontracts or purchase orders.
Subcontracts,purchase orders and rental agreements entered into by the Construction Manager wfth the Owner's
written approval prior to the execution of Amendment No. I shall contain provisions peer iliing`assignment to the
Owner as described above.If the Owner accepts such assignment,the Owner shall reimburse or indemnify the
Construction Manager with respect to all costs arising under the subcontract,purchase ordei or rental agreement
except those which would not have been reimbursable as Cost of the Work if the contract hid not been terminated.If
the Owner elects not to accept the assignment of any subcontract,purchase order or rental agreemenTW-Y1b "WOUIiT-
" " ,
have constituted a Cost of the Work had this agreement not been terminated,the Construction..A4anagershall.--..—I
AIA Document A1211CMe - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright o 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and crininal 16
penalties, a:nd will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (515170148)
.1 The policy shall be endorsed to have the General Aggregate apply to this Project only.
.2 Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of at least
)Y ear s after either 90 days following Substantial Completion or final payment,whichever is
earlier.
.3 The Contractual Liability insurance shall include coverage sufficient to meet the obligations in
Section 3.18 of A201 TM-1997.
§8.1.3 Automobile Liability(owned,non-owned and hired vehicles)for bodily injury and property damage:
Each Accident
§8.1.4 Other coverage:
a 5
(If Umbrella Excess Liability coverage is required over the primary insurance or retention,i ert the coverage
limits. Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability limits may be attained by indYvidlual policies or by a
combination of primary policies and Umbrella and/or Excess Liability policies.If Project Afanagement otective
Liability Insurance is to be provided, state the limits here)
3
§8.2 INSURANCE REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
During both phases of the Project,the Owner shall purchase and maintain liability and property insurance inc�uding
waivers of subrogation,as set forth in Sections 11.2 and 11.4 of A201TM-1997.Such insuran t frn
not less than the following limits,or greater if required by law:
§8.2.1 Pro erty Insurance:
Deductible Per Occurrence
Aggregate Deductible "
§8.2.2 Boiler and Machinery insurance with a limit of
(If not a blanket policy, list the objects to be insured.) ,w
§8.3 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BONDS .
§8.3.1 The Construction Manager . ,. (Insert"shall'or"shall not")furnish bonds covering faithful performance
of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder.Bonds may be obtained through tba Construction
Manager's usual source,and the cost thereof shall be included in the Cost of the Work.The air cunt of eacl and
shall be equal to Is( )of the Contract Sum.
§8.3.2 The Construction Manager shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner at least three days before the P�
commencement of any Work at the Project site.
ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS w ,
§9.1 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ` s
§9.1.1 During both the Preconstruction and Construction Phases,Claims,disputes or other matters ir-questiorr--
between the parties to this Agreement shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.3 through 4.6 of A201Tm-1997
except that,during the Preconstruction Phase,no decision by the Architect shall be a condition prece pt 40--,
mediation or arbitration. ""`
�R �A
§9.2 OTHER PROVISIONS
§9.2.1 Unless otherwise noted,the terms used in this Agreement shall have the same meaning as those in A201T
1997,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 1
§9.2.2 EXTENT OF CONTRACT
This Contract,which includes this Agreement and the other documents incorporated herein y re ef-irrence,represenfs°---
the entire and integrated agreement between the Owner and the Construction Manager and super�edesall.prior. .W , � j
negotiations,representations or agreements,either written or oral.This Agreement may be amended only by written
AIA Document A121°CMc - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International. 15
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, nay result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (515170148)
.1 Take the sum of the Cost of the Work substantiated by the Construction Manager's final accounting
and the Construction Manager's Fee,but not more than the Guaranteed Maximum Price.
.2 Subtract amounts,if any,for which the Architect withholds,in whole or in part,a final Certificate for
Payment as provided in Section 9.5.1 of A201TK-1997 or other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner.
If the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner exceeds the amount due the Constructtion Manager,the
Construction Manager shall reimburse the difference to the Owner.
§7.2.3 The Owner's accountants will review and report in writing on the Construction Manager'""
within 30 days after delivery of the final accounting to the Architect by the Construction Manager.Based upon such
Cost of the Work as the Owner's accountants report to be substantiated by the Construction vlatager's final
accounting,and provided the other conditions of Section 7.2.1 have been met,the Architect will,within seven days
after receipt of the written report of the Owner's accountants,either issue to the Owner a fink ertificate for
Payment with a copy to the Construction Manager or notify the Construction Manager and Owner in writing of the
Architect's reasons for withholding a certificate as provided in Section 9.5.1 of A201TM-1997 .the time penads
stated in this Section 7.2 supersede those stated in Section 9.4.1 of A201TM-1997. g
§7.2.4 If the Owner's accountants report the Cost of the Work as substantiated by the Construction Manager's final
accounting to be less than claimed by the Construction Manager,the Construction Manager., be entitled to
proceed in accordance with Article 9 without a further decision of the Architect.Unless agreed io otherwise,a
demand for mediation or arbitration of the disputed amount shall be made by the Constructutn Agri C .
days after the Construction Manager's receipt of a copy of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment.Failure to
make such demand within this 60-day period shall result in the substantiated amount reported by the Owner's
accountants becoming binding on the Construction Manager.Pending a final resolution of the disputed amoun Zhe
Owner shall pay the Construction Manager the amount certified in the Architect`s final Certificate for Payment.
1
§7.2.5 If,subsequent to final payment and at the Owner's request,the Construction Managerhfticur ostslscri ed
in Section 6.1 and not excluded by Section 6.2(1)to correct nonconforming Work or(2)ajsing4m the resolution
of disputes,the Owner shall reimburse the Construction Manager such costs and the Construction ManA, ' Fee i
any,related thereto on the same basis as if such costs had been incurred prior to final payment,but n°t ti excess of
the Guaranteed Maximum Price.If the Construction Manager has participated in savings,the amount of such,.,
savings shall be recalculated and appropriate credit given to the Owner in determining the net amount to be paid by
the Owner to the Construction Manager.
ARTICLE 8 INSURANCE AND BONDS
q
§8.1 INSURANCE REQUIRED OF THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
During both phases of the Project,the Construction Manager shall purchase and maintain h ura ce as seffortli in y
Section 11.1 of A201T"-1997.Such insurance shall be written for not less than the following limits,or greater
required by law: e I
I € i
§8.1.1 Workers'Compensation and Employers'Liability meeting statutory limits mandated by state and federal
laws.If(1)limits in excess of those required by statute are to be provided,or(2)the employer is not statutorily e
bound to obtain such insurance coverage or(3)additional coverages are required,additionaIlvoverages-and-imits°ffor
such insurance shall be as follows:
,
§8.1.2 Commercial General Liability including coverage for Premises-Operations,Independent Contractors' '�
Protective,Products-Completed Operations,Contractual Liability,Personal Injury and Broad Form Property
Damage including coverage for Explosion,Collapse and Underground hazards):
Each Occurrence
General Aggregate I
rif Personal and Advertising Injury
k Products-Completed Operations Aggregate �.,�,...,� �._.. ...
AIA Document A121"CMc - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International.
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 14
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:Is on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(51517014e)
Work for which the Construction Manager has made or intends to make actual payment prior to the next Application
for Payment by(b)the share of the Guaranteed Maximum Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule
of values.
§7.1.7 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents,the amount of each progress payment shall be
computed as follows:
.1 Take that portion of the Guaranteed Maximum Price properly allocable to completed Work as
determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Woik by the share of the
Guaranteed Maximum Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values.Pending
final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work,amounts not in dispute may Ke__`�"` "`J
included as provided in Section 7.3.8 of A201 TM-1997,even though the Guaranteed-Maxinmm-Tr4ce •----.
has not yet been adjusted by Change Order. fl
.2 Add that portion of the Guaranteed Maximum Price properly allocable to mterials and equipment
delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work or,if approved in
advance by the Owner,suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon ifT %riting.
.3 Add the Construction Manager's Fee,less retainage of ( ).The Construction Manager's Fee
shall be computed upon the Cost of the Work described in the two preceding;Sections at theme
stated in Section 5.1.1 or,if the Construction Manager's Fee is stated as a fixed silin in thavSec ion,
shall be an amount which bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum Fee as the Cost of the Work nthe
two preceding Sections bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost o 'thy Work upon its
completion. E
.4 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner. a J
.5 Subtract the shortfall,if any,indicated by the Construction Manager in the d6c entction r b
Section 7.1.4 to substantiate prior Applications for Payment,or resulting from errors subsequently
discovered by the Owner's accountants in such documentation. "
.6 Subtract amounts,if any,for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment°
as provided in Section 9.5 of A201TM-1997.
§7.1.8 Exce t with the Owner's prior approval,payments to Subcontractors shall be subjectlo eten�tion dni of less
than The Owner and the Construction Manager shall agree upon a mutually acaeptabprocedure for l
review and approval of payments and retention for subcontracts. `°°W ,��
§7.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval,the Construction Manager shall not make advance payment to_..,
suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.
§7.1.10 In taking action on the Construction Manager's Applications for Payment,the Architect shall-be-,,,ntitled to ,
rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by the Construction Manager and shalhot be �g
deemed to represent that the Architect has made a detailed examination,auditor arithmetic verification the r ,
documentation submitted in accordance with Section 7.1.4 or other supporting data,that thd Architect hash, aile K
exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections or that the Architect has made examinations to'ascertain how or fob H
what purposes the Construction Manager has used amounts previously paid on account of the Contract. Such
examinations,audits and verifications,if required by the Owner,will be performed by the Cwnbr's accountants
acting in the sole interest of the Owner. _ L I
§7.2 FINAL PAYMENT
§7.2.1 Final payment shall be made by the Owner to the Construction Manager when(1)the Contract has been fully
performed by the Construction Manager except for the Construction Manager's responsibility to correct R
nonconforming Work,as provided in Section 12.2.2 of A201TM-1997,and to satisfy other requirdments,if
which necessarily survive final payment;(2)a final Application for Payment and a final accolmting.,for the Cost of`
the Work have been submitted by the Construction Manager and reviewed by the Owner's accountants;and(3)a
final Certificate for Payment has then been issued by the Architect;such final payment shall�be made by the Owner
not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment,or as follows:
§7.2.2 The amount of the final payment shall be calculated as follows:
AIA Document A121"CHc - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Lnternati.onal. 13
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil a!:d criminal
penalties, and will he prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under order Nc.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
- (515170198)
User Notes:
.8 Except as provided in Section 6.1.7.1,any cost not specifically and expressly described in
Section 6.1. 400%,
.9 Costs which would cause the Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded.
§6.3 DISCOUNTS,REBATES AND REFUNDS
§6.3.1 Cash discounts obtained on payments made by the Construction Manager shall accrup-t ithe Owner if(1)
before making the payment,the Construction Manager included them in an Application for Payment and received
payment therefor from the Owner,or(2)the Owner has deposited funds with the Construction Manager with which
to make payments;otherwise,cash discounts shall accrue to the Construction Manager.Trade discounts,rebates,
refunds and amounts received from sales of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to the'0wner,an—&' e
Construction Manager shall.make provisions so that they can be secured.
§6.3.2 Amounts which accrue to the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 6.3.1 shall be credited to
the Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work.
§6.4 ACCOUNTING RECORDS
§6.4.1 The Construction Manager shall keep full and detailed accounts and exercise such cgntr6ls as may e
necessary for proper financial management under this Contract;the accounting and control Systems shall lie
satisfactory to the Owner.The Owner and the Owner's accountants shall be afforded access to tie Constru�cti
Manager's records,books,correspondence,instructions,drawings,receipts,subcontracts,purchase orders;vouchers,
memoranda and other data relating to this Project,and the Construction Manager shall prestrvesthese for i pe`'ood of
three years after final payment,or for such longer period as may be required by law. �
ARTICLE 7 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
§7.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§7.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Construction Manager and
Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect,the Owner shall make progress payments on account of
Contract Sum to the Construction Manager as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Doclunefits.
§7.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month endinge last da} of
the month,or as follows:
§7.1.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the
Owner shall make payment to the Construction Manager not later than the js day of the month.'Jf an "f
Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above,pament shall be made "
by the Owner not later than ( g )days after the Architect receives the Application for 'ayntnt°b, <
I
§7.1.4 With each Application for Payment,the Construction Manager shall submit payrolls I pe y cash accounts;
receipted invoices or invoices with check vouchers attached and any other evidence required b the Owner' or
Architect to demonstrate that cash disbursements already made by the Construction Manager o account of the Cost
of the Work equal or exceed(1)progress payments already received by the Construction Mana er less 2 that
portion of those payments attributable to the Construction Manager's Fee;plus(3)payrolls for the period covered by
the present Application for Payment. -i
§7.1.5 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the most recent schedule of values submitted, y-the-h--•-_.„,,
Construction Manager in accordance with the Contract Documents.The schedule of values shal. ocate the entire �h
Guaranteed Maximum Price among the various portions of the Work,except that the Construction l2hager's Fee ° •.
shall be shown as a single separate item.The schedule of values shall be prepared in such fo and supported by
such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objectd to by the
Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Construction Manager's Applications fe•Pyment.
§7.1.6 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of
the period covered by the Application for Payment. The percentage completion shall be thelesser
percentage of that portion of the Work which has actually been completed or(2)the percent'age-4)btainW by dividing- .w.o
(a)the expense which has actually been incurred by the Construction Manager on account of that portion of the
AIA Document A1211CMC — 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by V.S. Copyri.ght Law and International.
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this doeument, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 12
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (515170148)
.5 Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design,process or product required by the
low Contract Documents;the cost of defending suits or claims for infringement of patent or other
intellectual property rights arising from such requirement by the Contract Documents;payments
made in accordance with legal judgments against the Construction Manager resulting from such suits
or claims and payments of settlements made with the Owner's consent;provided,however,that such
costs of legal defenses,judgment and settlements shall not be included in the,ealculation of the
Construction Manager's Fee or the Guaranteed Maximum Price and provided that such royalties,fees
and costs are not excluded by the last sentence of Section 3.17.1 of A201 TM .199<7 or other provisions
of the Contract Documents.
.6 Data processing costs related to the Work.
.7 Deposits lost for causes other than the Construction Manager's negligence or1fail °&&loll-a -- .
specific responsibility to the Owner set forth in this Agreement.
.8 Legal,mediation and arbitration costs,other than those arising from disputes between the Owner and
Construction Manager,reasonably incurred by the Construction Manager in the performance of the
Work and with the Owner's written permission,which permission shall not be unreasonably withheld.
.9 Expenses incurred in accordance with Construction Manager's standard persdftfl�l policy for
relocation and temporary living allowances of personnel required for the Work,in case it i¢essary
to relocate such personnel from distant locations.
§6.1.7 OTHER COSTS
.1 Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work if and to the extent approved in advance ip
writing by the Owner.
§6.1.8 EMERGENCIES AND REPAIRS TO DAMAGED OR NONCONFORMING WORK
The Cost of the Work shall also include costs described in Section 6.1.1 which are incurred by the Construction
Manager:
.1 In taking action to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss in case of an emergency affepting the °"
safety of persons and property,as provided in Section 10.6 of A201 TM-1997. `'
2 In repairing or correcting damaged or nonconforming Work executed by the ns anager 6r
truclion lVi
the Construction Manager's Subcontractors or suppliers,provided that such dames or R
nonconforming Work was not caused by the negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility t6
the Owner set forth in this agreement of the Construction Manager or the Constructor°°Manager s
foremen,engineers or superintendents, or other supervisory,administrative or managerial perwimel °
of the Construction Manager,or the failure of the Construction Manager's personnel to supervise
adequately the Work of the Subcontractors or suppliers,and only to the extent that the cost of repair
or correction is not recoverable by the Construction Manager from insurance,SubcontWors or
suppliers.
§6.1.9 The costs described in Sections 6.1.1 through 6.1.8 shall be included in the Cost of tlae Vork no
twthstandg`
any provision of AIA or A201 TM-1997 other Conditions of the Contract which may requires e'Constructi�n
Manager to pay such costs,unless such costs are excluded by the provisions of Section 6.2. F
§6.2 COSTS NOT TO BE REIMBURSED a
§6.2.1 The Cost of the Work shall not include: a
.1 Salaries and other compensation of the Construction Manager's personnel statiortecl-&the°°°°°
Construction Manager's principal office or offices other than the site office,except as specifically
provided in Sections 6.1.2.2 and 6.1.2.3. � n
.2 Expenses of the Construction Manager's principal office and offices other than the`sit office,except '
as specifically provided in Section 6.1.
.3 Overhead and general expenses,except as may be expressly included in Section 6
.4 The Construction Manager's capital expenses,including interest on the Construction Manager's
capital employed for the Work.
.5 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,except as specifically provided in Section 6.1.5.2.
.6 Except as provided in Section 6.1.8.2,costs due to the negligence of the Construction Manager or to
the failure of the Construction Manger to fulfill a specific responsibility to the Owner setTortli fi`fiis"` --
Agreement.
.7 Costs incurred in the performance of Preconstruction Phase Services.
AIA Document A121-CHO - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. W1,RNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or dis_ribution of ti:is document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2009 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (515170148)
Classification Name
w s Aftk,
(If it is intended that the wages or salaries of certain personnel stationed at the Construction
Manager's principal office or offices other than the site office shall be included in the Cost of the
Work, such personnel shall be identified below.)
.3 Wages and salaries of the Construction Manager's supervisory or administrative personnel engaged,
at factories,workshops or on the road,in expediting the production or transportation of materials or
equipment required for the Work,but only for that portion of their time requiredfor the Work.
.4 Costs paid or incurred by the Construction Manager for taxes,insurance,contributions,assessments
and benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements,and,for pe son;wI, -owedby
such agreements,customary benefits such as sick leave,medical and health> enefits,holidays,
vacations and pensions,provided that such costs are based on wages and salarie included in the Cost
of the Work under Sections 6.1.2.1 through 6.1.2.3.
§6.1.3 SUBCONTRACT COSTS -
Payments made by the Construction Manager to Subcontractors in accordance with the regire l ents of the"'
subcontracts.
A
§6.1.4 COSTS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED IN THE COMPLETED CONSTRICTION
.1 Costs,including transportation,of materials and equipment incorporated or 1p� be incorpo4ed'the
completed construction. --i
.2 Costs of materials described in the preceding Section 6.1.4.1 in excess of th' � c
required to provide reasonable allowance for waste and for spoilage.Unused excess materials,if any,
shall be handed over to the Owner at the completion of the Work or,at the Owner's option,shall be
sold by the Construction Manager;amounts realized,if any,from such sales shall be credited to --,"
Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work.
§6.1.5 COSTS OF OTHER MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT,TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND RELATED ITEMS"
.1 Costs,including transportation,installation,maintenance,dismantling and rein f materials„
supplies,temporary facilities,machinery,equipment,and hand tools not customarily o*-fted.bZ Uf e
construction workers,which are provided by the Construction Manager at the site a d�consum ,
in the performance of the Work;and cost less salvage value on such items if not fully consumed-
whether sold to others or retained by the Construction Manager.Cost for items previously used by tle ,
Construction Manager shall mean fair market value. "
.2 Rental charges for temporary facilities,machinery,equipment and hand tools not customarily owned
by the construction workers,which are provided by the Construction Manager the site,whether° :
rented from the Construction Manager or others,and costs of transportation,ftistallattok,,minor�
repairs and replacements,dismantling and removal thereof.Rates and quantifies pf equipm �
ent i�nte -`
shall be subject to the Owner's prior approval. _ 0
.3 Costs of removal of debris from the site. i
.4 Reproduction costs,costs of telegrams,facsimile transmissions and long-distance telephone cabs,
postage and express delivery charges,telephone at the site and reasonable pety taste e�es of the
site office. 1
.5 That portion of the reasonable travel and subsistence expenses of the ConstnicttvnxManager�s-° ---
personnel incurred while traveling in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
§6.1.6 MISCELLANEOUS COSTS
.1 That portion directly attributable to this Contract of premiums for insurance and bo�nds °.. ... "°w
(If charges for self-insurance are to be included, sped the basis of reimbu iemeht.)
.2 Sales,use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority which are related to the Work and for
which the Construction Manager is liable.
.3 Fees and assessments for the building permit and for other permits,licenses and inspections for which E
the Construction Manager is required by the Contract Documents to pay.
.4 Fees of testing laboratories for tests required by the Contract Documents,exceptt'thoseZADlatedto---..
nonconforming Work other than that for which payment is permitted by Section 6.1.8.2.
AIA Document A1211C:Me - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 10
Penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:16 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (515170148)
§5.1 COMPENSATION
§5.1.1 For the Construction Manager's performance of the Work as described in Section 2.3,the Owner shall pay the
Construction Manager in current funds the Contract Sum consisting of the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 7
and the Construction Manager's Fee determined as follows:
rY
(State a lump sum,percentage of actual Cost of the Work or other provision for determiniri th Construction
Manager's Fee, and explain how the Construction Manager's Fee is to be adjusted for charges in the Work.) -
§5.2 GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE
§5.2.1 The sum of the Cost of the Work and the Construction Manager's Fee are guaranteed by the Construction
Manager not to exceed the amount provided in Amendment No. 1,subject to additions and,deductions by changes in
the Work as provided in the Contract Documents.Such maximum sum as adjusted by apprdvedchanges in the Work
is referred to in the Contract Documents as the Guaranteed Maximum Price.Costs which w ?d cause the
Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded shall be paid by the Construction Manager witfttteimbursement by
the Owner.
(Insert specific provisions if the Construction Manager is to participate in any savings) i
§5.3 CHANGES IN THE WORK L--,--
§5.3.1 Adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price on account of changes in the Work subsequent to the
execution of Amendment No. 1 may be determined by any of the methods listed in Section 7.3.3 of A201TM-1997.
§5.3.2 In calculating adjustments to subcontracts(except those awarded with the Owner's prior consent on the basis ,---
of cost plus a fee),the terms"cost"and"fee" as used in Section 7.3.3.3 of A201TM-1997 and the terms"costs",and
"a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit"as used in Section 7.3.6 of A201TM-1997 shad hay .tlte easing
assigned to them in that document and shall not be modified by this Article 5.Adjustments to s ntracts awaide
with the Owner's prior consent on the basis of cost plus a fee shall be calculated in accordLce�wvith the
an "°termis of
those subcontracts.
§5.3.3 In calculating adjustments to the Contract,the terms"cost"and"costs"as used in the above-referenced
provisions of A201TM-1997 shall mean the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 6 of this Agreement,and the term
and a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" shall mean the Construction Manager's Fee defined in
Section 5.1.1 of this Agreement. y s f
§5.3.4 If no specific provision is made in Section 5.1.1 for adjustment of the Construction 4anager's Fee in the case`"'
of changes in the Work,or if the extent of such changes is such,in the aggregate,that applieati4n of the adjustment
provisions of Section 5.1.1 will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Construction Mahager,the Construction
Manager's Fee shall be equitably adjusted on the basis of the Fee established for the original Work. I
i
ARTICLE 6 COST OF THE WORK FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE tlT
§6.1 COSTS TO BE REIMBURSED
§6.1.1 The term"Cost of the Work"shall mean costs necessarily incurred by the Construction Manager in the proper
performance of the Work.Such costs shall be at rates not higher than those customarily paid at the place-of-the ,K,>
Project except with prior consent of the Owner.The Cost of the Work shall include only the items'iet forth in th is
Article 6.
§6.1.2 LABOR COSTS
.1 Wages of construction workers directly employed by the Construction Manager to perform the
construction of the Work at the site or,with the Owner's agreement,at off-site workshops.
.2 Wages or salaries of the Construction Manager's supervisory and administra3ve personnel when
stationed at the site with the Owner's agreement.
AIA Document A121"CMe - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Cnpyrig:^.t I,aw and International 9
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and cri!ninal
x;Enalties, and will LE prcaecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
U (515170198)
User Notes:
in B15 I T"—1997,requested by the Construction Manager which must necessarily be provided by the Architect for
the Preconstruction and Construction Phases of the Work. Such services shall be provided in accordance with time
schedules agreed to by the Owner,Architect and Construction Manager.Upon request of the Construction Manager,
the Owner shall furnish to the Construction Manager a copy of the Owner's Agreement with the Architect,from
which compensation provisions may be deleted.
a
§3.4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall determine and advise the Architect and Construction Manager of any special legal requirements
relating specifically to the Project which differ from those generally applicable to construction in the jurisdiction of
the Project.The Owner shall furnish such legal services as are necessary to provide the information and services
required under Section 3.1.
r
ARTICLE 4 COMPENSATION AND PAYMENTS FOR PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES
The Owner shall compensate and make payments to the Construction Manager for PreconstnicTon Phase services as
follows:
§4.1 COMPENSATION g
§4.1.1 For the services described in Sections 2.1 and 2.2,the Construction Manager's compensation shall be
calculated as follows:
(State basis of compensation, whether a stipulated sum, multiple of Direct Personnel Expense, actual cost, etc.
Include a statement of reimbursable cost items as applicable.)
§4.1.2 Compensation for Preconstruction Phase Services shall be equitably adjusted if such services xtend n( ,
( :)days from the date of this Agreement or if the originally contemplated scope of services is significantly
modified.
§4.1.3 If compensation is based on a multiple of Direct Personnel Expense,Direct Personnel Expenses,4efined as4.w�„
the direct salaries of the Construction Manager's personnel engaged in the Project and the portion of the c stoftheir
mandatory and customary contributions and benefits related thereto,such as employment taxes and other statutory'
employee benefits, insurance,sick leave,holidays,vacations,pensions and similar contributions and benefits.
§4.2 PAYMENTS
§4.2.1 Payments shall be made monthly following presentation of the Construction Manager's invoice and,wee a
applicable,shall be in proportion to services performed. _ °
§4.2.2 Payments are due and payable.M (- .)days from the date the Construction Managers invoice i%receive
by the Owner.Amounts unpaid after the date on which payment is due shall bear interest at ihe Tate entered below,
or in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located
(Insert rate of interest agreed upon)
(Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws a
and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location a d`
elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision.Legal advice should be obtained with re0ect`to deletions or
modifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.)
ARTICLE 5 COMPENSATION FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES
� I
The Owner shall compensate the Construction Manager for Construction Phase services as follows: —
AIA Document A121"CMe - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 8
penalties, and will I prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under t law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2009 he under Order No.1000144197-1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (515170148)
ARTICLE 3 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
§3.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES
§3.1.1 The Owner shall provide full information in a timely manner regarding the requirements of the Project,
including a program which sets forth the Owner's objectives,constraints and criteria,including space requirements
and relationships,flexibility and expandability requirements,special equipment and systems,and site requirements.
§3.1.2 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Construction Manager prior to commencement of the
Construction Phase and thereafter,furnish to the Construction Manager reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence
shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work.After such evidence Yas�een ` .—.
furnished,the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice te��astrtican
Manager.
§3.1.3 The Owner shall establish and update an overall budget for the Project,based on consultation with the
Construction Manager and Architect,which shall include contingencies for changes in the WA and other costs
which are the responsibility of the Owner.
§3.1.4 STRUCTURAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS,SURVEYS AND REPORTS
In the Preconstruction Phase,the Owner shall furnish the following with reasonable promptness and at thef,Owner's
expense.Except to the extent that the Construction Manager knows of any inaccuracy,the Construction Manager
shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy of any such information,reports,surveys,drawings and tests described in
Sections 3.1.4.1 through 3.1.4.4 but shall exercise customary precautions relating to the perfonfiance-of tlre W rlc
§3.1.4.1 Reports,surveys,drawings and tests concerning the conditions of the site which are required by law.
§3.1.4.2 Surveys describin g physical characteristics legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Pro e.ct;'-
,�.� .
and a written legal description of the site.The surveys and legal information shall include,as applicable ,grades and,,%-�,
lines of streets,alleys,pavements and adjoining property and structures;adjacent drainage;rights;o&--ay,
restrictions,easements,encroachments,zoning,deed restrictions,boundaries and contours 4-the srte,.locations' I
dimensions and necessary data pertaining to existing buildings,other improvements and trees;andanfformation
concerning available utility services and lines,both public and private,above and below grade,,including ayert,s and
depths.All information on the survey shall be referenced to a project benchmark.
§3.1.4.3 The services of a geotechnical engineer when such services are requested by the Construction Manager.
Such services may include but are not limited to test borings,test pits,determinations of soil bearing values,
percolation tests,evaluations of hazardous materials,ground corrosion and resistivity tests,including-necessary i
operations for anticipating subsoil conditions,with reports and appropriate professional recommendations.
§3.1.4.4 Structural,mechanical,chemical,air and water pollution tests,tests for hazardous materials,and dither
laboratory and environmental tests,inspections and reports which are required by laws
§3.1.4.5 The services of other consultants when such services are reasonably required by the scepe of the project and
are requested by the Construction Manager. e ,
w?
§3.2 OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE
The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with
respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization.This representative shall have Jheauthonty t
make decisions on behalf of the Owner concerning estimates and schedules,construction budgets;and chan ges in a
the Work,and shall render such decisions promptly and furnish information expeditiously,so-is to�av`61a'
unreasonable delay in the services or Work of the Construction Manager.Except as otherwise provided in Section
4.2.1 of A201 TM-1997,the Architect does not have such authority.
r
§3.3 ARCHITECT ¢
The Owner shall retain an Architect to provide Basic Services,including normal structural,mechanical and
electrical engineering services,other than cost estimating services,described in the edition of ATAVMd—Ci ment` `-
B 151 TM-1997,Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Architect current as of-tl�e slat of - "
this Agreement.The Owner shall authorize and cause the Architect to provide those Additional Services described
AIA Document A121"CMC - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyrig:^.t Law and International. 7
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
psn2:lties, and will be prosecuted to the maxivrm extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
- (515170148)
User Notes:
(1) the Owner's acceptance of the Construction Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal and
issuance of a Notice to Proceed,or A0
(2) the Owner's first authorization to the Construction Manager to:
(a)award a subcontract,or
(b)undertake construction Work with the Construction Manager's own forces,or
(c)issue a purchase order for materials or equipment required for the Work.
§2.3.2 ADMINISTRATION
§2.3.2.1 Those portions of the Work that the Construction Manager does not customarily perform with the
Construction Manager's own personnel shall be performed under subcontracts or by other appropnafeagreements
with the Construction Manager.The Construction Manager shall obtain bids from Subcontr ctoas-a� suppl -- '
of materials or equipment fabricated to a special design for the Work from the list previously reviewed and,after
analyzing such bids,shall deliver such bids to the Owner and Architect.The Owner will them determine,with the
advice of the Construction Manager and subject to the reasonable objection of the Architect which bids will be
accepted.The Owner may designate specific persons or entities from whom the Constructioanager shall obtain
bids;however,if the Guaranteed Maximum Price has been established,the Owner may not prohibit the Construction
Manager from obtaining bids from other qualified bidders.The Construction Manager shal`nofbe require�r
contract with anyone to whom the Construction Manager has reasonable objection.
§2.3.2.2 If the Guaranteed Maximum Price has been established and a specific bidder among those whose`bids are
delivered by the Construction Manager to the Owner and Architect(1)is recommended to the Owner by the
Construction Manager;(2)is qualified to perform that portion of the Work;and(3)has subtnittetl at'id`which'
conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents without reservations or exceptions�.]�
that another bid be accepted,then the Construction Manager may require that a change in the Work be issued to
adjust the Contract Time and the Guaranteed Maximum Price by the difference between the bid of the person or
entity recommended to the Owner by the Construction Manager and the amount of the subcontract or other
agreement actually signed with the person or entity designated by the Owner.
§2.3.2.3 Subcontracts and agreements with suppliers furnishing materials or equipment fabricated to cial design
shall conform to the payment provisions of Sections 7.1.8 and 7.1.9 and shall not be awarded on basis of cost
plus a fee without the prior consent of the Owner. .. e
§2.3.2.4 The Construction Manager shall schedule and conduct meetings at which the Owner,Architect,
Construction Manager and appropriate Subcontractors can discuss the status of the Work.The Construction
Manager shall prepare and promptly distribute meeting minutes.
§2.3.2.5 Promptly after the Owner's acceptance of the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal,)he Construction
Manager shall prepare a schedule in accordance with Section 3.10 of A201 TM-1997, including tbd-Ow� i er's
occupancy requirements.
§2.3.2.6 The Construction Manager shall provide monthly written reports to the Owner and krlhitect on e °
progress of the entire Work.The Construction Manager shall maintain a daily log contains a iecord of weather,
Subcontractors working on the site,number of workers,Work accomplished,problems encounred and other
similar relevant data as the Owner may reasonably require.The log shall be available to thebwner and Architect.
§2.3.2.7 The Construction Manager shall develop a system of cost control for the Work,including regular
monitoring of actual costs for activities in progress and estimates for uncompleted tasks and proposed changes-hg,
Construction Manager shall identify variances between actual and estimated costs and report the,-variances to the
Owner and Architect at regular intervals.
§2.4 PROFESSIONAL SERVICES `
Section 3.12.10 of A201 T"X1997 shall apply to both the Preconstruction and Construction Phases.
g"g
Y # E
§2.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Section 10.3 of A201TK-1997 shall apply to both the Preconstruction and Construction Phases.
AIA Document A121"CMc — 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by V.S. Copyright Law and International.
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 6
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197-1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(515170146)
the Drawings and Specifications by the Architect that is consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably
inferable therefrom. Such further development does not include such things as changes in scope,systems,kinds and
quality of materials,finishes or equipment,all of which,if required,shall be incorporated by Change Order.
§2.2.3 The estimated Cost of the Work shall include the Construction Manager's contingency,a sum established by
the Construction Manager for the Construction Manager's exclusive use to cover costs arisi g-under Section 2.2.2
and other costs which are properly reimbursable as Cost of the Work but not the basis for a Change Order.
§2.2.4 BASIS OF GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE x �
The Construction Manager shall include with the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal a wntte"tatement of4ts——
basis,which shall include:
.1 A list of the Drawings and Specifications,including all addenda thereto and the Conditions of the
Contract,which were used in preparation of the Guaranteed Maximum Priceproposal.
.2 A list of allowances and a statement of their basis.
.3 A list of the clarifications and assumptions made by the Construction Managerin the preparation of
the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal to supplement the information contained in the Drawngs
and Specifications. F
.4 The proposed Guaranteed Maximum Price,including a statement of the estimated cost organized by
trade categories,allowances,contingency,and other items and the Fee that c in the Guaranteed
Maximum Price.
.5 The Date of Substantial Completion upon which the proposed Guaranteed 1vl aximutn`Price"is based,` ` .
and a schedule of the Construction Documents issuance dates upon which tN-datrQf.SW 1.iaL-- , -
Completion is based.
,w.tt
§2.2.5 The Construction Manager shall meet with the Owner and Architect to review the Guaranteed Maximum
Price proposal and the written statement of its basis.In the event that the Owner or Architect discover any.---,
inconsistencies or inaccuracies in the information presented,they shall promptly notify the Construction Manager,
who shall make appropriate adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal,its basis,or both i
§2.2.6 Unless the Owner accepts the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal in writing on or before the date.,spenified
in the proposal for such acceptance and so notifies the Construction Manager,the Guaranteed Max Pnce
proposal shall not be effective without written acceptance by the Construction Manager. . ..
§2.2.7 Prior to the Owner's acceptance of the Construction Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal and
issuance of a Notice to Proceed,the Construction Manager shall not incur any cost to be reimbursed-as.W of the
Cost of the Work,except as the Owner may specifically authorize in writing.
§2.2.8 Upon acceptance by the Owner of the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal,the Guaranteed Maxffiiur', rice
and its basis shall be set forth in Amendment No. 1.The Guaranteed Maximum Price shall be subject to additions
and deductions by a change in the Work as provided in the Contract Documents,and the Date of Substantial
Completion shall be subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents.
§2.2.9 The Owner shall authorize and cause the Architect to revise the Drawings and Specifications to the extent
necessary to reflect the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications contained in Amendment°No I:~Such revisedd–
Drawings and Specifications shall be furnished to the Construction Manager in accordance with schedules agreed to
by the Owner,Architect and Construction Manager.The Construction Manager shall promptly notify.theArchitect,
and Owner if such revised Drawings and Specifications are inconsistent with the agreed-upon assumptions and
clarifications.`
x a
§2.2.10 The Guaranteed Maximum Price shall include in the Cost of the Work only those taxes which are enacted at
the time the Guaranteed Maximum Price is established. F
I
l
§2.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASE a m
' §2.3.1 GENERALw
e' S
§2.3.1.1 The Construction Phase shall commence on the earlier of: �- w
AIA Document A1211CMc - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International 5
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of thin document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and crimir:al
penalties, a:. will be prosecuted to the maximum extent passible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
U (515170198)
User Notes:
§2.1.5 PRELIMINARY COST ESTIMATES
§2.1.5.1 When the Owner has sufficiently identified the Project requirements and the Architect has prepared other
basic design criteria,the Construction Manager shall prepare,for the review of the Architect and approval of the
Owner,a preliminary cost estimate utilizing area,volume or similar conceptual estimating techniques.
§2.1.5.2 When Schematic Design Documents have been prepared by the Architect and approved by the Owner,the
Construction Manager shall prepare,for the review of the Architect and approval of the Owner,1 a more detailed
estimate with supporting data.During the preparation of the Design Development Documents,the Construction
Manager shall update and refine this estimate at appropriate intervals agreed to by the Owner, he
and
Construction Manager.
§2.1.5.3 When Design Development Documents have been prepared by the Architect and approved by the Owner,
the Construction Manager shall prepare a detailed estimate with supporting data for review by the Architect and
approval by the Owner.During the preparation of the Construction Documents,the Construction Manager shall
update and refine this estimate at appropriate intervals agreed to by the Owner,Architect anonstruction Manager.
§2.1.5.4 If any estimate submitted to the Owner exceeds previously approved estimates or the Owner's bullet-,the
Construction Manager shall make appropriate recommendations to the Owner and Architect. "
§2.1.6 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS b
s
The Construction Manager shall seek to develop subcontractor interest in the Project and shall furnish to the Qwner
and Architect for their information a list of possible subcontractors,including suppliers who are-Mf rrnish materials �
or equipment fabricated to a special design,from whom proposals will be requested for eac �gip l,.pq
Work.The Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Construction Manager if the Architect or Owner know of
any objection to such subcontractor or supplier.The receipt of such list shall not require the Owner or Architect to
investigate the qualifications of proposed subcontractors or suppliers,nor shall it waive the right of the Owner o
Architect later to object to or reject any proposed subcontractor or supplier.
§2.1.7 LONG-LEAD-TIME ITEMS
The Construction Manager shall recommend to the Owner and Architect a schedule for proCureniemt of lon--t*-lead- i
time items which will constitute part of the Work as required to meet the Project schedule.If h long'°-lenme
items are procured by the Owner,they shall be procured on terms and conditions acceptable to the'Constructi o t
Manager.Upon the Owner's acceptance of the Construction Manager's Guaranteed Maximum Price prop'-S' all
contracts for such items shall be assigned by the Owner to the Construction Manager,who shall accept
responsibility for such items as if procured by the Construction Manager.The Construction Manager shall expedite
the delivery of long-lead-time items. '"
§2.1.8 EXTENT OF RESPONSIBILITY
The Construction Manager does not warrant or guarantee estimates and schedules except as�ma�be included it�paxt
of the Guaranteed Maximum Price.The recommendations and advice of the Construction Manager concerning
design alternatives shall be subject to the review and approval of the Owner and the Owner's prpfessional '
consultants. It is not the Construction Manager's responsibility to ascertain that the Drawings a#d Specifications are
in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,rules and regulations.flowever,if th
Construction Manager recognizes that portions of the Drawings and Specifications are at variance therewith,the
Construction Manager shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing.
§2.1.9 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION -4S �
The Construction Manager shall comply with applicable laws,regulations and special requirements'of the Contract "« F
Documents regarding equal employment opportunity and affirmative action programs. �. .
§2.2 GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT TIME
§2.2.1 When the Drawings and Specifications are sufficiently complete,the Construction Manager shall propose a
Guaranteed Maximum Price,which shall be the sum of the estimated Cost of the Work and she Construction
Manager's Fee.
§2.2.2 As the Drawings and Specifications may not be finished at the time the Guaranteed Maximum-Price proposal.... ..
is prepared,the Construction Manager shall provide in the Guaranteed Maximum Price for further development of
ASA Document A121-CMe - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International.
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil znd criminal 4
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(515170198)
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§1.1 RELATIONSHIP OF PARTIES
The Construction Manager accepts the relationship of trust and confidence established with the Owner by this
Agreement,and covenants with the Owner to furnish the Construction Manager's reasonable skill and judgment and
to cooperate with the Architect in furthering the interests of the Owner.The Construction Manager shall furnish
construction administration and management services and use the Construction Manager's besfforts to perform the
Project in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of the Owner:The Owner shall
endeavor to promote harmony and cooperation among the Owner,Architect,Construction Manager and other
persons or entities employed by the Owner for the Project. � ��
§1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS ... _..
i
For the Construction Phase,the General Conditions of the contract shall be the AIA®Document t A201 TM-1997,
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,which is incorporated herein by reference r For the
Preconstruction Phase,or in the event that the Preconstruction and Construction Phases proceed concurrently,
A201TM-1997 shall apply to the Preconstruction Phase only as specifically provided in this lgreement.The term
"Contractor"as used in A201TM-1997 shall mean the Construction Manager.
ARTICLE 2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Construction Manager shall perform the services described in this Article.The services,to be provided under
Sections 2.1 and 2.2 constitute the Preconstruction Phase services.If the Owner and Constrtictien Manager agree,
after consultation with the Architect,the Construction Phase may commence before the Pre construction Phase is
completed,in which case both phases will proceed concurrently.
§2.1 PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE
§2.1.1 PRELIMINARY EVALUATION x
The Construction Manager shall provide a preliminary evaluation of the Owner's program and Project budget n "`
requirements,each in terms of the other. w ,
§2.1.2 CONSULTATION I
The Construction Manager with the Architect shall jointly schedule and attend regular meetings iith the Owner,.
The Construction Manager shall consult with the Owner and Architect regarding site use and-improvement and the
selection of materials,building systems and equipment. The Construction Manager shall provide re en daE ons„
on construction feasibility;actions designed to minimize adverse effects of labor or material shortages;time
requirements for procurement,installation and construction completion;and factors related to construction cost,
including estimates of alternative designs or materials,preliminary budgets and possible economies.
§2.1.3 PRELIMINARY PROJECT SCHEDULE
When Project requirements described in Section 3.1.1 have been sufficiently identified,the(onstrichon Managef 'p
shall prepare,and periodically update,a preliminary Project schedule for the Architect's re vew�and the Owners ,,
approval.The Construction Manager shall obtain the Architect's approval of the portion of�he 1�rel'
mina nj Project
schedule relating to the performance of the Architect's services.The Construction Manager°hcoordina*and
integrate the preliminary Project schedule with the services and activities of the Owner,Ariit I t and Construction
Manager.As design proceeds,the preliminary Project schedule shall be updated to indicate.pro�osed activity W, M
sequences and durations,milestone dates for receipt and approval of pertinent information,submittal of a
Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal,preparation and processing of shop drawings and samples-,delivery-wof
materials or equipment requiring long-lead-time procurement,Owner's occupancy requirements showing portions of
the Project having occupancy priority,and proposed date of Substantial Completion.If preliminary Project-schedule",
updates indicate that previously approved schedules may not be met,the Construction Manage r Ball make� �
appropriate recommendations to the Owner and Architect. ` m
§2.1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION 4
The Construction Manager shall make recommendations to the Owner and Architect regarding the phased issuance
of Drawings and Specifications to facilitate phased construction of the Work,if such phased construction is
appropriate for the Project,taking into consideration such factors as economies,time of performance,availability of
labor and materials,and provisions for temporary facilities. 1
AIA Document A121104c - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and In torrati.onal 3
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion o_` it, may result ir; severe civil and 10:34nal
penalties, 'I'd will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:39:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/l/05, and is not for resale.
U (515170198)
User Notes:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§1.1 Relationship of the Parties
§1.2 General Conditions
ARTICLE 2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
-
§2.1 Preconstruction Phase {
§2.2 Guaranteed Maximum Price Proposal and Contract Time
§2.3 Construction Phase
_. �
§2.4 Professional Services
§2.5 Hazardous Materials
ARTICLE 3 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
§3.1 Information and Services
§3.2 Owner's Designated Representative
§3.3 Architect
§3.4 Legal Requirements
ARTICLE 4 COMPENSATION AND PAYMENTS FOR PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES
§4.1 Compensation
§4.2 Payments r
ARTICLE 5 COMPENSATION FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES Po
§5.1 Compensation
§5.2 Guaranteed Maximum Price
§5.3 Changes in the Work
ARTICLE 6 COST OF THE WORK FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE
§6.1 Costs to Be Reimbursed �I
§6.2 Costs Not to Be Reimbursed
§6.3 Discounts,Rebates and Refunds
§6.4 Accounting Records mow.
ARTICLE 7 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
§7.1 Progress Payments
§7.2 Final Payment ��
ARTICLE 8 INSURANCE AND BONDS "
§8.1 Insurance Required of the Construction Manager
§8.2 Insurance Required of the Owner
§8.3 Performance Bond and Payment Bond I
ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
I
§9.1 Dispute Resolution
§9.2 Other Provisions
ARTICLE 10 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION „
§10.1 Termination Prior to Establishing Guaranteed Maximum Price
§10.2 Termination Subsequent to Establishing Guaranteed Maximum Price
§10.3 Suspension
ARTICLE 11 OTHER CONDITIONS AND SERVICES
AIA Document A121a'CMc - 2003 and AGC Document 565. Copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Iaw and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, or distribution. of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 2
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum ertent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under Order No.1000144197_1 which expires on 11/l/05, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(515170148)
Ws A AIA Document A121'CMc - 2003
and AGC Document 565
Standard Form. of Agreement Between Owner and Construction
Manager
where the Construction Manager is Also the Cons"trot® m,
AGREEMENT
made as of the day of FZ in the year of
(In words, indicate day, month and year)
;ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
BETWEEN the Owner: The author �f
this document
(Name and address) !has' added information
$needed for its completion.
i The author stay also have
;revised the text o'i th&
and the Construction Manager: An Additions and Deletion
Report that notes ,dde
(Name and address)
information aw well a4H�"°^`'J
revis' ns to t" standard
arm teyt—i available from
thhor and shoyld be
�re" wed.��"".w � }
The Project is:
(Name, address and brief description) This document-hap�importa-,t
legal consequences.
Consultation with an
• atie is encoura 'with
Y , • 9
F, 4" tespe t-tq it, completion'
p
or Podifica iO'X)'
The Architect is: The 1997 Edtio ,of AIA®
(Name and address) �Doqument A2 1-4 General
Conditions Of he Contract
.. � �.s<�.�.,....�«,.
* , for Construction, i
�.� ����_� k . . �� ���• �._ e �' _ -�. verted"tv-hereirr:°.T},ii°s„°,
Agreement requires
The Owner and Construction Manager agree as set forth below: modif'rati6h'-T ether
geu ral condom-are
utilzed.
n �
4 e
a s
t
ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
prohibited and constitutes a
violation of copyright laws
as set forth in the footer of
wo, this document.
AIA Document A121e1CMc - 2003 and AGC Document 565. copyright O 1991 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects and The Associated
General Contractors of America. All rights reserved. WARNING: This document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International 1
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and cri,`nal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maxinr,:m extent, possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:18 on
11/11/2004 under order No.1000144197 1 which expires on 11/1/05, and is not for resale.
(515170148)
User Notes:
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08111.........STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.............................................................................. 8
08211.........FLUSH WOOD DOORS................................................................................................................. 5
08212.........STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS............................................................................................... 6
08411.........ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.................................................. 13
08550.........WOOD WINDOWS........................................................................................................................ 4
08712.........DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)................................... 12
08800.........GLAZING.......................................................................................................................................... 9
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09260.........GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES................................................................................................... 13
09310.........CERAMIC TILE............................................................................................................................... 7
09511.........ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS................................................................................................ 5
09651.........RESILIENT FLOOR TILE............................................................................................................... 6
09680.........CARPET............... ............................................................................................................................ 6
09720.........WALL COVERINGS....................................................................................................................... 4
09911.........EXTERIOR PAINTING..........................................:........................................................................ 7
09912.........INTERIOR PAINTING................................................................................................................... 9
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10801.........TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES........................................................................................... 2
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
15400.........PLUMBING...................................................................................................................................... 20
15600.........HVAC................................................................................................................................................ 37
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
16100.........ELECTRICAL................................................................................................................................... 30
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
TABLE OF CONTENTS-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division.....Section Title....... ............ ....... . .......... .......... .... ............... .................. . ........ ......... Page
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS
A121/CMc STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONST.MGR.......... 16
A121/CMc-a AMENDMENT TO A121/CMc.................................................................................................. 2
A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION........................ 44
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION
02100.........SITE DEMOLITION, CLEARING&GRUBBING...................................................................... 3
02200.........EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING................................................................................: 11
02300.........STORM DRAINAGE....................................................................................................................... 10
02600.........BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURBING..................................................... 8
02640.........SITE MASONRY.............................................................................................................................. 5
02666.........WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM............................................................................................... 7
02730.........SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 8
02800.........PLANTING....................................................................................................................................... 9
02850.........SEEDING.......................................................................................................................................... 6
02950.........SITE IMPROVEMENTS.................................................................................................................. 2
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
03300.........CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE....................................................................................................... 7
03450.........ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE............................................................................... 13
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04810.........UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES.................................................................................................... 17
DIVISION 5-METALS
05500.........METAL FABRICATIONS............................................................................................................... 8
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100.........ROUGH CARP ENTRY................................................................................................................... 8
06160.........SHEATHING.................................................................................................................................... 4
06176.........METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES..................................................................... 6
06200.........FINISH CARPENTRY..................................................................................................................... 6
06402.........INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK......................................................................... 10
DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210.........BUILDING INSULATION ............................................................................................................. 6
07610.........SHEET METAL ROOFING............................................................................................................ 13
07710.........MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES................................................................................... 7
07920.........JOINT SEALANTS........................................................................................................................... 8
04018-Northampton Cooperative Bank
Florence,Massachusetts
TABLE OF CONTENTS-1
PROJECT MANUAL
NORTHAMPTON COOPERATIVE BANK
FLORENCE BRANCH
FLORENCE, MASSACHUSETTS
November 10, 2004
Kuhn Riddle Architects,Inc.
7 North Pleasant Street
Amherst,MA 01002
(413)259-1630
fax(413)259-1621
Civil Engineer
Berkshire Design Group
4 Allen Place
Northampton,MA 01060
(413)582-7000
fax(413)582-7005
Structural Engineer
Monadnock Engineering
97 Kimball Road
Rindge,NH 03461
(603)899-9714
fax(603)899-9714
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers
Lindgren&Sharples,P.C.
435 Cottage St.
Springfield,MA 01104
(413)7324336
fax(413)731-0786
Geotechnical Engineer
ECS Marin
Midstate Office Park
27 Midstate Dr.,Suite 218
Auburn,MA 01501
(508)832-6022
fax(508)832-4603
PROJECT MANUAL
NORTHAMPTON COOPERATIVE BANK
FLORENCE BRANCH
FLORENCE, MASSACHUSETTS
Sr
November 10, 2004